F'OR  HEW  YORK  BAY  AND  EiARBOR  TO  YONKERS 
AND  GREAT  CAPTAIN  ISLAND 


By  CAPT.  R.  M.  PUQSLEY 


DUKE 

UNIVERSITY 

LIBRARY 


FRIENDS  OF 
DUKE  UNIVERSITY 
LIBRARY 


GIFT  OF 


m 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016  with  funding  from 
Duke  University  Libraries  - 


, https://archive.org/details/pugsleysnewyorkp01pugs 


PUGSLEY’S 


'I 

AND  GUIDE 


TO  THE 

United  States 

Local  Inspectors  Examination 

OF 

MASTERS  AND  PILOTS 

FOR 

NEW  YORK  BAY  AND  HARBOR  TO  YONKERS 
AND  GREAT  CAPTAIN  ISLAND 

AND  A 

COMPLETE  NEW  YORK  PILOT 

CONTAINING  ALL  USEFUL  INFORMATION 

BY 

CAPT.  R.  M.  PUGSLEY 

Author  of  “The  Pilot,”  “How  to  Do  the  Work,”  “The  Navigator,” 
“Mariner’s  Guide,”  “Current-Course  Projector,”  “Course  Pro- 
tractor,” “Learner’s  Compass  Card,”  '•Course  Corrector,” 

“Guide  to  U.  S.  Local  Inspectors  Examination  of  Masters 
and  Mates  of  Ocean-Going  Steam  and  Sail  Vessels,”  etc. 

EXPERT  INSTRUCTOR  IN  NAVIGATION 


jPRICE,  S2.00 

Published  by 

R.  M.  RUGSLRY 

NEW  YORK  CITY,  N.  Y. 

1916 


Copj^right,  1916,  by  R.  M.  Pugsley 


TABLE  FOR  CONVERTING  POINTS  INTO  DEGREES  AND  THE  CONTRARY 


..... 


N-rsijxT  . 

. . . 


C/3«3COa}tBM[/5CCa2XU372C/2CCa3XCO'7:cOXX-XX: 


Hwa 


.aaa,„-  . . . 


>... 


in  in-/}  a a 


.aaa 

;^^aaaa 


^ ^ i*..  'J^  ‘J^ 


i/3c/3cflM73  72ccaiaiMc/3tcMy3c/3t/3a3c/jxa3Mait/;aaaaaaaaa 


; X o ir:  « • 


5t5S?  S^’S?  S^sSS 

T-tr-it-<r-(C'lc<c<e4coccxffOTj<'»j'-rj«rriOir:if5i:5:s^2:2:ct-i'»i-i'~X 


■ • • • 


■ • • •>■>> 

t ^ ^ ^ S>- > >•  Z 2 

ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ^^?^^?^^^ 


aaa 


•aaa 


.. -..H.^aaaa  

z^^'“'^’°'“zzzzaaaaaaaaaaaazzzz'^^^^" 

zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzaaaaaaaaa 


CX3.?‘iASj 

? ? 7i/^ 


PREFACE 

The  chief  object  of  this  work  is  to  produce  in  one  volume  a 
standard  Examination  Guide  and  complete  New  York  Pilot  con- 
taining the  most  important  information  of  the  port  not  generally 
published  in  a form  conveniently  available. 

Any  applicant  for  a license  as  master  or  pilot  who  writes  the 
answers  to  the  questions  given  him  so  as  to  contain  the  substance 
of  those  given  in  these  pages  will  obtain  the  license  for  which  he  is 
eligible,  and  every  applicant  should  understand  the  Pilot  Rules 
thoroughly,  as  the  examination  in  that  branch  is  a rigid  one. 
A few  days’  practice  with  models  placed  in  every  possible  position 
before  entering  the  examination  should  not  be  neglected. 

All  that  is  required  for  an  applicant  to  prepare  himself  is 
contained  herein,  and  the  time  and  expense  of  attending  school 
may  be  saved. 

An  applicant  for  a license  of  any  kind  should  not  attend  any 
school  which  does  not  guarantee  in  writing  that  he  will  not  fail 
at  the  examination,  and  agrees  also  in  writing  to  return  his 
money  to  him  in  case  of  failure. 

In  addition  to  the  requirements  of  the  examination,  consid- 
eration has  been  given  the  general  arrangement  of  the  subject, 
that  it  may  fully  satisfy  the  demand  for  a complete  New  York 
Pilot  and  also  a work  of  reference  for  the  practical  navigator, 
yachtsman  and  others. 


R.  M.  PUGSLEY. 


Books  and  Instruments 

by 

CAPT.  R.  M.  PUQSLEY 

FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS 


CAPT.  PUQSLEY’S  GUIDE  to  the  U.  S.  Local  In- 
spectors Examination  of  Masters  and  Mates  of 
Ocean-Going  Steam  and  Sailing  Ships,  with  com- 
plete instructions  and  information  for  those  who 
wish  to  learn  navigation  and  save  the  expense 
of  attending  school  by  preparing  themselves  for 
the  examination.  Price,  $2.00. 

CAPT.  PUQSLEY’S  NEW  YORK  PILOT  AND  GUIDE 

to  the  U.  S.  Local  Inspectors  Examination  of 
Masters  and  Pilots  for  New  York  Bay  and  Harbor. 
Covers  inland  pilot  examinations  generally  except 
the  sailing  directions.  Price,  $2.00. 

CAPT.  PUQSLEY’S  TIDES.  A special  work  on  com- 
putation of  tides  for  use  of  applicants  for  U.  S. 
Local  Inspectors  licenses.  Contains  18  problems 
worked  by  two  methods,  covering  everj^  condition 
with  detailed  explanation  for  each  one.  Price  $2.00. 

CAPT.  PUQSLEY’S  LEARNER’S  COMPASS  CARD. 

— For  those  who  wish  to  learn  the  compass. 

Price,  50  Cents. 


Any  of  the  abo7'e  bcoAs  sent  to  any  address 
071  receipt  of  price  by 


CAPT.  R.  n.  PUQSLEY 

17  South  Street,  New  York  City 


HOW  TO  OBTAIN  A LICENSE 


First,  go  to  the  United  States  local  inspectors  of  steam 
vessels,  obtain  a blank  application  and  an  order  to  the  Marine 
Hospital  Surgeon,  who  will  examine  the  eyes.  Then  fill  in  the 
application  with  the  experience,  stating  the  name  and  gross 
tonnage  of  each  vessel,  the  capacity  served  in  and  period  of 
service. 

The  application  must  be  signed  by  persons  holding  a certificate 
of  a grade  not  lower  than  that  for  which  the  application  calls. 
Or  it  may  be  signed  by  owners  or  agents  of  vessels  in  which 
the  applicant  has  served.  The  signers  must  be  of  good  reputa- 
tion and  have  a personal  knowledge  of  the  correctness  of  the 
statements  set  forth  in  the  application.  Three  signers  are 
required. 

The  statements  set  forth  in  the  application  must  be  supported 
by  letters  or  discharges  from  the  masters,  owners  or  agents  of 
the  vessels  in  which  the  applicant  has  served. 


NOTICE 

An  Act  To  amend  section  forty-four  hundred  and  forty-five,  of 
title  fifty-two,  of  the  Eevised  Statutes  of  the  United  States 
relating  to  the  licensing  of  officers  of  steam  vessels. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives  of  the 
United  States  of  America  in  Congress  assembled,  That  section 
forty-four  hundred  and  forty-five,  of  title  fifty-two,  of  the  Revised 
Statutes,  be,  and  is  hereby,  amended  by  adding  thereto  the 
following  paragraphs : 

“Every  applicant  for  license  as  either  master,  mate,  pilot,  or 


6 


engineer  under  tlie  provisions  of  this  title  shall  make  and  sub- 
scribe to  an  oatli  or  aliinnation,  before  one  of  the  inspectors 
referred  to  in  this  title,  to  the  truth  of  all  the  statements  set 
forth  in  his  application  for  such  license. 

“Any  person  who  shall  make  or  subscribe  to  any  oath  or  affirma- 
tion authorized  in  this  title  and  knowing  the  same  to  be  false 
shall  be  deemed  guilty  of  perjury. 

“Every  licensed  master,  mate,  pilot,  or  engineer  who  shall 
change,  by  addition,  interpolation,  or  erasure  of  any  kind,  any 
certificate  or  license  issued  by  any  inspector  or  inspectors 
referred  to  in  this  title  shall,  for  every  such  offense,  upon  con- 
viction, be  punished  by  a fine  of  not  more  than  five  hundred 
dollars  or  by  imprisonment  at  hard  labor  for  a term  not  exceeding 
three  years.” 

Sec.  2.  That  this  Act  shall  take  effect  immediately. 

Approved,  March  23,  1900. 


LETTERS  OF  SERVICE 

The  law  requires  that  the  U.  S.  Local  Inspectors  shall  have 
proper  written  evidence  supporting  the  statements  set  forth 
in  an  application  for  a license. 

Most  letters  of  recommendation  are  given  with  good  intention 
and  a desire  that  they  may  be  of  value  to  the  person  to  whom 
they  are  given.  Strange  as  it  may  seem,  many  letters  which  are 
very  strong  recommendations  prove  to  be  absolutely  worthless 
when  put  before  the  LT.  S.  Local  Inspectors  as  evidence  to  support 
some  statement  made  in  an  application. 

As  such  letters  so  frequently  inconvenience  the  applicant  and 
annoy  the  U.  S.  Local  Inspectors,  the  following  form  is  suggested: 


1 


A PROPEE  LETTER 

New  Yokk,  N.  Y.,  Jan.  7,  1917. 


To  whom  it  may  concern : — 

This  is  to  certify  that  Jolin  Jones  served  as  seaman  in  the  Str. 
Pole  Star  from  July  6.  1916,  to  December  9,  1916.  engaged  in 
general  towing  between  Sandj'  Hook  and  Y'onkers  and  Long- 
Island  Sound  to  New  Haven.  During  that  time  he  proved  to  be 
sober,  honest,  capable  and  reliable. 

John  Brown, 
Master,  Str.  Pole  Star. 

A WORTHLESS  LETTER 

New  York,  N.  Y.,  Jan.  7,  1917. 


To  whom  it  may  concern: — 

This  is  to  certify  that  John  Jones  has  been  seaman  with  me 
for  six  months  and  I have  always  found  him  to  be  sober,  honest 
and  reliable  in  all  his  dealings. 

.John  Brown, 
Master,  Str.  Pole  Star. 

The  above  style  of  letter  reads  very  well,  but  is  worthless  when 
presented  to  the  U.  S.  local  inspectors,  because  the  time  of  service, 
name  of  the  ship,  waters  navigated  and  qualifications  as  a seaman 
are  not  mentioned. 


8 


9 


(JUE8T10XS. 

Q.  1.  Give  the  courses,  distances,  buoys  and  least  depth  at  mean 
low  water  on  each  course  for  the  waters  for  which  you  ask  to 
be  licensed. 

Q.  2.  Describe  the  lights,  their  location  and  fog  signals. 

Q.  3.  Give  the  name  and  location  of  the  rocks  and  shoals,  least 
depth  on  them  at  mean  low  water  and  how  they  are  marked  on 
the  waters  for  which  you  ask  to  be  licensed. 

Q.  4.  Give  the  bearings  and  distances  between  the  headlands, 
other  prominent  points  and  lights. 

Q.  5.  \ou  are  bound  in  through  the  Swash  Channel  on  the  ebb 
tide.  A steamer  is  bound  out  and  blows  one  whistle.  Both 
vessels  will  reacli  the  Swash  Channel  red  bell  buoy  C about  the 
same  time.  Explain  what  j'ou  would  do  and  why  ? 

Q.  6.  You  are  entering  the  harbor  through  the  Swash  Channel 
towing  a large,  light  vessel  with  a strong  E.  X.  E.  wind  and 
ebb  tide.  A tow  of  deep-loaded  scows  is  bound  out.  Wbat  would 
you  do  and  why? 

Q.  7.  You  are  entering  the  harbor  through  the  Gedney  Channel 
with  flood  tide  and  you  see  a long  tow  in  the  Swash  Channel 
bound  out.  tYhat  precaution  would  you  take  and  why? 

Q.  8.  What  does  the  term  “abeam"  mean? 

Q.  9.  What  does  the  term  “abreast”  mean? 

Q.  10.  What  precautions  would  you  take  when  passing  near 
a dredge  or  digger  moored  in  a channel  ? 

Q.  11.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  terms  “right”  and  “left” 
handed  as  applied  to  propellers  and  what  is  their  action  ? 

Q.  12.  Explain  the  system  of  buoyage? 

Q.  13.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  terms  “short  blast”  and 
“prolonged  blast”  of  the  whistle? 

Q.  14.  What  does  one  “short  blast”  of  the  whistle  signify? 

Q.  15.  What  does  two  “short  blasts”  of  the  whistle  signify? 

Q.  16.  What  does  three  “short  blasts”  of  the  whistle  signify? 


10 


Q.  17.  What  is  the  danger  signal? 

Q.  1<S.  What  is  meant  hy  the  term  “cross  signals”? 

Q.  1!).  What  whistle  signals  are  prohibited  by  law? 

Q.  20.  When  are  tlie  whistle  signals  you  have  described  to  be 
used  ? 

Q.  21.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  when  either  fails 
to  (inderstand  the  signal,  course  or  intention  of  the  other  ? 

Q.  22.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  cross  signals? 

Q.  2.3.  What  are  signals  for  steam  vessels  passing? 

Q.  24.  What  is  the  rule  and  signal  for  steam  vessels  approach- 
ing each  head  and  head,  or  nearly  so? 

2,5.  What  is  the  rule  for  a steam  vessel  nearing  a short  bend 
or  curve  in  the  channel  ? 

Q.  26.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  moving  from  their 
docks  or  berths? 

Q.  27.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  running  in  the  same 
direction  ? 

Q.  28.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  approaching  each 
other  at  right  angles  or  obliquely  when  one  is  not  overtaking 
the  other? 

Q.  20.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  regarding  sailing 
vessels? 

Q.  30.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  one  steamer  crossing  ahead 
of  another  ? 

Q.  31.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  in  narrow  channels? 

Q.  32.  When  is  a departure  from  these  rules  permitted? 

Q.  33.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  an  inland  steamer  under 
way  ? 

Q.  34.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  an  inland  steamer  with  a 
tow  ? 

Q.  35.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  a vessel  being  towed  in 
inland  waters? 

Q.  36.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  an  ocean  steamer  under 
way  ? 

Q.  37.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  an  ocean  steamer  under 
way,  but  stopped,  and  having  no  way  upon  her  ? 


11 


Q.  3.S.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  an  ocean  steamer  with  a 
tow  ? 

Q.  ;10.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  vessels  at  anchor? 

Q.  40.  IVliat  is  tlie  rule  for  steam  vessels  regarding  speed  when 
navigating  in  a fog? 

Q.  41.  When  are  the  lights  to  be  exhibited? 

Q.  42.  What  is  the  lawful  size  of  the  glass  globes  ? 

Q.  43.  What  are  the  lights  for  an  inland  steamer  under  way, 
and  how  far  are  they  visible? 

Q.  44.  What  are  the  lights  for  an  inland  steamer  under  way 
with  a tow  and  how  far  are  they  visible? 

Q.  45.  What  are  the  lights  for  an  ocean  steamer  under  way 
with  and  without  a tow? 

Q.  46.  What  are  the  lights  for  a sailing  vessel  under  way  or 
being  towed  ? 

Q.  47.  What  are  the  lights  for  ferryboats  and  how  far  are  they 
visible? 

Q.  48.  What  are  the  lights  for  canal  boats  and  barges? 

Q.  49.  What  are  the  lights  for  scows  being  towed? 

Q.  50.  When  and  by  what  class  of  vessels  can  portable  side 
lights  be  used? 

Q.  51.  What  is  the  light  for  a rowing  boat? 

Q.  52.  What  are  the  lights  for  a pilot  boat? 

Q.  53.  What  are  the  lights  for  vessels  fishing,  trawling  or 
dredging  ? 

Q.  54.  What  additional  light  shall  an  overtaken  vessel  show? 

Q.  55.  What  are  the  lights  for  vessels  at  anchor? 

Q.  56.  What  signals  may  a vessel  use  in  addition  to  her  lights 
when  necessary? 

Q.  57.  What  are  the  signals  for  a vessel  not  under  command? 

Q.  58.  What  is  the  rule  for  signals  to  be  displayed  by  a towing 
vessel  when  towing  a submerged  or  partly  submerged  object  upon 
a hawser,  when  no  signals  are  displayed  upon  the  object  which  is 
towed  ? 

Q.  59.  What  is  the  rule  for  steamers,  derrick  boats,  lighters,  or 
other  types  of  vessels  made  fast  alongside  a wreck,  or  moored 


12 


over  a wreck  which  is  on  the  bottom  or  partly  submerged,  or 
which  may  be  drifting? 

Q.  00.  Wliat  is  tlie  rule  for  dredges  which  are  held  in  stationary 
position  l)v  moorings  or  s[nids? 

Q.  (il.  What  is  the  rule  for  self-])ropelling  suction  dredges 
under  way  with  their  suctions  on  the  bottom  ? 

Q.  02.  What  is  the  rule  for  vessels  which  are  moored  or 
anchored  and  engaged  in  laying  pipe  or  operating  on  suiimarine 
construction  or  excavation  ? 

y.  03.  What  are  the  rules  for  ligiits  for  rafts  and  other  water 
craft  navigating  by  hand  power,  horsepower,  or  by  the  current  of 
the  river  ? 

Q.  ()4.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  a sailing  vessel  under  way? 

Q.  05.  How  would  you  know  if  a sailing  vessel  is  on  the  star- 
board or  port  tack  ? 

Q.  06.  What  are  the  rules  for  sailing  vessels  under  way? 

Q.  07.  What  are  the  distress  signals? 

Q.  08.  Name  the  j)oints  of  the  compass. 

Q.  00.  What  are  the  chief  essentials  that  make  an  efficient 
conij)ass  ? 

Q.  70.  State  the  chief  points  to  be  considered  when  select- 
ing a place  for  your  compass  on  board  ship  and  what  must  be 
particularly  guarded  against? 

Q.  71.  Describe  how  you  would  stow  a compass  when  out 
of  use  and  why? 

(J.  72.  What  is  leeway? 

Q.  73.  What  is  compass  error? 

Q.  74.  What  is  variation  of  the  compass  and  how  do  you 
find  it? 

Q.  75.  What  is  deviation  of  the  compass? 

Q.  70.  What  is  heeling  error  of  the  compass? 

Q.  77.  What  is  a true  bearing? 

Q.  78.  What  is  a compass  bearing? 

Q.  79.  What  is  a magnetic  bearing? 

Q.  80.  What  is  a compass  course? 

Q.  81.  What  is  a true  course? 


13 


Q.  82.  How  can  you  find  the  deviation  of  the  compass  by  use 
of  tlie  azimutli  tables? 

Q.  83.  How  can  you  find  the  deviation  of  the  compass  by 
reciprocal  bearings  ? 

Q.  84.  How  can  you  find  the  deviation  of  the  compass  while 
sailing  along  a coast  ? 

Q.  85.  Name  some  of  the  objects  by  which  you  could  obtain 
the  deviation  of  the  compass  wliile  sailing  along  a coast  on  which 
you  are  acquainted  ? 

Q.  86.  To  construct  a deviation  table  is  it  necessary  to  bring  the 
ship’s  head  to  more  than  one  point  and  if  so,  state  tlie  reason  ? 

Q.  87.  When  swinging  ship  to  construct  a deviation  table, 
wliat  is  the  least  number  of  points  to  which  the  ship’s  head 
should  be  brought? 

Q.  88.  How  often  would  you  test  the  deviation  table? 

Q.  89.  Having  found  tlie  deviation  of  the  compass,  how  would 
you  know  if  it  is  east  or  west? 

Q.  90.  Under  what  conditions  would  you  expect  the  devia- 
tions of  the  compass  to  change? 

Q.  91.  What  effect  do  like  and  unlike  poles  of  magnets  have  on 
each  other  ? 

Q.  92.  What  are  the  causes  of  local  deviation  of  the  compass? 

9.  93.  How  can  you  ascertain  their  extent? 

Q.  94.  How  can  you  correct  them? 

Q.  95.  Sandy  Hook  Main  light  and  South  Hook  Beacon  were 
in  range  and  bore  by  compass  N.  W.  V2  W.  Find  the  deviation 
of  the  compass. 

Q.  96.  Ronier  Shoal  and  Old  Orchard  lights  were  in  range  and 
bore  by  compass  W.  14  Find  the  deviation  of  the  compass. 

Q.  97.  Give  the  course  to  steer  by  compass  entering  the  harbor 
through  the  Swash  Channel,  tlie  deviation  for  the  ship’s  head 
being  % point  E. 

Q.  98.  Give  the  course  to  steer  by  compass  leaving  the  harbor 
through  the  Gedney  Channel,  the  deviation  for  the  ship’s  head 
being  Vi  point  W. 

Q.  99.  Ambrose  Channel  Lightship  bears  N.  E.  and  Scotland 


14 


Lightship  bears  N.  W.  W.  by  compass.  Deviation  6°  W. 
Locate  tlie  vessel  on  the  chart  and  give  the  magnetic  bearing  to 
Navesink  (Highlands)  light. 

Q.  100.  You  are  heading  S.  by  W.  % W.  and  have  an  object 
abeam  on  the  starboard  side.  How  does  it  bear  ? 

Q.  101.  You  are  heading  E.  % X.  and  have  an  object  2 points 
abaft  the  beam  on  the  port  side.  How  does  it  bear  ? ' 

Q.  102.  What  is  latitude? 

Q.  103.  What  is  longitude? 

Q.  104.  What  is  a meridian? 

Q.  105.  What  is  a chart? 

Q.  106.  Describe  a Mercator  chart. 

Q.  107.  Where  do  you  measure  latitude  on  a Mercator  chart? 

Q.  108.  Where  do  you  measure  longitude  on  a IMercator  chart? 

Q.  100.  Where  do  you  measure  distance  on  a Mercator  chart? 

Q.  110.  What  do  the  figures  on  the  white  surface  indicate? 

Q.  111.  What  do  the  figures  on  the  dark  surface  indicate? 

Q.  112.  What  do  the  figures  on  the  land  portion  indicate? 

Q.  113.  How  would  you  know  if  the  compasses  on  the  chart  are 
true  or  magnetic  ? 

Q.  114.  How  can  you  find  a course  and  distance  by  chart? 

Q.  115.  How  can  you  find  a vessel’s  position  on  a chart  by 
cross  bearings  of  two  or  more  fixed  objects  which  are  shown 
on  the  chart? 

Q.  116.  Where  would  you  stow  heavy  cargo  in  a river  steamer? 

Q.  117.  How  would  you  stow  barrels  or  casks? 

Q.  118.  How  would  you  stow  the  second  tier  of  casks? 

Q.  110.  How  can  you  find  the  bung  side  of  a cask  in  the  dark? 

Q.  120.  Why  should  casks  be  stowed  bung  up? 

Q.  121.  Where  would  you  stow  carboys  of  acids? 

Q.  122.  Where  would  you  stow  tar,  oil,  rosin  and  other  cargo 
of  that  nature  in  a general  cargo? 

Q.  123.  Where  would  you  stow  wines,  liquors,  etc.? 

Q.  124.  When,  where  and  what  kind  of  petroleum  is  allowed 
as  cargo  in  passenger  steamers? 


15 


Q.  125.  What  cargoes  are  most  liable  to  spontaneous  com- 
l)ustion  ? 

Q.  126.  What  precautions  would  you  take  when  loading  a ship 
in  shallow  water  ? 

Q.  127.  What  cargo  is  prohibited  in  passenger  steamers? 

Q.  128.  Where  would  you  stow  acids  or  matches  ? 

Q.  129.  How  would  you  stow  hay,  straw,  etc.? 

Q.  1.30.  What  would  you  do  in  case  of  fire? 

Q.  131.  When  your  vessel  is  to  be  hauled  out,  what  report  do 
you  make  and  to  whom? 

Q.  132.  Describe  the  size  and  construction  of  a fog  bell  ? 

Q.  133.  What  equipment  does  a lifeboat  require  by  law? 

Q.  134.  How  must  lifeboats  be  carried  and  overhauled? 

Q.  135.  What  equipment  does  a liferaft  require  by  law? 

Q.  136.  Where  are  life-preservers  to  be  located? 

Q.  137.  How  many  life-preservers  are  required? 

Q.  138.  Where  does  the  law  require  the  steam  whistle  to  be 
located  ? 

Q.  139.  What  is  a station  bill? 

Q.  140.  How  can  you  test  fire  hose  and  how  would  you  keep 
it  ready  for  use? 

Q.  141.  What  is  the  fire  alarm? 

Q.  142.  How  often  are  fire  and  boat  drills  required  by  law? 

Q.  143.  How  does  the  law  require  woodwork  around  stoves, 
stovepipes,  in  lamp  lockers,  etc.,  to  be  protected? 

Q.  144.  How  often  are  you  required  to  drill  the  crew  in  the 
use  of  the  line-carrying  gun  ? 

Q.  145.  How  can  you  test  a life-preserver? 

Q.  146.  What  is  the  penalty  for  flashing  a searchlight  into 
the  pilot  house  of  a passing  vessel  ? 

Q.  147.  What  is  the  jjenalty  when  an  officer  of  a steamer  fails 
to  keep  the  equipment  in  proper  order? 

Q.  148.  What  monthly  report  are  you  required  by  law  to  make 
to  the  United  States  local  inspectors? 

Q.  149.  How  do  you  mark  a lead-line? 

Q.  150.  What  signal  do  you  make  for  a pilot? 


16 


Q.  151.  Wliat  publications  are  required  by  law  to  be  on  board 
steamers  and  which  are  you  compelled  to  allow  passengers  to  use 
if  called  for  ? 

Q.  152.  What  are  the  duties  of  watchmen  in  passenger 
steamers  and  how  many  are  required? 

Q.  15.3.  What  notices  regarding  life-preservers  are  required 
and  how  many? 

Q.  154.  What  would  you  do  in  case  of  collision? 

Q.  155.  If  your  vessel  was  anchored  near  a shoal  on  either  side, 
which  way  w'ould  you  sheer  the  ship  and  why? 

Q.  156.  What  is  the  penalty  for  blowing  unnecessary  whistles? 

Q.  157.  What  is  the  penalty  for  navigating  a steamer  beyond 
the  waters  called  for  in  her  certificate  or  the  officer's  license? 

Q.  158.  What  are  the  bell  signals  from  the  pilot  house  to 
tlie  engine  room? 

Q.  159.  What  precautions  would  you  take  when  making  the 
land  during  tliick  or  any  bad  weather? 

Q.  160.  How  can  you  convert  statute  miles  into  nautical  miles? 

Q.  161.  What  are  your  duties  on  joining  a vessel  as  master? 

Q.  162.  What  would  be  your  duty  when  relieving  the  officer  in 
charge  of  the  watch  and  while  you  are  in  charge  of  the  watch  ? 

Q.  163.  You  being  the  officer  in  charge  of  a steamer  or  the  of- 
ficer detailed  to  accompany  the  United  States  Steamboat  Inspec- 
tor during  the  inspection  of  the  vessel,  what  would  be  your  duty? 

Q.  164.  How  can  you  test  the  stability  of  a vessel? 

Q.  165.  What  would  be  your  duty  when  anchored  in  a fairway 
by  necessity? 

Q.  166.  When  two  steam  vessels  meet  in  a narrow  channel  in  a 
tideway  where  one  or  both  must  slow  down  or  stop  their  engines 
to  pass  in  safety,  which  one  has  the  right  of  way? 


GROVER  C.  BERGDOLL 


ANSWERS  TO  THE  QUESTIONS 

On  the  examination  paper  for  master  or  pilot,  which  must  be 
written  where  the  examination  takes  place,  Q.  means  question. 
Ans.  means  answer.  Bearings  and  courses  are  magnetic,  and  dis- 
tances are  expressed  in  nautical  miles. 

Q.  1.  Give  the  courses,  distances,  buoys  and  least  depth  at  mean 
low  w'ater  on  each  course  for  the  waters  for  which  you  ask  to 
be  licensed.  Ans.  Ambrose  Channel.  Leave  Ambrose  Channel 
lightship  on  the  starboard  hand  distant  about  half  a mile  and 
run  N.  W.  % W.  with  West  Bank  and  Staten  Island  lights  on  for 
2%  miles  to  Gedney  Channel  gas  and  wiiistling  (occulting  wiiite 
light)  buoy,  which  marks  the  intersection  of  the  Ambrose  and 
Gedney  Channels.  Continue  this  course  N.  W.  % W.  keeping 
West  Bank  and  Staten  Island  lights  on  for  six  miles  leaving 
Ambrose  Channel  entrance  gas  and  bell  (flashing  red  light)  and 
red  buoys  2A,  2,  4 (fixed  red  light),  4A,  6 (fixed  red  light), 
6A,  8 (fixed  red  light).  8A,  and  10  (flashing  red  light  and  bell) 
on  the  starboard  hand  and  Ambrose  Channel  entrance  gas  and 
whistling  (flashing  white  light)  and  black  buoys  lA,  1,  3 (fixed 
w'hite  light),  3 A,  5 (fixed  wdiite  light),  5 A,  7 (fixed  white  light), 
7A  and  9 (flashing  wdiite  and  wdiistling)  on  the  port  hand  and 
Romer  Shoal  light  will  bear  S.  by  W.  % W.  distant  ■%  of  a 
mile.  At  this  point  change  the  course  to  N.  N.  W.  % W. 
heading  for  Swinburne  Island  and  run  about  7g  of  a mile 
leaving  red  lighted  buoys  12  (fi.xed  red  light)  and  14  (flashing 
red  light  and  bell)  on  the  starboard  hand  and  black  buoys  II 
(fixed  wdiite  light)  and  13  (flashing  wdiite  and  wdiistling)  on  the 
port  hand  and  Sandy  Hook  North  Beacon  and  Sandy  Hook  Main 
light  will  be  on  bearing  S.  E.  Keeping  this  range  on  over  the 
stern,  run  N.  % W.  for  3 miles,  leaving  red  buoys  16  (fixed,  red 
light)  and  18  (flashing  red  light  and  bell)  on  the  starboard  hand 
and  black  buoys  15  (fixed  wdiite  light)  and  17  (occulting  white 


18 


and  whistling)  on  the  port  hand  and  Craven  Shoal  obstruction 
buoys  (occulting  white  light  and  bell)  will  be  abeam  on  the  port 
side  and  Coney  Island  light  will  bear  S.  E.  % E.  distant  114  miles, 
and  Fort  Wadsworth  light  will  bear  N.  N.  W.  14  W. 

From  this  position  run  N.  by  W.  for  3%  miles  to  abreast 
Tompkinsville  distant  % of  a mile  leaving  Craven  Shoal  buoys, 
black  buoys  13  and  Fort  Wadsworth  bell  buoy  13A  on  the  port 
hand  and  Gowanus  Flats  Southwest  End  gas  and  bell  (occulting 
white  light)  12B  on  the  starboard  hand.  Least  depth  about  8 
fathoms. 

From  abreast  of  Tompkinsville  run  N.  E.  % X.  for  8%  miles, 
leaving  red  buoy  14  on  the  starboard  hand  and  Robbins  Reef  bell 
buoy  13B,  Robbins  Reef  light  and  black  buoy  15  on  the  port  hand, 
and  Governor’s  Island  lights  will  be  abeam.  Least  depth  about 
8 fathoms. 

Main  Channel.  Leave  Ambrose  Channel  lightship  14.  of  a mile 
on  the  port  hand  and  run  W.  X.  W.  % W.  for  2yg  miles,  heading 
for  Old  Orchard  Shoal  light  to  Gedney  Channel  gas  and  whistling 
(occulting  white  light)  buoy,  which  marks  the  intersection  of  the 
Ambrose  and  Gedney  Channels.  Continue  this  course  for  3% 
miles,  heading  for  Old  Orchard  Shoal  light,  leaving  red  buoys 
with  red  lights  2,  4,  6 and  8 on  the  starboard  hand,  black  buoys 
with  white  lights  1,  3,  5 and  7 on  the  port  hand,  and  Point  Com- 
fort and  Waackaack  Beacons  (Bayside  Range)  will  be  on  bearing 
W.  % S.  Least  depth  about  5 fathoms. 

With  Bayside  Range  on  bearing  W.  % S.  run  3%  miles,  leaving 
Main  Channel  occulting  red  lighted  buoy  2 and  ilain  Channel  bell 
buoy  2,  red  buoys,  2A,  4,  0 and  8 on  the  starboard  hand,  and 
black  buoys  1,  3 and  Sandy  Hook  bell  buoy  on  the  port  hand, 
and  Sandy  Hook  South  Beacon  and  Sandy  Hook  iMain  light  will 
be  on  bearing  S.  E.  by  E.  Va  E.  Least  depth.  5 fathoms. 

With  Sandy  Hook  South  Beacon  and  Sandy  Hook  iMain  light 
on  and  bearing  S.  E.  by  E.  ]/g  E.  run  X.  W.  by  W.  % W.  for  % 
of  a mile,  leaving  red  buoys  10  and  12  bell  and  red  light  on  the 
starboard  hand  and  Conover  and  Chapel  Hill  Beacons  will  come 
on  bearing  S.  by  W.  % W.  Least  depth  5 fathoms. 


10 


From  tliis  point  run  N.  by  E.  % E.,  keeping  Conover  and  Chapel 
Hill  Beacons  on  over  the  stern  for  6 miles,  leaving  red  buoys  2, 
4,  6,  8,  Junction  buoy  (obstruction)  and  8A  on  the  starboard 
hand  and  black  buoys  1,  lA,  3,  5,  7,  7A,  9A  and  11  on  the  port 
hand,  and  Coney  Island  light  will  bear  E.  by  S.  % S.  distant 
1 mile  and  Sandy  Hook  North  Beacon  and  Sandy  Hook  Main  light 
will  be  on  bearing  S.  14  E.  From  Junction  buoy  black  and  red 
horizontal  stripes  to  Quickstep'  buoy  9A  better  water  will  be 
found  by  running  to  the  eastward  of  the  Conover  and  Chapel 
Hill  range,  so  they  will  be  barely  open.  Least  depth  5 fathoms. 
From  this  point  follow  the  directions  for  the  Ambrose  Channel. 

South  and  Sw^ash  Channels.  From  Scotland  lightship  run 
N.  W.  y,  N.  with  Elm  Tree  and  New  Dorp  Beacons  on  for  nearly 
114  miles  to  South  Channel  entrance  nun  buoy,  black  and  white 
vertical  stripes,  leaving  it  on  either  hand.  Continue  this  course  for 
114  miles  to  Mid-Channel  can  buoy,  black  and  white  vertical 
stripes,  leaving  it  on  either  hand.  Continue  this  course  for  4% 
miles  to  Swash  Channel  red  bell  buoy  6,  leaving  red  buoys  2 and 
4 on  the  starboard  hand  and  black  buoys  1 and  3 on  the  port 
hand,  and  Conover  and  Chapel  Hill  Beacons  will  be  nearly  on. 
Least  depth  about  3%  fathoms.  From  this  point  follow  directions 
for  the  Main  and  Ambrose  Channels. 

From  Scotland  Lightship  to  Ambrose  Channel  Lightship  the 
course  is  E.  % N.  and  the  distance  4yg  miles. 

From  Scotland  Lightship  to  Ambrose  Channel  entrance  the 
course  is  N.  and  the  distance  3 miles. 

False  Hook  Channel.  Bring  Navesink  (Highlands)  light 
to  bear  W.  by  S.  and  run  for  it.  When  Sandy  Hook  Main  light 
bears  N.  N.  W.  14  W.  and  Scotland  Lightship  boars  N.  E.  14  N., 
the  depth  will  be  about  5)4  fathoms.  From  this  point  run 
N.  by  W.  % W.  for  1 mile  and  Highland  Shoal  black  buoy  1 
will  be  abeam  on  the  port  side.  Continue  this  course  nearly 
% mile  and  red  buoy  2 will  bo  abeam  on  the  starboard  side. 
Continue  this  course  a little  more  than  14  of  a mile  and  Sper- 
maceti Cove  Life  Saving  Station  will  be  abeam  on  the  port  side. 


20 


Continue  this  course  about  1%  miles  and  rod  buoy  4 will  bo 
abeam  on  the  starboard  side.  Run  this  course  nearly  1%  miles 
and  Sandy  Hook  Main  light  will  be  abeam  on  the  port  side. 
Continue  this  course  for  nearly  % mile  and  Sandy  Hook  Xorth 
Beacon  will  bear  west  and  False  Hook  Shoal  Northwest  Part 
obstruction  buoy  will  be  a little  abaft  the  beam  on  the  starboard 
side.  At  this  point  change  the  course  to  X.  X.  E.  and  run  about 
% mile  and  Pitch  of  the  Hook  black  bell  buoy  will  be  abeam  on 
the  port  side.  West  Bank  light  will  bear  X.  X.  W.  hi  W.  and 
Coney  Island  light  will  bear  X.  From  this  point  run  about 
14  mile  on  any  course  between  these  bearings  and  Bayside  Range 
will  come  on  bearing  W.  by  S.  Or  continue  X.  X.  E.  nearly 
% mile  and  the  Swash  Channel  Range  will  come  on  bearing 
X.  W.  % X.  Least  depth  is  19  feet  betw'een  Pitch  of  the  Hook 
and  False  Hook  Shoal. 

Amboy.  If  bound  to  Perth  Amboy,  stand  in  W.  % S-  '''th 
the  Bayside  Range  on,  and  wdien  the  Sandy  Hook  Range  comes 
on  bearing  S.  E.  by  E.  i/g  E.  change  the  course  to  W.  X.  W.  hi  X. 
and  nm  (>  miles  to  Amboy  Cut  entrance  buoy,  leaving 
Chapel  Hill  Cut  black  buoy  1 on  the  starboard  hand  and  black 
wreck  buoy  1 and  Point  Comfort  black  Imoy  1 on  the  port  hand. 
If  necessary  to  anchor,  do  so  about  hi  niile  S.  E.  of  Amboy  Cut 
entrance  (nun,  black  and  white  perpendicular  stripes)  buoy. 
Least  depth  22  feet. 

Hudson  River  to  Yonkers.  From  a position  in  about  the 
middle  of  the  river  between  the  Battery  and  Communipaw  Docks 
run  X.  by  E.  % E.  for  3h4  miles  to  abreast  32nd  Street.  Least 
depth  about  614  fathoms. 

From  this  point  run  X.  E.  hi  X.  for  5hi  miles  to  abreast  1.52nd 
Street.  Least  depth  about  6 fathoms. 

At  this  point  change  the  course  to  X.  X.  E.  and  run  1 mile 
and  Jeffreys  Hook  lights  will  be  abeam.  Least  depth  about  8 
fathoms. 

From  Jeffreys  Hook  lights  abeam  run  X.  E.  % X.  for  214 
miles  to  abreast  Spuyten  Duyvil.  Least  depth  about  C fathoms. 


21 


From  this  point  run  X.  X.  E.  14  E.  for  3y^  miles  to  abreast 
Yonkers.  Least  depth  about  6 fathoms. 

East  River  to  Suaken  Meadow.  Bring  the  Day  l\Iark  on  Pier 
10  (Brooklyn)  in  range  with  the  northwest  tower  of  Hotel  ^lar- 
garet,  hearing  E.  % X.,  and  keeping  this  range  on  run  E.  i/g  N. 
about  1 mile  until  in  line  with  Pier  8 (Xew  York)  and  clear  of 
Dimond  and  Coenties  Reefs.  Least  depth  about  5 fathoms. 

From  this  position  run  X.  E.  % E.  for  % of  a mile,  passing 
under  the  center  of  Brooklyn  Bridge,  and  then  change  the  course 
to  E.  14  heading  for  the  center  of  Manhattan  Bridge,  and 
run  about  14  of  a mile.  Least  depth  about  6 fathoms. 

From  this  point  run  E.  % S.  for  nearly  % of  a mile  to  abreast 
Ordnance  Dock  (Xavy  Yard).  Least  depth  about  7 fathoms. 

From  this  point  run  X.  E.  by  X.  14  X.  about  % of  a mile, 
passing  under  the  center  of  Williamsburg  Bridge,  and  then  change 
the  course  to  X.  E.  % X.  and  run  about  14  of  a mile  to  abreast 
10th  St.  Ferry  Slip  (Xew  York),  and  Shell  Reef  red  buoy  6 
will  be  abeam  on  the  port  side.  Least  depth  about  8 fathoms. 

From  tliis  point  run  X.  14  E.  for  1%  miles  to  abreast  4Qth  St., 
leaving  Xea  Rock  obstruction  buoy  on  the  port  hand  and  Black- 
wells Island  Reef  bell  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  Black- 
wells Island  Reef  light  will  be  abeam.  Least  depth  514  fathoms. 

From  this  position  run  X.  E.  about  2 miles,  keeping  the 
middle  or  starboard  side  of  the  channel,  and  Blackwells  Island 
light  will  be  abeam  on  the  starboard  side.  Least  depth  about  7 
fathoms. 

From  this  point  run  X.  E.  by  E.  14  E.  for  nearly  14  of  a mile, 
• and  Hallets  Point  light  will  be  abeam  on  the  port  side,  distant 
200  to  500  feet.  Least  depth  about  7 fathoms. 

From  this  position  run  E.  % S.  for  % of  a mile,  and  Xegro 
Point  light  will  bear  X.  14  W.,  distant  % of  a mile.  Least  depth 
about  514  fathoms. 

From  this  point  run  X.  E.  by  E.  about  14  of  a mile,  and  Xegro 
Point  Bluff  will  be  abeam  on  the  port  hand.  Least  depth  about 
12  fathoms. 


22 


From  this  position  run  N.  E.  X.  about  % of  a mile,  and 
Sunken  Meadow  light  will  he  abeam  on  tlie  port  side. 

Execution  Rocks  to  Sunken  !Meauow.  Bring  Execution 
Rocks  light  to  bear  about  N.  W.  % X.,  distant  atjout  14  of  a mile, 
and  run  S.  W.  I4  for  3%  miles,  leaving  Hart  Island  red  bell 
buoy  32  on  tlie  starboard  hand  and  keeping  E.xecution  Rocks  light 
white  and  Sands  Point  Reef  black  buoy  21,  Gangway  Rock  black 
bell  buoy  23  and  Hewlett  Point  black  buoy  2.5  on  the  port  hand, 
and  Stepping  Stones  light  will  be  abeam  on  the  port  side.  Least 
depth  9 fathoms. 

From  this  position  run  S.  S.  W.  for  1%  miles,  leaving  Throgs 
Keck  red  buoy  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  Tlirogs  Keck  light  will 
bear  K.  K.  W.  14  distant  % of  a mile.  Least  depth  about  7 
fathoms. 

From  this  position  run  W.  K.  W.  for  1%  miles,  and  Whitestone 
Point  will  bear  S.,  distant  14  of  a mile.  Least  depth  about  614 
fathoms. 

From  this  position  run  W.  14  S.  for  214  miles  nearly,  leaving 
College  Point  bell  buoy  1 on  the  port  hand,  and  Hunts  Point  red 
buoy  2'  will  be  abeam  on  the  starboard  side.  Least  depth  about 
0 fathoms. 

From  this  j)osition  run  K.  W.  14  W.  about  I4  of  a mile,  when 
Rikers  Island  light  will  bear  W.  S.  W.  Least  depth  about  514 
fathoms. 

From  this  point  run  W.  K.  W.  14  K.  about  % of  a mile,  leaving 
Oak  Bluff  Rock  red  buoy  214  on  the  starboard  hand  and  Korth 
Brother  Island  black  buoy  3A  on  the  port  hand,  and  Oak  Bluff 
lights  will  bear  K.  E.  14  E.,  distant  about  14  of  a mile.  Least 
depth  about  Oy,  fathoms. 

From  this  position  run  S.  W.  1/0  W.  for  1 mile,  leaving  Sunken 
Meadow  Middle  Ground  black  buoy  9 on  the  port  hand,  and 
Sunken  Meadow  light  will  be  abeam.  Least  depth  about  7 
fathoms. 

South  Amboy.  If  bound  to  South  Amboy,  stand  in  W.  % S. 
with  the  Bayside  Range  on,  and  when  the  Sandy  Hook  Range 
comes  on  bearing  S.  E.  by  E.  14  E.,  change  the  course  to 


X.  W.  by  W.  % W.  and  run  6 miles  to  Amboy  Cut  entrance  buoy, 
leaving  Chapel  Hill  Cut  black  buoy  1 on  the  starboard  hand, 
black  wreck  buoy  1 and  Point  Comfort  black  buoy  1 on  the  port 
hand.  If  necessary  to  anchor,  do  so  about  14  of  a mile  S.  E.  of 
Amboy  Cut  entrance  (nun  black  and  white  perpendicular  stripes) 
buoy.  Least  depth  22  feet. 

Leave  Amboy  Cut  entrance  buoy  on  either  side  and  run 
X.  W.  by  W.  14  W.  for  1%  miles,  leaving  red  buoy  4y,  on  the 
starboard  hand  and  black  buoys  114  and  3 on  the  port  hand. 
Least  depth  19  feet. 

From  black  buoy  3 run  W.  Vs  N.  for  % of  a mile,  heading  for 
Princess  Bay  light,  leaving  black  buoy  5 on  the  port  hand.  Least 
depth  22  feet. 

From  this  ijoint  run  S.  W.  % W.  for  % of  a mile.  Least 
depth  21  feet. 

At  this  point  change  the  course  to  S.  W.  by  W.  Vs  and 
run  for  % of  a mile,  leaving  red  buoy  0 on  the  starboard  hand. 
Least  depth  19  feet. 

From  this  point  run  S.  W.  Vs  S.  for  % of  a mile,  leaving  red 
buoy  8 on  the  starboard  hand.  Then  make  the  turn  to  starboard 
and  run  X.  W.  by  W.  14  IV.  for  % of  a mile,  leaving  black  buoy 
7 on  the  port  hand.  Least  depth  19  feet. 

From  this  point  run  W.  Vs  N.  for  % of  a mile,  leaving  Great 
Beds  light  on  the  starboard  hand,  and  then  change  the  course  to 
X.  W.  and  run  for  % of  a mile  to  abreast  South  Amboy,  leaving 
black  buoy  9 on  the  port  hand.  Least  depth  19  feet. 

Perth  Ajiboy.  If  bound  to  Perth  Amboy,  when  a little  past 
black  buoy  7,  Great  Beds  light  will  bear  W.  X.  W.  Then  change 
the  course  to  X.  by  W.  and  run  % of  a mile  to  the  obstruction 
buoy  off  Wards  Point,  which  is  left  on  the  port  hand.  Least 
depth  20  feet. 

From  this  point  run  X.  by  W.  Vs  ^V.  for  about  1 mile  to  abreast 
Perth  Amboy,  leaving  the  obstruction  buoy  off  Perth  Amboy  on 
the  port  hand.  Least  deptli  20  feet. 

Sandy  Hook  Bay  Anchorage.  If  hound  into  Sandy  Hook  Bay, 
stand  in  W.  % S.  with  the  Bayside  Range  on,  and  when  the 


24 


Sandy  Hook  Range  conies  on  bearing  S.  E.  by  E.  i/g  E.  change 
the  course  to  S.  iiy  W.  and  run  about  % of  a mile  and  anchor  in 
about  51/2  fathoms.  The  anchorage  is  good  and  clear  of  the  • 
ranges. 

Perth  A.mroy  to  Elizabetiiport.  From  abreast  Perth  Amboy, 
run  N.  E.  44  N.  for  1 mile,  leaving  red  buoy  2 off  Tottenville  on 
the  starboard  hand,  and  Ploughshare  Point  will  be  abeam  on  the 
port  side.  Least  depth  30  feet. 

From  Ploughshare  Point  abeam,  run  X.  % W.  for  H/g  miles, 
and  the  entrance  to  Woodbridge  Creek  will  be  on  the  port  beam. 
Least  depth  24  feet. 

From  Woodbridge  Creek  entrance  abeam,  run  X.  by  E.  44  E. 
for  % of  a mile,  and  Storys  Flats  red  buoy  4 will  be  abeam  on  the 
starboard  side.  Least  depth  24  feet. 

At  this  point  change  the  course  to  X.  by  E.  4^2  E.  and  run  % 
of  a mile,  heading  for  the  end  of  the  Philadelphia  & Reading 
R.  R.  long  pier,  leaving  Story  Flats  red  buoy  4 on  the  starboard 
hand.  Least  depth  23  feet. 

From  this  position  run  E.  44  N.  for  44  of  a mile  to  abreast 
the  Pliiladelphia  & Reading  R.  R.  piers,  and  Smoking  Point  will 
be  abeam  on  the  starboard  side.  Least  depth  21  feet. 

From  Smoking  Point  abeam,  run  E.  by  S.  44  S.  for  44  of  a 
mile  to  abreast  Rossville  on  the  starboard  side,  and  Tufts  Point 
will  be  a little  abaft  the  beam  on  the  port  side.  Least  depth 
27  feet. 

Change  the  course  at  this  point  to  E.  X.  E.  and  run  nearly 
44  of  a mile,  and  Tufts  Point  will  bear  W.  44  Least  depth 
23  feet. 

From  Tufts  Point  bearing  W.  44  1^-,  ron  X.  X.  E.  44  for 
1%  miles,  and  Carteret  will  be  abeam  on  the  port  side.  Least 
depth  22  feet. 

'Note. — Stars  Landing.  Chrome  and  Island  View  are  on  the 
Jersey  Shore  between  Tufts  Point  and  Carteret. 

From  Carteret  abeam,  run  X.  E.  by  X.  for  nearly  % of  a mile, 
and  Fifteen-and-one-Half  Foot  Rock  red  buoy  C will  be  abeam 
on  the  starboard  side.  Least  depth  20  feet. 


25 


Leave  Fifteen-and-one-Half-Foot  red  buoy  0 on  the  starboard 
hand  and  run  N.  N.  ]'].  for  nearly  % of  a mile,  and  Treniley  Point 
will  be  abeam  on  the  port  side.  Least  depth  23  feet. 

From  Tremley  Point,  run  N.  W.  by  N.  % X.  for  about  % of  a 
mile  into  Northwest  Keach  to  abreast  the  middle  or  most  westerly 
point  of  Pralls  Island.  Least  depth  21  feet. 

From  this  point  run  N.  by  E.  14  E.  for  IV2  miles,  and  then 
change  the  course  to  N.  E.  % E.  for  % of  a mile  to  Baltimore  & 
Ohio  R.  R.  Bridge.  Least  depth  21  feet. 

For  the  remainder  see  the  directions  from  Robbins  Reef  to 
Elizabethport. 

Robbins  Reef  to  Elizabethport.  With  Robbins  Reef  light  and 
Robbins  Reef  bell  buoy  in  range  bearing  N.  by  W.  % W.,  run 
W.  by  N.  Vs  N.  for  1^4  miles,  heading  for  the  chimney  on  Con- 
stable Hook.  Least  depth  28  feet. 

From  this  point  run  S.  W.  by  W.  % W.  for  % of  a mile. 
Least  depth  about  40  feet.  Then  run  W.  by  N.  i4  N.  for  % of  a 
mile  until  nearly  abreast  Port  Johnson.  Least  depth  about  38 
feet. 

At  this  point  change  the  course  to  W.  by  S.  % S.  and  run 
for  % of  a mile  to  Mid-Channel  Rock  red  buoy  2A.  Least  depth 
about  30  feet. 

Leave  Mid-Channel  Rock  red  buoy  2A  and  run  W.  % N.  for 
% of  a mile  to  Bergen  Point  Reef  red  buoy  2.  Least  depth  about 
36  feet. 

Leave  Bergen  Point  Reef  red  buoy  2 on  the  starboard  hand 
and  run  W.  1/3  S.  for  of  a mile,  and  Bergen  Point  light  will 
be  abeam  on  the  starboard  side.  Least  depth  about  35  feet. 

From  this  position  run  W.  % N.  for  14  of  a mile  to  abreast 
Shooters  Island.  Least  depth  about  22  feet. 

From  this  position  run  N.  W.  for  about  % of  a mile  to  Corner 
Stake  Junction  buoy  (red  and  black  horizontal  stripes).  Least 
depth  about  21  feet. 

Leave  Corner  Stake  Junction  buoy  (red  and  black  horizontal 
stripes)  on  the  starboard  hand  and  run  N.  W.  by  W.  for  14  of  a 
mile  to  Elizabethport  Junction  buoy  (red  and  black  horizontal 


2G 


stripes),  leaving  Elizabetliport  South  Channel  black  buoy  1 on 
the  port  hand.  Least  depth  about  20  feet. 

Leave  Elizabetliport  Junction  buoy  (red  and  black  horizontal 
stripes)  on  the  starlioard  hand  and  run  W.  by  N.  for  % of  a mile 
to  abreast  Central  R.  R.  Pier  at  Elizabeth.  Least  depth  about  23 
feet. 

From  this  point  run  S.  W.  by  W.  for  1%  miles  to  the  B.  & O. 
R.  R.  Bridge.  Least  depth  about  20  feet. 

Bay  Ridge,  Red  Hook  and  Buttermilk  Channels.  From  a 
position  about  mid-way  between  Bay  Ridge  Channel  buoy  (red 
and  black  horizontal  stripes)  and  the  Brooklyn  shore,  run 
N.  E.  by  H.  14  for  nearly  of  a mile  to  abreast  65th  Street, 
leaving  black  buoy  1 on  the  port  hand.  Least  depth  about  40  feet. 

From  this  point  run  H.  E.  14  E-  for  1%  miles  to  abreast  39th 
Street  Ferry  Slip,  leaving  Idack  buoy  3 on  the  port  hand.  Least 
depth  about  40  feet. 

From  this  position  run  N.  ^4  E.  for  1%  miles  to  abreast  Red 
Hook.  Least  depth  about  33  feet. 

From  this  position  run  E.  N.  E.  14  for  % of  a mile  to 
abreast  Hamilton  Avenue  Ferry  Slip,  leaving  black  buoy  1 on  the 
port  hand.  Least  depth  about  30  feet. 

From  this  position  run  H.  E.  % Is.  for  R4  miles,  heading  for 
the  middle  of  Brooklyn  Bridge.  Least  depth  about  28  feet. 

From  this  point  follow  directions  for  the  East  River. 

Fort  Wadsworth  to  Amboy  Cut  over  Old  Orchard  Shoals. 
Bring  Fort  Wadsworth  light  to  bear  about  X.  X.  W.  and  Old 
Orchard  Shoal  light  in  range  with  Waackaack  Beacon,  and  then 
run  S.  W.  by  S.  4 for  dy,  miles,  leaving  Fort  Wadsworth 
black  bell  buoy  13A  on  the  port  hand,  Midland  Beach  pier  channel 
bell  buo.v  on  either  hand,  keeping  on  the  edge  of  the  red  sector  in 
Old  Orchard  Shoal  light,  and  Great  Kills  and  Princess  Bay  lights 
will  be  in  range  bearing  W.  4 S-  Least  depth  12  feet. 

At  this  point  change  the  course  to  W.  S.  W.  4 S.  and  run  1% 
miles,  leaving  Old  Orchard  Shoal  buoy  2 on  the  starboard  hand, 
and  Old  Orchard  Shoal  light  will  be  in  range  with  Romer  Shoal 
light  and  bear  E.  % S.  Least  depth  14  feet. 


27 


From  this  position  run  W.  % N.  for  3yg  miles,  leaving  red 
Imoy  4 on  tlie  starboard  hand,  heading  for  Princess  Bay  light, 
and  black  Inioy  3 will  be  close  aboard  on  the  port  hand.  Least 
depth  14  feet. 

From  this  point  follow  directions  for  Amboy. 


28 


Q.  2.  Describe  the  lights,  their  location  and  fog  signals. 
Ans.  Navesink  (Highlands)  flashing  wliite  (electric)  at  intervals 
of  5 seconds  and  visible  22  miles.  On  tlie  Higlilands  about  3 miles 
southward  of  Sandy  Hook  Main  light. 

Saxdy  Hook  Main  Light.  Fi.xed  wliite  and  visible  15  miles. 
About  % of  a mile  south  of  the  north  end  of  Sandy  Hook. 

Sandy  Hook  South  Beacon.  Fixed  white  and  visible  11  miles. 
On  Sandy  Hook  about  14  of  a mile  N.  W.  by  W.  Vs  from 
Sandy  Hook  Main  light. 

Sandy  Hook  North  Beacon.  Fixed  white  and  visible  12  miles. 
With  a dark  sector  between  N.  14  W.  and  N.  N.  W.  on  the  north 
end  of  Sandy  Hook,  and  with  Sandy  Hook  Main  light  forms  the 
range  for  the  upper  part  of  the  Ambrose  Channel.  Fog  signal  is 
a siren  giving  blasts  of  3 seconds  at  intervals  of  27  seconds. 

Sandy  Hook  Fog  Bell  Station.  On  the  northwesterly  point 
of  Sandy  Hook  about  1/2  of  a mile  W.  % N.  from  North  Hook 
Beacon  is  a bell  giving  3 blows  at  intervals  of  10  seconds. 

Ambrose  Channel  Lightship.  1 occulting  white  12  seconds, 
eclipse  3 seconds.  Hull  painted  straw  color.  Fog  signal,  steam 
whistle,  giving  1 blast,  13  seconds,  at  intervals  of  12  seconds. 
Submarine  bell  2 — 2 at  intervals  of  12  seconds.  Depth  of  water, 
13  fathoms.  Marks  the  entrance  to  the  Ambrose  and  Main  Chan- 
nels. Navesink  (Highlands)  bears  W.  S.  W.,  distant  8%  miles. 
Sandy  Hook  Main  light  bears  W.  % N.,  distant  7%  miles. 

ScoTL.YND  Lightship.  Flashing  white  on  the  foremast,  visible 
11  miles.  Fixed  red  on  the  mainmast,  visible  11  miles.  First 
flash,  3 seconds.  Eclipse,  3 seconds.  Second  flash,  3 seconds. 
Eclipse,  9 seconds.  Hull  painted  lead  color.  Fog  signal  bell, 
giving  3 blows  at  intervals  of  45  seconds.  Depth  of  water  1014 
fathoms.  Marks  the  entrance  to  the  South  and  Swash  Channels. 
Ambrose  Channel  Lightship  hears  E.  % N.,  distant  4i/g  miles. 
Navesink  (Highlands)  bears  S.  W.  by  W.,  distant  4yg  miles. 
Handy  Hook  Main  light  bears  W.  N.  W.  14  N.,  distant  4 miles. 

Romer  Shoal  Light.  On  Romer  Shoal  on  the  northeast  side  of 
Swash  Channel.  Flashing  white  and  visible  13  miles.  First  flash, 
y>  second.  Eclipse,  214  seconds.  Second  flash,  % second.  Eclipse, 


29 


21/2  seconds.  Tliird  flash,  Vg  second.  Eclipse,  11 1/2  seconds.  Fog 
signal  bell,  giving  1 blow  at  intervals  of  30  seconds.  Old  Orchard 
Shoal  light  bears  W.  % N.,  distant  nearly  4 miles,  and  forms 
the  range  for  vessels  of  15  feet  draft  entering  the  Ambrose  Chan- 
nel from  the  eastward.  Ambrose  Channel  red  buoy  6 (fixed  redl 
bears  E.  % S.,  distant  nearly  2 miles,  and  in  range  with  Romer 
Shoal  and  Old  Orchard  Shoal  lights. 

West  Bank  Light.  Off  the  southerly  end  of  West  Bank  on  the 
port  side  of  the  Channel  about  % of  a mile  to  the  northward  of 
the  intersection  of  the  Main  and  Swash  Channels.  Occulting 
white  light,  visible  14  miles.  Light,  4^/^  seconds,  and  eclipse,  V2 
second,  with  red  sector,  visible  12  miles,  covering  West  Knolls  on 
the  south  and  West  Bank  and  Craven  Shoal  on  the  north.  Fog 
signal  horn,  giving  2 blasts  every  20  seconds.  First  blast,  3 
seconds.  Silent,  2 seconds.  Second  blast,  3 seconds.  Silent,  12 
seconds.  With  Staten  Island  light  at  Richmond  forms  the  first 
range  for  entering  the  Ambrose  Channel.  Old  Orchard  Shoal 
light  bears  W.  S.  W.,  distant  3 miles. 

Staten  Island  Light.  On  Staten  Island  at  Richmond.  Fixed 
white,  visible  21  miles,  and  with  West  Bank  light  forms  the  first 
range  for  entering  the  Ambrose  Channel. 

Point  Comfort  (front)  and  Waackaack  (rear)  Beacons 
(Bayside  Range).  Near  Point  Comfort  and  about  31/2  miles 
northward  and  westward  of  the  Chapel  Hill  Cut  Range  lights. 

Point  Comfort.  A fixed  white  light,  visible  12  miles. 

Waackaack.  Two  fi.xed  white  range  lens  lights.  LTpper  light 
visible  16  miles  in  range  with  Point  Comfort  Beacon  (front) 
forms  the  Main  Channel  range  from  the  inner  end  of  Gedney 
Channel  to  Soutlnvest  Spit.  Tlie  low^er  light  visible  ISVa  miles 
and  in  range  uith  Old  Orchard  Shoal  light  and  visible  over  an 
arc  on  each  side  of  the  range  line,  and  marks  the  best  water 
between  Staten  Island  and  West  Bank  and  also  marks  the  easterly 
sector  of  Old  Orchard  Shoal  light. 

Conover  (front)  and  Chapel  Hill  (rear)  Beacons.  On  the 
southerly  side  of  Sandy  Hook  Bay,  near  Atlantic  Highlands, 
about  4 miles  southward  and  westward  of  Sandy  Hook  light. 


30 


Fixed  white  light.  Conover  Beacon  visible  13  miles,  and  Chapel 
Hill  Beacon  visible  22  miles.  These  two  lights  form  the  range 
for  Chapel  Hill  Cut. 

Elm  Tree  (front)  and  New  Dorp  (rear)  Beacons.  On  the 
southeasterly  side  of  Staten  Island.  Fixed  white  light.  Elm 
Tree  Beacon  is  visible  13  miles  and  New  Dorp  Beacon  is  visible 
20  miles.  These  tw'O  lights  form  the  range  for  the  South  and 
Swash  Channels. 

Old  Orchard  Shoal  Light.  On  the  southeasterly  edge  of  Old 
Orchard  Slioal  on  the  line  of  best  water  through  Gedney  Channel. 
Fixed  white,  12  seconds,  with  eclipse  of  3 seconds,  with  a red 
sector,  one  edge  of  which  cuts  Princess  Bay  light  and  red  buoy  4, 
marking  the  light  draft  channel  to  black  buoy  3 at  the  westerly 
end  of  Amboy  Cut  and  the  other  edge,  and  the  light  in  range  with 
Waaekaack  Beacon  lower  light  marks  the  best  water  over  Old 
Orchard  Shoal  and  between  Staten  Island  and  West  Bank.  Fog 
signal  is  a siren  giving  one  blast  of  71/2  seconds  at  intervals  of  7% 
seconds.  Depth  of  water,  2%  fathoms.  West  Bank  light  bears 
E.  N.  E.,  distant  3 miles.  Waaekaack  Beacon  bears  S.  S.  W.  % 
distant  4%  miles.  Princess  Bay  light  bears  W.  % N.,  distant 
5%  miles. 

Coney  Island  Light.  On  Nortons  Point.  Flashing  red  1% 
seconds  with  eclipse  3%  seconds,  and  flashing  red  5 seconds  with 
eclipse  5 seconds,  visible  14  miles.  Homer  Shoal  light  bears 
S.  W.,  distant  3%  miles.  Fog  signal  is  a bell  giving  one  blow 
at  intervals  of  15  seconds. 

Fort  Wadsworth  Light.  On  Fort  Wadsworth  on  the  westerlv 
side  of  the  Narrows.  Bod  and  white  flashes  of  2%  seconds  at 
intervals  of  7%  seconds.  White  flash  is  visible  14  miles  and  red 
flash  12  miles.  Fort  Lafayette  Fog  Signal  Station  bears  E.  % N.. 
distant  % of  a mile.  Robbins  Reef  light  bears  N..  distant  3% 
miles.  Coney  Island  light  bears  S.  E.  % S.,  distant  2%  miles. 

Fort  Lafayette  Fog  Signal  Station.  On  the  easterly  side  of 
the  Narrows.  Is  a bell  giving  one  and  two  blows  alternately  at 
intervals  of  20  seconds. 

Robbins  Reef  Light.  On  the  southeasterly  edge  of  -Jersey 


31 


Flats,  about  one  mile  off  Constable  Point.  Flashing  white  I1/2 
seconds  at  intervals  of  41/2  seconds,  visible  13  miles.  Fog  signal 
is  a siren,  giving  one  blast  of  3 seconds  at  intervals  of  3 seconds. 

Governor’s  Island  Extension  Light.  On  the  southwesterly 
end  of  Governor’s  Island.  Fixed  red.  Fog  signal  is  a bell,  giving 
one  blow  at  intervals  of  10  seconds. 

Governor's  Island  Light.  On  the  northwesterly  side  of 
Governor’s  Island.  Two  fixed  red.  Fog  signal  is  a siren,  giving 
one  blast  of  3 seconds  at  intervals  of  12  seconds,  and  a bell,  giving 
2 blows  at  intervals  of  10  seconds,  if  siren  is  disabled. 

Blackwell’s  Island  Resf  Lights.  On  Blackwell's  Island  Reef 
off  the  southwesterly  end  of  Blackwell’s  Island.  Two  fixed  red 
lights. 

Blackwell’s  Island  Light.  On  the  northeasterly  end  of  Black- 
well’s Island.  Fixed  red  light. 

Jeffreys  Hook  Lights.  On  Fort  Washington.  Tv\'o  fixed  red 
lights. 

Great  Kills  Light.  On  Old  Orchard  Shoal  off  Great  Kills 
Harbor  ( Staten  Island ) . Occulting  white  light  and  is  lighted 
from  March  15  to  December  15.  Old  Orchard  Shoal  light  bears 
S.  E.  by  E.  14  E.,  distant  1%  miles. 

Princess  Bay  Light.  On  the  southerly  shore  of  Staten  Island 
at  Red  Bank  and  in  line  of  the  best  water  from  the  westerly  end 
of  Amboy  Cut  to  black  buoy  5.  Flashing  white  light  2 seconds  at 
intervals  of  3 seconds,  visible  14  miles.  Old  Orchard  Shoal  light 
bears  E.  % S.,  distant  514  miles. 

Boundary  Beacon.  Not  lighted.  Perch  and  ball  on  a stone 
pier.  Princess  Bay  light  bears  N.  N.  E.  14  E.,  distant  2 miles. 
Old  Orchard  Shoal  light  bears  E.  by  N.,  distant  614  miles. 

Great  Beds  Light.  On  the  southeasterly  end  of  Great  Beds  in 
Raritan  Bay.  Fixed  red  light  and  visible  9 miles.  Old  Orchard 
Shoal  light  bears  E.  14  N.,  distant  714  miles.  Romer  Shoal  light 
bears  E.  14  S.,  distant  1114  miles. 

Western  Jetty  Lower  End  Light  No.  1 (Raritan  River).  On 
the  lower  end  of  Western  Jetty  between  Crows  Dock  and  Edgars 
Dock.  Fi.xed  red  light. 


32 


Western  Jetty  Upper  End  Light  No.  2 (Raritan  River).  Be- 
tween Acken  Dock  and  Bloomfield’s  Dock  and  abreast  Red  Root 
Creek  on  the  upper  end  of  Western  Jetty.  Fixed  red  light. 
Western  Jetty  Lower  End  light  bears  N.  E.  % E.,  distant  % of 
a mile. 

South  Jetty  Light  No.  3 (Raritan  River).  Between  White- 
head  Dock  and  Crab  Island  on  the  easterly  end  of  South  .Jetty. 
Fixed  white  light. 

Bergen  Point  Light.  On  Bergen  Point  Reef  % of  a mile 
W.  S.  W.  of  Bergen  Point.  Occulting  white  light  with  eclipse  of 
5 seconds  and  visible  12  miles.  Fog  signal  is  a bell,  giving  1 blow 
at  intervals  of  15  seconds. 

Centerville  Light  (Newark  Bay) . On  the  westerly  side  of  the 
channel  and  % of  a mile  to  the  northward  of  the  Central  R.  R. 
of  New  Jersey  Bridge.  Occulting  white  light  at  intervals  of  1 
second. 

Pamrapo  Light  (Newark  Bay).  On  the  westerly  side  of  the 
channel.  Occulting  white  light  at  intervals  of  1 second.  Center- 
ville light  bears  S.  W.  by  S.  14  S.,  distant  of  a mile. 

Saltersville  Light  (Newark  Bay).  On  the  westerly  side  of 
the  channel  about  % of  a mile  to  the  southward  of  the  Lehigh 
Valley  E.  R.  Bridge.  Occulting  white  light  at  intervals  of  1 
second. 

.Junction  Light  (Newark  Bay).  At  the  junction  of  the  Passaic 
and  Hackensack  Rivers  on  the  easterly  side  of  the  Passaic  River 
channel  and  about  V2  of  a mile  northward  of  the  Lehigh  Valley 
R.  R.  Bridge.  Occulting  white  light  at  intervals  of  1 second. 

Great  Captain  Island  Light.  On  Great  Captain  Island,  near 
Greenwich  Point.  Fixed  white  light  and  visible  14  miles.  Fog 
signal  is  a siren,  giving  1 blast  of  3 seconds  at  intervals  of  27 
seconds. 

Execution  Rocks  Light.  On  Execution  Rocks.  Flashing  white 
light  of  IV2  sc^conds  witli  eclipse  of  SV2  .seconds,  with  a red 
sector  covering  the  southern  point  of  Hart  Island,  visible  13 
miles.  Fog  signal  is  a siren,  giving  1 blast  of  3 seconds  at 
intervals  of  17  seconds.  Sands  Point  light  bears  S.  by  E.  Jo  E., 
distant  nearly  % of  a mile, 


33 


Harbor  Rock  Light.  On  Harbor  Rock  on  the  westerly  end  of 
Davenport  Neck.  Fixed  red  light  from  Hay  1 to  November  1 
(not  official ) . 

CoRXiXG  Rock  Light.  Off  the  northwest  side  of  Davids  Island. 
Fixed  white  light  from  May  1 to  November  1 (not  official). 

Baileys  Rock  Gas  Buoy.  On  the  west  side  of  the  entrance 
to  Echo  Bay.  Occulting  white  light  of  2 seconds  at  intervals  of 
6 seconds  and  visible  7 miles. 

Auxt  Phebe  Rock  Light.  On  tlie  northwest  side  of  Davids 
Island  about  Yg  of  a mile  off  shore.  Fixed  red  light.  Fog  signal 
is  a bell,  giving  1 blow  at  intervals  of  5 seconds. 

Sakds  Poixt  Light.  On  Sands  Point.  Fixed  white  light, 
visible  12  miles.  Execution  Rocks  light  hears  N.  by  W.  % W., 
distant  nearly  Yg  of  a mile. 

Stepping  Stones  Light.  On  the  western  edge  of  Stepping 
Stones  Reef.  Fixed  red  light,  visible  8 miles.  Fog  signal  is  a 
bell,  giving  2 (juick  blows  at  intervals  of  20  seconds. 

Throggs  Neck  Light.  Oh  Fort  Schuyler.  Fixed  white  light 
and  visible  12  miles.  Fog  signal  is  a bell,  giving  1 blow  at 
intervals  of  15  seconds.  Whitestone  Point  light  bears  W.  Vs  S., 
distant  D4  miles. 

Fort  Totten  Lights.  On  the  northerly  wharf.  Two  fixed 
lights,  upper  one  white  and  lower  one  red. 

Whitestone  Point  Light.  On  Whitestone  Point.  Fixed  white 
light.  Old  Ferry  Point  bears  N.  W.  % distant  nearly  % of 
a mile. 

Flushing  Bay  Light.  On  the  north  end  of  the  dike,  on  the 
westerly  side  of  the  dredged  channel  to  Flushing.  Fixed  red 
light. 

Flushing  Bay  Inner  Light.  On  the  dike,  on  the  westerly 
side  of  the  dredged  channel  to  Flushing,  nearly  % of  a mile  S. 
by  E.  i/i  E.  from  Flushing  Bay  light.  Fixed  red  light. 

Rikers  Island  Light.  On  the  northerly  end  of  Rikers  Island. 
Fixed  red  light. 

Oak  Bluff  Lights.  On  Oak  Bluff.  1 fixed  red  light  above 
1 fixed  white  light. 

North  Brother  Island  Light.  On  the  southerly  end  of  the 


34 


island.  Occulting  white  light  of  5 seconds  with  eclipse  of  5 
seconds. 

South  Brother  Isla>'d  Ledge  Light.  On  South  Brother  Island 
Ledge  in  the  middle  of  the  South  Channel  about  of  a mile 

south  of  South  Brother  Island.  Fixed  red  light. 

Lawrence  Point  Ledge  Light.  On  Lawrence  Point  Ledge  about 
midway  between  South  Brother  Island  and  Lawrence  Point.  Fixed 
white  light.  North  Brother  Island  light  bears  N.  E.  y^  N.,  distant 
% of  a mile.  Sunken  Meadow  light  bears  W.  14  distant  about 
14  of  a mile. 

Sunken  Meadow  Light.  On  the  easterly  side  of  Sunken 
Meadow.  Fixed  red  light. 

Negro  Point  Light.  On  Negro  Point,  south  end  of  Wards 
Island.  Occulting  white  light  of  1 second,  with  eclipse  of  1 
second.  Fog  signal  is  a bell,  giving  2 blows  at  intervals  of  5 
seconds. 

Hell  Gate  Light.  On  Hallets  Point.  Alternately  white  and 
red  liglit,  white  light  3 seconds  and  red  light  3 seconds.  Fog 
signal  is  a bell,  giving  1 blow  at  intervals  of  5 seconds. 

Mill  Bock  North  Light  (Hell  Gate).  On  the  northerly  end  of 
Great  Mill  Bock.  Fixed  red  light. 

Mill  Bock  South  Light  (Hell  Gate).  On  the  southerly  end  of 
Little  Mill  Bock.  Occulting  red  light  of  1 second  at  intervals  of 
1 second. 

Q.  3.  Give  the  name  and  location  of  the  rocks  and  shoals,  least 
depth  on  them  at  mean  low  water  and  how  they  are  marked  on 
the  waters  for  which  you  ask  to  be  licensed.  Ans.  Shrewsbury 
Bocks  lie  about  3)4  miles  southward  of  Navesink  (Highlands) 
light  and  extend  about  114  miles  off  shore.  Least  depth  about 
14  feet,  and  is  marked  by  Shrewsbury  Bocks  black  bell  buoy  1 
on  the  eastward  side. 

Outer  Middle  Ground  lies  about  3 miles  to  the  southward  of  ■ 
Sandy  Hook  and  about  1 mile  off  shore.  Least  depth  about 
16  feet,  and  is  marked  by  red  buoy  2. 

Oil  Spot  lies  about  2 miles  to  the  southward  of  Sandy  Hook 
and  about  1 mile  off  shore.  Least  depth  about  9 feet,  and  is 
marked  by  red  buoy  4 and  black  buoy  3. 


GR0V£R^|;.  BERcdoll 

False  Hook  Shoal  extends  about  N.  W.  and  S.  E.  about 
1/2  mile  and  lies  about  % mile  off  shore,  between  the  North  and 
South  Sandy  Hook  lights.  Least  depth  about  15  feet,  and  is 
marked  by  an  obstruction  buoy  on  the  northwest  end. 

A lump  lies  about  14  mile  S.  S.  W.  from  Ambrose  Channel 
Lightship.  Least  depth  about  514  fathoms. 

Pitch  of  the  Hook  extends  about  % mile  N.  E.  from  Sandy 
Hook.  It  has  all  depths  under  18  feet  and  is  dangerous  for 
any  draught,  and  is  marked  by  black  bell  buoy  5. 

Rockaway  Shoals  extend  off  Roekaway  Beach  to  the  southward 
and  westward  from  % of  a mile  to  114  miles,  and  lie  to  the 
northward  of  the  range  formed  by  Romer  Shoal  and  Old  Orchard 
Shoal  lights.  It  has  all  depths  under  18  feet  and  is  dangerous 
for  vessels  of  any  draft,  and  is  marked  by  Rockaway  Shoals  red 
buoy  2 and  Rockaway  bell  buoy. 

A lump  lies  about  14  mile  N.  E.  from  South  Channel  between 
the  two  channel  buoys.  Least  depth  about  20  feet,  and  is  marked 
by  lump  obstruction  buoy. 

Palestine  Shoal  is  a lump  about  14  mile  northward  of  the 
Main  Channel  and  about  % mile  to  the  westward  of  the  Swash 
Channel.  Least  depth  about  3 fathoms,  and  is  marked  on  the 
cast  end  by  Palestine  Shoal  East  End  obstruction  buoy  and  on 
the  west  end  by  Palestine  Shoal  West  End  red  buoy  4. 

Flynn  Knoll  is  an  irregular  shoal  lying  about  114  miles  N.  W. 
from  Sandy  Hook.  Least  depth  about  10  feet,  and  is  marked  by 
the  Main  Cliannel  red  buoys  and  the  ranges. 

Southwest  Spit  is  on  the  southwest  side  of  Flynn  Knoll  and 
is  a part  of  that  shoal. 

East  Knolls  lies  between  the  Main  and  Swash  Channels  north- 
ward of  Flynn  Knoll,  and  about  114  miles  long  N.  N.  W.  and 
S.  S.  E.  and  about  1 mile  wide.  Least  depth  about  10  feet.  It 
is  marked  by  the  ranges  and  channel  buoys. 

West  Knolls  lie  between  Old  Orchard  Shoal  light  and  abreast 
black  buoys  5 and  7 about  % mile  westward  of  the  Main  Channel, 
extending  N.  N.  E.  and  S.  S.  W.  nearly  1 mile.  Least  depth  about 


36 


14  feet.  It  is  marked  by  an  obstrriction  buoy  on  the  southern 
end  and  is  covered  by  the  red  sector  in  West  Bank  light. 

A shoal  lies  about  % mile  S.  S.  W.  from  West  Bank  light 
a little  to  the  westward  of  the  Main  and  Swash  Channel  ranges. 
It  extends  north  and  south  about  14  mile.  Least  depth  about 

15  feet.  It  is  marked  by  the  ranges  and  covered  by  the  red 
sector  in  West  Bank  light. 

Round  Shoal  lies  to  the  southward  of  Seguine  Point  and  is 
about  1%  miles  wide.  Least  depth  about  6 feet.  It  is  not 
marked. 

Romer  Shoal  is  about  % mile  wide  and  extends  about  3%  miles 
northwest  and  southeast  between  the  Ambrose  and  Swash  Chan- 
nels. It  is  marked  by  the  channel  buoys  on  all  sides  and  by 
Romer  Shoal  light.  Least  depth  northward  of  the  light  is  about 
11  feet.  Depth  to  the  southward  of  the  light  is  from  18  feet 
to  dry. 

East  Bank  extends  southward  from  Coney  Island  about  3 miles 
to  Ambrose  Channel  and  is  al)out  2M>  miles  wide.  Soundings  are 
very  irregular,  the  least  depth  being  about  3 feet.  It  is  marked 
by^  the  range  formed  by  Romer  Shoal  and  Old  Orchard  Shoal 
lights,  Ambrose  Channel  buoy's  and  East  Bank  Xorthwest  End 
red  buoy'  12.  This  buoy'  lies  % of  a mile  about  S.  by  W.  from 
Coney'  Island  light. 

Old  Orchard  Shoal  and  West  Bank  (Staten  Island  Flats)  is  a 
shelving  shoal  extending  from  Seguine  Point  to  Fort  Wadsworth 
and  about  3 miles  southeast  from  Staten  Island.  The  soundings 
are  more  or  less  irregular ; the  least  depth  is  1 or  2 feet  between 
West  Bank  and  Fort  Wadsworth  lights.  It  is  marked  by  Old 
Orchard  Slioal  light  and  its  red  sector  marks  the  best  water 
over  the  slioal.  It  is  also  marked  by’  the  channel  buoys  and 
by  West  Bank  light  and  covered  by  the  red  sector  in  that 
light. 

Craven  Shcal  is  a small  bold  spot  about  1V4  miles  S.  by  E.  E. 
from  Fort  Wadsworth  light.  Least  depth  18  feet.  It  is  marked 
by  Craven  Shoal  obstruction  spar  and  bell  buoys  and  is  covered 
by  the  red  sector  in  West  Bank  light. 

In  Gravesend  Bay  shelving  a shoal  extends  from  .Coney  Island 


37 


to  Fort  Lafayette  and  about  1 mile  off  shore.  Soundings  are 
irregular  and  show  all  depths  under  18  feet. 

Robbins  Reef  and  Jersey  Flats  extend  from  Communipaw  to 
about  % of  a mile  soiitliwest  of  Robbins  Reef  light.  Soundings  are 
irregular  and  show  all  depths  under  18  feet.  It  is  marked  by 
Robbins  Reef  light,  Robbins  Reef  black  bell  buoy,  occulting  red 
lighted  bell  buoy  2,  marking  the  dredged  channel  to  the  Penn- 
sylvania R.  R.  Terminal,  black  buoy  15,  occulting  wliite  lighted 
buoy  2 and  black  buoy.  1,  marking  the  dredged  channel  to  Black 
Tom,  Bedloe  Island,  and  black  buoy  1 and  red  buoy  2,  marking 
the  dredged  channel  to  Ellis  Island. 

Red  Hook  and  Gowanus  Flats  are  about  2i/t  miles  long  and  % 
of  a mile  wide,  extending  from  Owl’s  Head  to  Red  Hook.  Least 
depth  about  6 feet.  It  is  marked  by  an  obstruction  buoy,  marking 
the  junction  of  the  Bay  Ridge  and  Main  Channels  west  of  the 
Flats,  occulting  white  lighted  red  bell  buoy  12  and  red  buoy  14 
on  the  westward  side.  Bay  Ridge  Channel  black  buoys  1,  3 and 
the  anchorage  buoys  on  the  eastward  side. 

Mid-Channel  Rock  lies  abreast  West  New  Brighton,  and  is 
marked  by  red  buoy  2A.  Least  depth  17  feet. 

To  the  northward  of  this  there  are  two  other  rocks,  one  having 
a least  depth  of  18  feet,  and  the  other  one  14  feet. 

Bergen  Point  Reef  extends  about  % of  a mile  off  Bergen  Point, 
and  is  marked  by  red  buoy  2 and  Bergen  Point  light. 

Middle  Ground  is  about  H of  a mile  long  and  % of  a mile 
wide,  extending  about  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  at  the  entrance  to 
Newark  Bay  between  Bergen  Point  and  Shooters  Island,  and  is 
marked  by  an  obstruction  buoy  on  each  end.  Least  depth  11  feet. 

Fifteen-and-one-half-Foot  Rock  lies  off  the  mouth  of  the  Rah- 
w^ay  River  on  the  starboard  side  of  the  channel.  It  is  not  marked. 
Least  depth  is  15  feet. 

A shoal,  including  Storys  Flats  from  Smoking  Point  to  Totten- 
ville,  extending  from  bold  to  at  Smoking  Point  to  about  % of  a 
mile  at  the  lower  end  of  Storys  Flats,  which  is  marked  by  red 
buoy  4. 

Governor’s  Island  West  End  Shoal  extends  off  the  southwest 


38 


end  of  Governor’s  Island  about  300  feet.  Least  depth  1.5  feet, 
and  is  marked  by  black  bell  buoy  1. 

Governor’s  Island  South  Shoal  extends  off  the  southeast  side 
of  tlie  island  abreast  the  Atlantic  Docks.  Least  depth  about 
4 feet.  It  is  marked  by  black  buoy  1. 

Dimond  Reef  lies  off  the  north  side  of  Governor's  Island. 
Least  depth  26  feet. 

A narrow  shoal  about  % mile  long,  extending  about  X.  X.  E. 
and  S.  S.  W.,  lies  between  Dimond  Reef  and  Atlantic  Avenue 
(Brooklyn).  Least  depth  21  feet. 

Coenties  Reef  lies  off  Pier  8 (Xew  York).  Least  depth  26  feet. 

A shoal  extends  off  Jackson  Slip  at  Corfears  Hook  Park  about 
150  yards  with  a least  depth  of  about  12  feet  outside  of  the 
pier  line. 

A shoal  lies  on  the  Xew  York  side  of  the  river  and  extends 
from  Grand  Street  to  Houston  Street.  Least  depth  about  8 feet. 

Third  Street  Reef  lies  about  500  feet  off  Third  Street  pier. 
Least  depth  about  17  feet.  Between  this  and  Seventh  Street 
there  are  depths  from  18  to  22  feet. 

Shell  Reef  lies  on  the  Xew  York  side,  extending  from  Seventh 
Street  to  Fourteenth  Street,  and  is  marki-d  by  red  buoy  6.  Least 
depth  about  14  feet. 

Xes  Rock  lies  about  500  feet  off  Xineteentb  Street  pier  and 
is  marked  by  an  obstruction  buoy.  Least  depth  about  14  feet. 
Between  this  and  Seventeenth  Street  there  are  some  spots  having 
a least  depth  of  about  16  feet. 

Pilgrim  Rock  lies  off  Twentieth  Street  pier,  about  500  feet 
from  Xes  Rock.  Least  depth  24  feet. 

Twenty-sixth  Street  Reef  lies  about  400  feet  off  Twenty-sixth 
Street.  Least  dejffh  about  20  feet.  A spot  having  a depth  of 
23  feet  lies  off  Twenty-second  Street,  between  this  and  Xes  Rock. 

Ferry  Reef  lies  Vs  of  a mile  off  Thirty-fourth  Street  (Xew 
York ) . Least  depth  24  feet. 

Charlotte  Rock  lies  about  mile  off  Hunter's  Point.  Least 
de])tb  about  26  feet. 

Eighteen  Foot  Spot  off  Fifth  Street  (Long  Island  City),  % 
of  a mile  S.  E.  by  S.  % S.  from  Blackwell's  Island  Reef  lights. 


39 


Eighteen  Foot  Spot  lies  about  100  yards  off  Seventh  Street 
(Long  Island  City),  and  is  marked  by  an  obstruction  buoy. 

Blackwell’s  Island  Reef  extends  about  Vs  mile  off  the  southerly 
end  of  Blackwell’s  Island  and  is  marked  by  an  obstruction  buoy 
and  two  red  lights.  It  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Ten  Foot  Spot  lies  between  East  Eighty-first  Street  and  East 
Eighty-second  Street,  New  York,  and  extends  off  about  75  yards. 
Least  depth  10  feet. 

Sands  Point  Reef  and  Prospect  Point  Shoal  make  off  about 
% mile  and  are  marked  by  black  bell  buoy  19  and  black  buoy  21 
and  are  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Execution  Rocks  lie  about  % of  a mile  N.  N.  W.  from  Sands 
Point  light.  It  extends  about  of  a mile  N.  E.  and  S.  W.  and 
is  marked  by  Execution  Rocks  light,  an  obstruction  buoy  on  the 
northeast  end  and  an  obstruction  buoy  on  the  southwest  end, 
and  red  buoy  30  on  the  southeast  side.  It  is  dangerous  for  any 
draught. 

Old  Hen  Rock  lies  about  Yg  of  a mile  N.  E.  of  Prospect  Point. 
It  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Baileys  Rock  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  to  Echo  Bay 
about  150  yards  off  shore.  It  is  marked  by  a spindle  and  a 
flashing  white  lighted  black  buoy.  It  is  dangerous  for  any 
draught. 

Hicks  Ledge  about  % of  a mile  east  of  Baileys  Rock.  It  is 
marked  by  an  obstruction  buoy.  Least  depth  8 feet. 

Emerald  Rock  lies  between  Middle  Shoal  and  Davenport  Neck. 
It  is  marked  by  an  obstruction  buoy.  Least  depth  9 feet. 

Middle  Shoal  lies  about  % of  a mile  off  Davenport  Neck.  It  is 
nearly  round  and  about  14  of  a mile  in  diameter.  It  is  marked 
by  Middle  Shoal  black  buoy  1 on  the  north  side  and  Emerald 
Rock  obstruction  buoy  on  the  west  side.  It  is  dangerous  for  any 
draught. 

Two  rocks  lie  between  Huckleberry  Island  and  Middle  Shoal 
and  are  marked  by  Huckleberry  Island  red  buoy  2.  Least  depth 
7 feet. 

Spindle  Rock  lies  between  Davids  Island  and  Davenport  Neck. 


40 


It  is  marked  hy  Spindle  Rock  red  buoy  2.  It  is  dangerous  for 
any  drauglit. 

Aunt  Phebe  Rock  lies  between  Davids  Island  and  Glen  Island. 
It  is  marked  by  Aunt  Phebe  fixed  red  light  and  a fog  bell,  giving 
1 blow  every  5 seconds.  It  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Corning  Rock  lies  between  Aunt  Phebe  Rock  and  Glen  Island. 
It  is  marked  l)y  Corning  Rock  black  buoy  1 and  from  May  1 to 
November  1 by  a fixed  white  light  (not  official).  It  is  dangerous 
for  any  drauglit. 

R.  R.  Stevens  Rock  lies  between  Davids  Island  and  Glen  Island 
and  is  marked  by  an  obstruction  buoy.  It  is  dangerous  for  any 
draught. 

Harbor  Rock  is  off  the  southwest  end  of  Davenport  Neck.  It 
is  marked  by  Harlior  Rock  red  buoy  6 and  by  a fixed  red  light 
from  May  1 to  November  1 (not  official).  It  is  dangerous  for 
any  draught. 

Gangway  Rock  is  on  the  point  of  a shoal  extending  about  % 
of  a mile  about  N.  N.  W.  from  Barker  Point  and  about  1 mile 
W.  S.  W.  of  Sands  Point  light.  It  is  marked  by  Gangway  Rock 
bell  buoy  23.  It  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Success  Rock  is  on  the  shoal  extending  off  Barker's  Point  about 
Vi  of  a mile  S.  E.  of  Gangway  Rock.  It  is  marked  by  a spindle 
and  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

A rock  having  a least  depth  of  6 feet  lies  between  Gangway  and 
Success  Rocks. 

Machaux  Rock  lies  about  % of  a mile  east  of  Hunter's  Island 
and  about  y,  of  a mile  southwest  of  Davids  Island.  It  is  marked 
by  Machaux  Rock  red  buoy  2. 

Middle  Reef  lies  between  the  northerly  end  of  Hart  Island  and 
Davids  Island.  It  is  about  % of  a mile  in  diameter  with  a least 
depth  of  12  feet  on  the  northerly  edge  of  the  red  sector  in 
Execution  Rocks  light.  To  the  northward  of  that  line  it  is 
dangerous  for  any  draught. 

South  and  East  Nonations  lie  from  14  to  % of  a mile  north- 
east from  The  Blauzes.  The  southwest  end  is  marked  by  red 
buoy  2.  They  are  dangerous  for  any  draught. 


41 


Cliimney  Sweeps  are  two  bare  rocks  on  a shoal  about  % of  a 
mile  in  diametei-,  which  lie  about  Vs  of  a mile  northeastward  of 
High  Island  and  are  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

A group  of  rocks  lie  about  midway  between  the  reef  on  the 
northerly  end  of  Hart  Island  and  the  Chimney  Sweeps,  which 
have  a least  depth  of  5 feet  and  are  marked  bj"  Chimney  Sweeps 
black  buoy  y^. 

The  Blauzes  are  on  the  reef  which  extends  about  hi  ^ 
mile  N.  N.  W.  from  the  northerly  end  of  Hart  Island.  Least 
depth  northerly  from  The  Blauzes  is  9 feet,  and  between  The 
Blauzes  and  Hart  Island  it  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Rat  Island  is  a bare  rock  lying  about  hi  of  mile  oil  the 
easterly  side  of  City  Island  and  on  the  easterly  side  of  Green 
Flats,  which  are  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Cuban  Ledge  lies  about  y<i  of  a mile  S.  W.  by  S.  from  Rod- 
mans  Neck  and  i.b  marked  by  a spindle.  It  is  dangerous  for  any 
draught. 

Big  Tom  Rock  lies  about  hi  of  mile  W.  S.  W.  from  the 
southerly  end  of  City  Island  and  is  marked  by  an  obstruction 
buoy.  Dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Hewlett’s  Point  Shoal  extends  off  the  point  about  Vs  mile.  It 
IS  marked  liy  black  buoy  25  and  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Stepping  Stones  is  a reef  extending  about  % mile  off  Elm 
Point.  It  is  marked  bj'  Stepping  Stones  light  and  is  dangerous 
for  any  draught. 

Hart  Island  Reef  extends  about  hs  of  a mile  off  the  southerly 
end  of  Hart  Island  and  is  dangerous  for  any  draught,  and  is 
marked  by  red  bell  buoy  32. 

A shoal  makes  off  Tlirogg’s  Neck  about  hs  mile.  It  is  marked 
by  red  buoy  34  and  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

A shoal  makes  off  about  500  feet  from  Whitestone  light.  It  is 
not  marked  and  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

College  Point  Reef  makes  off  about  hi  mile  from  College  Point. 
It  is  marked  by  black  buoy  1 and  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

A shoal  makes  off  about  i/g  mile  from  Hunt’s  Point.  It  is 
marked  by  red  buoy  2 and  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 


42 


A spot  lies  about  mile  S.  % W.  from  Barratto  Point.  It 
has  a depth  of  24  feet  and  is  not  marked. 

A rock  lies  about  150  feet  off  the  piers  about  midway  between 
Barratto  Point  and  Oak  Bluff  Rock.  Least  depth  21  feet. 

Oak  Blulf  Rock  lies  about  Vi  mile  E.  S.  E.  % E.  from  Oak 
Bluff  light,  and  is  marked  by  red  buoy  2V->.  Least  depth  16  feet. 

A shoal  extends  about  Vs  mile  S.  E.  by  E.  from  the  north  end 
of  North  Brother  Island,  and  is  marked  on  the  northerly  side 
liy  Idack  buoy  3A  and  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Middle  Ground  lies  between  Lawrence  Point  and  Sunken 
Meadow.  It  is  marked  by  black  buoy  9 and  red  buoy  4.  Least 
deptli  10  feet. 

Pot  Rock  lies  about  Vi  mile  E.  by  N.  from  Hallets  Point 
liglit.  It  has  a depth  of  22  feet  and  is  not  marked. 

Holmes  Rock,  Hog  Back  and  Frying  Pan  lie  off  the  southerly 
end  of  Ward's  Island.  Frying  Pan  is  the  outer  one  and  has  a 
depth  of  18  feet.  The  others  are  bare. 

Mill  Rocks  lie  off  Ninetj’-sixth  Street  and  are  marked  by  a red 
light  off  each  end  and  are  dangerous  for  any  draught. 

Flood  Rock  lies  about  Vs  mile  S.  S.  E.  from  the  southerly 
liglit  on  Mill  Rock.  It  has  a depth  of  18  feet.  Between  this 
and  Frying  Pan  Rock  there  are  several  spots  having  a depth  of 
18  or  19  feet. 

Heel  Tap  Rock  lies  about  150  feet  N.  E.  from  Mill  Rock  North 
light.  Least  depth  20  feet. 

A spot  lies  about  Vs  of  a mile  N.  E.  % E.  from  Hallets  Point 
light.  Least  depth  23  feet. 

A rock  lies  about  150  feet  off  the  New  York,  New  Haven  & 
Hartford  R.  R.  piers  between  Oak  Bluff  light  and  Oak  Bluff  Rock. 
Least  depth  17  feet. 

Rhinelander  Reef  e.xtends  off  about  600  feet  from  East  Ninety- 
first  Street  to  East  Ninety-third  Street,  New  York.  Least  depth 
0 feet. 

A shoal  makes  off  about  200  feet  N.  E.  from  Blackwell's  Island 
light  and  is  dangerous  for  any  draught. 


43 


Q.  4.  Give  the  bearings  and  distances  between  the  headlands, 
other  prominent  points  and  lights.  Ans.  Ambrose  Channel  Light- 
ship bear  E.  % N.  distant  4%  miles  from  Scotland  Lightship. 

From  Ambrose  Channel  Lightship  Navesink  (Highlands)  light 
bears  W.  S.  W.  8%  miles.  Sandy  Hook  )Main  light  liears  W. 
% N.  distant  7%  miles. 

From  Scotland  Lightship  Navesink  (Highlands)  light  bears 
S.  W.  by  W.  distant  4(4  miles.  Sandy  Hook  Main  light  bears 
W.  N.  W.  (4  distant  4 miles. 

From  Coney  Island  Point  Sandy  Hook  Main  light  bears  S.  y.,  W. 
distant  0%  miles.  West  Bank  light  bears  S.  W.  % S.  distant 
2%  miles.  Eomer  Shoal  light  bears  S.  % W.  distant  3%  miles. 
Fort  Wadsworth  light  bears  N.  W.  % N.  distant  2%  miles. 
Craven  Shoal  bell  buoy  bears  N.  W.  by  W.  (4  distant  1(4 
miles. 

From  Old  Orchard  Shoal  light  Sandy  Hook  Main  light  bears 
S.  E.  (4  E.  distant  5%  miles.  West  Bank  light  bears  E.  N.  E. 
distant  nearly  3 miles.  Romer  Shoal  light  bears  E.  % S.  distant 
3yg  miles.  Waackaaek  Beacon  bears  S.  S.  W.  % W.  distant  4% 
miles. 

From  Fort  Wadsworth  light  Fort  Lafayette  l)ears  E.  (4 
distant  nearly  % mile.  Robbins  Reef  light  bears  nearly  N. 
distant  3(4  miles. 

From  Robbins  Reef  light  Romer  Shoal  light  bears  S.  (4  E. 
distant  8%  miles,  and  Governor’s  Island  lights  on  Fort  (Yilliam 
bear  N.  E.  % E.  distant  nearly  3 miles. 

Distance  across  the  North  River  between  the  pier  heads  is 
about  % of  a mile. 

Q.  5.  You  are  bound  in  through  the  Swash  Channel  on  the  ebb 
tide.  A steamer  is  bound  out  and  blows  one  whistle.  Both 
vessels  will  reach  the  Swash  Channel  red  bell  buoy  6 about  the 
same  time.  Explain  what  you  would  do  and  why?  Aws.  I would 
answer  with  one  whistle  and  slow  down  or  stop  if  necessary. 


44 


because  it  would  be  more  or  less  dangerous  for  vessels  to  pass 
when  making  a sharp  turn.  It  would  not  be  reasonable  to  expect 
the  other  steamer  to  stop,  as  the  vessel  head  to  the  tide  can 
do  so  without  any  risk  of  losing  lier  position. 

Q.  6.  You  are  entering  the  harbor  through  the  Swash  Channel 
towing  a large,  light  vessel  with  a strong  E.  N.  E.  wind  and 
ebb  tide.  A tow  of  deep-loaded  scows  is  bound  out.  What  would 
you  do  and  why  ? Ans.  I would  IjIow  2 whistles  and  pass  to  the 
leeward  of  the  tow,  because  the  wind  would  drift  my  tow  so  far 
to  leeward  that  I would  be  unable  to  pass  to  windward  of  the 
other  tow. 


Q.  7.  You  are  entering  the  harbor  through  the  Gedney  Channel 
with  flood  tide  and  you  see  a long  tow  in  the  Swash  Channel 
bound  out.  What  precaution  would  yoii  take  and  why? 
Ans.  As  soon  as  possible  I would  take  a bearing  of  the  last  vessel 
in  the  tow.  If  the  bearing  did  not  appreciably  change,  I would 
slow  down  in  time  to  prevent  stopping  and  thereby  being  in 
danger  of  drifting  asliore.  If  the  bearing  should  close  or  open 
considerably  I could  proceed. 

Q.  8.  What  does  the  term  “abeam”  mean?  Ans.  An  object  is 
abeam  when  its  bearing  is  8 points  different  from  the  course 
or  ship’s  head. 

Q.  9.  What  does  the  term  “abreast”  mean?  Ans.  Opposite  a 
place  or  even  with  another  vessel  and  not  necessarily  abeam. 

Q.  10.  What  precautions  would  you  take  when  passing  near 
a dredge  or  digger  moored  in  a channel?  Ans.  Have  way  enough 
to  pass  with  engines  stopped  to  avoid  picking  up  the  moorings 
and  injury  to  the  propeller,  and  see  that  all  is  clear  before 
starting  the  engine  again. 


45 


Q.  11.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  terms  “right”  and  “left” 
handed  as  applied  to  propellers  and  what  is  their  action  ? 
Ans.  Looking  forward,  a right-handed  propeller  working  ahead 
turns  with  the  sun  and  throws  the  stern  to  starboard,  and 
working  astern,  throws  the  stern  to  port.  Tlie  action  of  a left- 
handed  propeller  is  opposite  to  a right-handed  one.  Most  pro- 
pellers are  right-handed. 

Q.  12.  Explain  the  system  of  buoyage?  Ans.  The  examiners 
sometimes  ask  questions  of  the  applicant  regarding  this  subject. 
However,  it  is  matter  that  should  fall  within  every  officer’s 
knowledge. 

The  following  order  is  observed  in  coloring  and  numbering  the 
buoys  in  Lhiited  States  waters,  viz. : 

1.  In  approaching  the  channel,  etc.,  from  seaward,  ued  buoys, 
with  EVEN  NUMBERS,  will  be  found  on  the  starboaei)  side  of  the 
channel,  and  must  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand  in  passing  in. 

2.  In  approaching  the  channel,  etc.,  from  seaward,  black  buoys, 
with  ODD  NUMBERS,  will  be  found  on  the  port  side  of  the  channel, 
and  must  be  left  on  the  port  hand  in  passing  in. 

3.  Buoys  painted  with  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes 
will  be  found  on  obstructions,  with  channel  ways  on  either  side 
of  them,  and  may  be  left  on  either  hand  in  passing  in. 

4.  Buoys  painted  with  white  and  black  perpendicui.ar 
STRIPES  will  be  found  in  mid-channel  and  must  be  passed 
close-to  to  avoid  danger. 

All  other  distinguishing  marks  to  buoys  will  be  in  addition 
to  the  foregoing,  and  may  be  emjiloyed  to  mark  particular  sjiots. 
a description  of  which  is  given  in  the  printed  list  of  buoys. 

Perches,  with  balls,  cages,  etc.,  will,  when  placed  on  buoys, 
be  at  turning  points,  the  color  and  number  indicating  on  what 
side  they  shall  be  passed. 

Nun  buoys,  properly  colored  and  numbered,  are  usually  placed 
on  the  starboard  side,  and  can  buoys  on  the  port  side  of  channels. 


46 


Day  beacons,  stakes,  and  spindles  (except  such  as  are  on  the 
sides  of  channels,  which  will  be  colored  like  buoys)  are  con- 
structed and  distinguished  with  special  reference  to  each  locality, 
and  particularly  in  regard  to  the  background  upon  which  they 
are  projected. 

Wherever  practicable,  the  tow'ers,  beacons,  buoys,  spindles,  and 
all  other  aids  to  navigation,  are  arranged  in  the  buoy  list  in 
regular  order  as  they  are  passed  by  vessels  entering  from  sea. 

The  positions  of  the  buoys  enumerated  in  the  buoy  list  are 
shown  on  the  charts  of  the  United  States  Coast  and  Geodetic 
Survey,  which  are  kept  corrected  from  information  furnished 
by  the  Inspectors  of  the  Lighthouse  Districts,  for  the  changes 
in  the  aids  to  navigation  rendered  necessary  from  time  to  time 
to  indicate  the  best' channels. 

In  winter  when  whistling  buoys,  bell  buoys,  lighted  buoys, 
can  ljuoys,  and  nun  buoys  are  in  danger  of  being  carried  away 
by  ice,  they  are  taken  up  and  replaced  by  spar  or  spar-shaped 
buoys. 

White  buoys  are  used  to  mark  anchorages,  dumping  grounds, 
etc.,  and  when  so  used  are  described  in  the  Coast  Pilot  and  buoy 
list  for  the  district. 

The  use  of  a yellow  buoy  to  mark  a quarantine  station  is  not 
uncommon. 

Q.  1.3.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  terms  “short  blast’"  and 
“prolonged  blast”  of  the  whistle?  Ans.  A short  blast  of  the 
whistle  shall  mean  a blast  of  about  one  second’s  duration. 

A prolonged  blast  of  tlie  whistle  shall  mean  a blast  of  from 
four  to  six  seconds’  duration. 

Q.  14.  What  does  one  “short  blast’’  of  the  whistle  signify? 
-4)is.  Cne  short  blast  of  the  whistle  signifies  intention  of  or 
assent  to  steamer  first  giving  tlie  signal  to  direct  course  to  own 
starboard,  except  when  two  steamers  are  approaching  each  other 
at  right  angles  or  obliquely,  when  it  signifies  intention  of  steamer 
which  is  to  starboard  of  the  other  to  hold  course  and  speed. 


47 


Q.  15.  What  does  two  “short  blasts”  of  the  whistle  signify? 
Ans.  Tivo  short  blasts  of  the  whistle  signify  intention  of  or 
assent  to  steamer  first  giving  the  signal  to  direct  course  to  own 
port,  except  when  two  steamers  are  approaching  each  other  at 
right  angles  or  obliquely,  wlien  the  signal  signifies  desire  of  or 
assent  to  steamer  which  is  to  port  of  the  other  to  cross  the  bow 
of  steamer  to  starboard. 

Q.  16.  What  does  three  “short  blasts”  of  the  whistle  signify? 
A71S.  Three  short  blasts  of  the  whistle  shall  mean,  “My  engines 
are  going  at  full  speed  astern.” 

Q.  17.  Wliat  is  the  danger  signal?  A?),s.  Several  short  and 
rapid  blasts,  not  less  than  four. 

Q.  18.  What  is  meant  by  the  term  “cross  signals”?  Ans.  An- 
swering one  whistle  with  two  and  answering  two  whistles  with 
one. 

Q.  19.  What  wliistle  signals  are  prohibited  by  law?  Ans.  Cross 
signals  and  any  unnecessary  blowing  of  the  whistle. 

Q.  20.  When  are  the  whistle  signals  you  have  described  to  be 
used?  Ans.  Only  when  the  vessels  are  in  sight  of  each  other. 

Q.  21.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  wlien  cither  fails 
to  understand  the  signal,  course  or  intention  of  the  other? 
Ans.  Rule  I.  If.  when  steam  vessels  are  approaching  each  other, 
either  vessel  fails  to  understand  the  course  or  intention  of  the 
other,  from  any  cause,  tlie  vessel  so  in  doubt  sliall  immediately 
signify  the  same  by  giving  several  short  and  rapid  blasts,  not 
less  than  four,  of  the  steam  whistle,  the  dangek  .signal. 

Whenever  the  danger  signal  is  given  the  engines  of  both 
steamers  shall  be  stopped  and  backed  until  the  headway  of  the 


48 


steamers  has  l)een  fully  cheeked;  nor  shall  the  engines  of  either 
steamer  be  again  started  ahead  until  the  steamers  can  safely 
pass  each  other,  and  the  proper  signals  for  j^assing  have  been 
given,  answered,  and  understood. 


Q.  22.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  cross  signals?  Ans.  Rule 
II.  Steam  vessels  are  forbidden  to  use  what  has  become  tech- 
nically known  among  pilots  as  “cross  signals,’'  that  is,  answering 
one  whistle  with  two,  and  answering  two  whistles  with  one.  In 
all  cases,  and  under  all  circumstances,  a pilot  receiving  either 
of  the  whistle  signals  provided  in  the  rules,  which  for  any  reason 
he  deems  injudicious  to  comply  with,  instead  of  answering  it  with 
a cross  signal,  shall  at  once  sound  the  danger  signal  and  observe 
the  rule  applying  thereto  (Rule  I). 

Q.  2.3.  Wliat  are  signals  for  steam  vessels  passing?  Ans. 
Rule  III.  The  signals  for  passing,  by  the  blowing  of  the 
whistle,  shall  be  given  and  answered  by  pilots,  in  compliance 
with  these  rules,  not  only  when  meeting  "head  and  head,'’  or 
nearly  so,  but  at  all  times,  when  the  steam  vessels  are  in  sight 
of  eaeli  other,  when  passing  or  meeting  at  a distance  within 
half  a mile  of  each  other,  and  whether  passing  to  the  starboard 
or  port. 

The  whistle  signals  provided  in  the  rules  for  steam  vessels 
meeting,  passing,  or  overtaking,  are  never  to  be  used  except  when 
steamers  are  in  sight  of  each  other,  and  the  course  and  position 
of  each  can  be  determined  in  the  daytime  by  a sight  of  the  vessel 
itself,  or  by  night  by  seeing  its  signal  lights.  In  fog.  mist, 
falling  snow  or  heavy  rain  storms,  when  vessels  cannot  so  see 
each  other,  fog  signals  only  must  be  given. 

Q.  24.  What  is  the  rule  and  signal  for  steam  vessels  approach- 
ing each  head  and  head,  or  nearly  so?  .4ns.  Rule  IV.  When 
steam  vessels  are  approaching  each  other  head  and  iie.vd. 
that  is.  end  on,  or  ne.arly  so,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  each  to 


49 


pass  on  the  port  side  of  the  other;  and  either  vessel  shall  give, 
as  a signal  of  her  intention,  one  short  and  distinct  blast  of  her 
whistle,  which  the  other  vessel  shall  answer  promptly  by  a 
similar  blast  of  her  whistle,  and  thereupon  such  vessels  shall 
pass  on  the  port  side  of  each  other.  But  if  the  courses  of  such 
vessels  are  so  far  on  the  starboard  of  each  other  as  not  to  be 
considered  as  meeting  head  and  head,  either  vessel  shall  immedi- 
ately give  two  short  and  distinct  blasts  of  her  whistle,  which 
the  other  vessel  shall  answer  promptly  by  two  similar  blasts 
of  her  whistle,  and  they  shall  pass  on  the  starboard  side  of 
each  other. 

The  foregoing  only  applies  to  cases  where  vessels  are  meeting 
end  on  or  nearly  end  on,  in  such  a manner  as  to  involve  risk 
of  collision;  in  other  words,  to  cases  in  which,  by  day,  each 
vessel  sees  the  masts  of  the  other  in  a line,  or  nearly  in  a 
line,  with  her  own,  and  by  night  to  cases  in  which  each  vessel 
is  in  such  a position  as  to  see  both  the  side  lights  of  the  other. 

It  does  not  apply  by  day  to  cases  in  which  a vessel  sees  another 
ahead  crossing  her  own  course,  or  by  night  to  cases  where  the  red 
light  of  one  vessel  is  opposed  to  the  red  light  of  the  other,  or 
where  the  green  light  of  one  vessel  is  oppo^d  to  the  green  light 
of  the  other,  or  where  a red  light  without  a green  light  or  a 
green  light  without  a red  light,  is  seen  ahead,  or  where  both 
green  and  red  lights  are  seen  anywhere  but  ahead. 


Q.  25.  What  is  the  rule  for  a steam  vessel  nearing  a short  bend 
or  curve  in  the  channel  ? Ans.  Rule  V.  Whenever  a steam  vessel 
is  NEARING  A SHORT  BEND  OR  CURVE  IN  THE  CHANNEL,  where,  from 
the  height  of  the  banks  or  other  cause,  a steam  vessel  approach- 
ing from  the  opposite  direction  cannot  be  seen  for  a distance  of 
half  a mile,  such  steam  vessel,  when  she  shall  have  arrived 
within  half  a mile  of  such  curve  or  bend,  shall  give  a signal  by 
one  long  blast  of  the  steam  whistle.,  which  signal  shall  be 
answered  by  a similar  blast,  given  by  any  approaching  steam 
vessel  that  may  be  within  hearing.  Should  such  signal  be  so 


50 


answered  by  a steam  vessel  upon  the  farther  side  of  sucli  bend, 
then  the  usual  signals  for  meeting  and  passing  shall  immediately 
be  given  and  answered ; l)Ut,  if  the  first  alarm  signal  of  such 
vessel  be  not  answered,  she  is  to  consider  the  channel  clear  and 
govern  herself  accordingly. 

Q.  26.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  moving  from  their 
docks  or  berths?  Ans.  Rule  V.  When  steam  vessels  are 
MOVED  FROM  THEIR  DOCKS  OR  BERTHS,  and  other  boats  are  liable 
to  pass  from  any  direction  toward  them,  they  shall  give  the 
same  signal  as  in  the  case  , of  vessels  meeting  at  a bend,  but 
immediately  after  clearing  the  berths  so  as  to  be  fully  in  sight 
they  shall  be  governed  by  the  steering  and  sailing  rules. 

Q.  27.  Wliat  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  running  in  the  same 
direction  ? Ans.  Rule  VI.  When  steam  vessels  .vre  ruxa'ixg 
IN  THE  SAME  DIRECTION,  and  the  vessel  which  is  astern  shall 
desire  to  pass  on  the  right  or  starboard  hand  of  the  vessel  ahead, 
she  shall  give  one  short  blast  of  the  steam  whistle,  as  a signal 
of  such  desire,  and  if  the  vessel  ahead  answers  with  one  blast, 
she  sliall  put  her  helm  to  port;  or  if  she  shall  desire  to  pass 
on  the  left  or  port  side  of  the  vessel  ahead,  she  shall  give  two 
short  blasts  of  the  steam  whistle  as  a signal  of  such  desire,  and  if 
the  vessel  ahead  answers  witli  two  blasts,  shall  put  her  helm  to 
starboard;  or  if  the  vessel  ahead  does  not  think  it  safe  for  the 
vessel  astern  to  attempt  to  pass  at  that  point,  she  shall  imme- 
diately signify  the  same  by  giving  several  short  and  rapid  blasts 
of  the  steam  wliistle,  not  less  than  four,  and  under  no  circum- 
stances shall  the  vessel  astern  attempt  to  pass  the  vessel  ahead 
until  such  time  as  tliey  have  reached  a point  where  it  can  be 
safely  done,  when  said  vessel  ahead  shall  signify  her  willingness 
by  blowing  the  proper  signals.  The  vessel  aliead  shall  in  no 
case  attempt  to  cross  the  bow  or  crowd  upon  the  course  of  the 
passing  vessel. 

Every  vessel  coming  up  with  another  vessel  from  any  direction 


GROVER  C.  BERGDOLL 

51 

more  than  two  points  abaft  her  beam,  that  is,  in  such  a position, 
with  reference  to  the  vessel  which  she  is  overtaking,  that  at  night 
she  would  be  unable  to  see  either  of  that  vessel’s  side  lights, 
shall  be  deemed  to  he  an  overtaking  vessel;  and  no  subsequent 
alteration  of  the  bearing  between  the  two  vessels  shall  make  the 
overtaking  vessel  a crossing  vessel  within  the  meaning  of  these 
rules,  or  relieve  her  of  the  duty  of  keeping  clear  of  the  overtaken 
vessel  until  she  is  finally  past  and  clear. 

As  by  day  the  overtaking  vessel  cannot  always  know  with 
certainty  whether  she  is  forward  of  or  abaft  this  direction  from 
the  other  vessel,  she  should,  if  in  doubt,  assume  that  she  is  an 
overtaking  vessel  and  keep  out  of  the  way. 

Q.  28.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  approaching  each 
other  at  riglit  angles  or  obliquely  wlien  one  is  not  overtaking 
the  other?  Ans.  Rule  VII.  When  two  steam  vessels  are 

APPROACHING  EACH  OTHER  AT  RIGHT  ANGLES  OR  OBLIQUELY  SO  AS 
TO  INVOLVE  RISK  OF  COLLISION,  other  than  when  one  steam  vessel 
is  overtaking  another,  the  steam  vessel  which  has  the  other  on 
her  own  port  side  shall  hold  her  course  and  speed;  and  the  steam 
vessel  which  has  the  other  on  her  own  starboard  side  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  other  by  directing  her  course  to  starboard 
so  as  to  cross  the  stern  of  the  other  steam  vessel,  or,  if  necessary 
to  do  so,  slacken  her  speed  or  stop  or  reverse. 

If  from  any  cause  the  conditions  covered  by  this  situation  are 
such  as  to  prevent  immediate  compliance  with  each  other’s  signals, 
the  misunderstanding  or  objection  shall  be  at  once  made  apparent 
by  blowing  the  danger  signal,  and  both  steam  vessels  sliall  be 
stopped  and  backed  if  necessary,  until  signals  for  passing  with 
safety  are  made  and  understood. 

Q.  29.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  regarding  sailing 
vessels?  Ans.  Rule  VIII.  When  a steam  vessel  and  a sailing 
VESSEL  are  proceeding  in  such  directions  as  to  involve  risk  of 
collision,  the  steam  vessel  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  sailing 
vessel. 


52 


Q.  30.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  one  steamer  crossing  ahead 
of  another  ? Ans.  Rule  IX.  Every  steam  vessel  which  is  directed 
by  these  rules  to  keep  out  of  the  way  of  another  vessel  shall, 
if  the  circumstances  of  the  case  admit,  avoid  crossing  ahead  of 
the  other. 

Q.  31.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  in  narrow  channels? 
Ans.  Rule  X.  In  naurow  channels  every  steam  vessel  shall, 
when  it  is  safe  and  j)racticable,  keep  to  that  side  of  the  fairway 
or  mid-channel  which  lies  on  the  starboard  side  of  such  vessel. 

Q.  32.  When  is  a departure  from  these  rules  permitted?  Ans. 
Rule  XI.  In  obeying  and  construing  these  rules  due  regard 
shall  be  had  to  all  danger, s of  navigation  and  collision,  and 
to  any  special  circumstances  which  may  render  a departure 
from  the  above  rules  necessary  in  order  to  avoid  immediate 
danger. 

Q.  33.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  an  inland  steamer  under 
way?  Ans.  A steam  vessel  under  way,  except  when  towing  other 
vessels  or  being  towed,  sliall  sound,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than 
one  minute,  on  the  whistle  or  siren,  tliree  blasts  in  succession, 
namely,  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  two  short  blasts.  All 
rafts  or  other  water  craft,  not  lierein  provided  for,  navigation  by 
hand  power,  horse  power,  or  by  the  current  of  the  river,  shall 
sound  a blast  of  the  fog-horn,  or  equivalent  signal,  at  intervals 
of  not  more  than  one  minute. 

Q.  34.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  an  inland  steamer  with  a 
tow?  Ans.  A steam  vessel  when  towing  other  vessels  shall  sound, 
at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute,  on  the  whistle  or 
siren,  tliree  blasts  in  succession,  namely,  one  prolonged  blast 
followed  by  two  short  blasts. 

Q.  35.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  a vessel  being  towed  in 


53 


inland  waters?  A ns.  A vessel  towed  may  give,  at  intervals  of 
not  more  than  one  minute,  on  the  fog-liorn,  a signal  of  three 
lilasts  ill  suceession,  namely,  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  two 
short  blasts,  and  she  shall  not  give  any  other. 

Q.  3fj.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  an  ocean  steamer  under 
way?  A ns.  A steam  vessel  having  way  upon  her  shall  sound,  at 
intervals  of  not  more  than  two  minutes,  a prolonged  blast. 

Q.  37.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  an  ocean  steamer  under 
way,  but  stopped,  and  having  no  way  upon  her  ? Ans.  A steam 
vessel  under  way,  but  stopped  and  having  no  way  upon  her,  shall 
sound,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  two  minutes,  two  prolonged 
blasts,  with  an  interval  of  about  one  second  between. 

Q.  38.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  an  ocean  steamer  with  a 
tow?  Ans.  A steam  vessel  with  a tow  shall  sound,  at  intervals  of 
not  more  than  two  minutes,  three  blasts  in  succession,  namely, 
one  prolonged  b'ast  followed  by  two  short  blasts,  and  the  vessel 
towed  may  give  this  signal,  and  she  shall  not  give  any  other. 

Q.  39.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  vessels  at  anchor?  Ans.  A 
vessel  when  at  anchor  shall,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one 
minute,  ring  the  bell  rapidly  for  about  five  seconds. 

Q.  40.  What  is  the  rule  for  steam  vessels  regarding  speed  when 
navigating  in  a fog?  A«s.  Rule  XIII.  Every  steam  vessel  shall, 
in  a fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rain  storms,  go  at  a 
moderate  speed,  having  careful  regard  to  the  existing  circum- 
stances and  conditions. 

A steam  vessel  hearing,  apparently  forward  of  her  beam,  the 
fog  signal  of  a vessel  the  position  of  which  is  not  ascertained, 
shall,  so  far  as  the  circumstances  of  the  case  admit,  stop  her 
engines,  and  then  navigate  with  caution  until  danger  of  collision 


18  over. 


54 


0-  41.  lYhen  are  the  lights  to  be  exhibited?  Ans.  Article  1. 
Tlie  rules  concerning  lights  shall  be  complied  with  in  all  weathers 
from  sunset  to  sunrise,  and  during  such  time  no  other  lights 
which  may  be  mistaken  for  the  prescribed  lights  shall  be 
exhibited. 

Q.  42.  What  is  the  lawful  size  of  the  glass  globes?  Ans.  The 
minimum  size  of  glass  globes  shall  not  be  less  than  0 inches  in 
diameter  and  5 inches  high  in  the  clear. 

Q.  43.  What  are  the  lights  for  an  inland  steamer  under  way, 
and  how  far  are  they  visilde?  Ans.  Art.  2.  A steam  vessel  when 
under  way  shall  carry — (a)  On  or  in  front  of  the  foremast,  or, 
if  a vessel  without  a foremast,  then  in  the  fore  part  of  the  vessel, 
a bright  white  light  so  constructed  as  to  show  an  unbroken  light 
over  an  are  of  the  horizon  of  twenty  points  of  the  compass,  so 
fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  ten  points  on  each  side  of  the  vessel, 
namely,  from  right  ahead  to  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  either 
side,  and  of  such  a character  as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at 
least  five  miles. 

( h ) On  the  starboard  side  a green  light  so  constructed  as  to 
show  an  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points 
of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead 
to  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  starboard  side,  and  of 
such  a character  as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  two 
miles. 

(c)  On  the  port  side  a red  light  so  constructed  as  to  show 
an  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points  of 
the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to 
two  points  abaft  tlie  beam  on  the  port  side,  and  of  such  a char- 
acter as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  two  miles. 

{d)  The  said  green  and  red  side-lights  shall  be  fitted  with 
inboard  screens  projecting  at  least  three  feet  forward  from  the 
light,  so  as  to  prevent  these  lights  from  being  seen  across  the 
bow. 


55 


(e)  A sea-going  steam  vessel  when  under  way  may  carry  an 
additional  white  light  similar  in  construction  to  the  light  men- 
tioned in  subdivision  (a).  These  two  lights  shall  be  so  placed 
in  line  with  the  keel  that  one  shall  be  at  least  fifteen  feet  higher 
than  the  other,  and  in  sucli  a position  with  reference  to  each 
other  that  tlie  lower  light  shall  be  forward  of  the  upper  one. 
The  vertical  distance  between  these  lights  shall  be  less  than  the 
horizontal  distance. 

(/)  All  steam  vessels  (except  sea-going  vessels  and  ferry- 
boats) shall  carry  in  addition  to  green  and  red  lights  required 
by  Article  2 (6),  (c),  and  screens  as  required  by  Article  2 (d), 
a central  range  of  two  white  lights;  the  after-light  being  carried 
at  an  elevation  at  least  fifteen  feet  above  the  light  at  the  head 
of  the  vessel.  Tire  head-light  shall  be  so  constructed  as  to  show 
an  unbroken  light  through  twenty  points  of  the  compass,  namely, 
from  right  ahead  to  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  either  side  of 
the  vessel,  and  the  after-light  so  as  to  show  all  around  the 
liorizon. 


Q.  44.  What  are  the  lights  for  an  inland  steamer  under  way 
with  a tow  and  how  far  are  they  visible?  Ans.  A steam  vessel, 
when  towing  another  vessel,  shall  carry  in  addition  to  her  side 
lights,  on  or  in  front  of  the  foremast,  two  bright  white  lights 
in  a vertical  line,  one  over  the  other,  not  less  than  three  feet 
apart,  and  when  towing  more  than  one  vessel  shall  carry  an 
additional  bright  white  light  three  feet  above  or  below  such 
lights,  if  the  length  of  the  tow  measuring  from  the  stern  of  the 
towing  vessel  to  the  stern  of  the  last  vessel  towed  exceeds  six 
hundred  feet,  each  of  these  lights  shall  be  so  constructed  as  to 
show  an  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  twenty 
points  of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  ten  points  on 
each  side  of  the  vessel,  namely  from  right  ahead  to  two  points 
abaft  the  beam  on  either  side  and  of  such  character  as  to  be  visible 
at  a distance  of  at  least  five  miles,  or  they  shall  be  carried  in 
the  same  position  as  the  after-light,  which  must  not  be  less  than 


of) 


fifteen  feet  above  the  forward  light  and  show  all  around  the 
horizon. 

Such  steam  vessel  may  carry  a small  white  light  abaft  the 
funnel  or  aftermast  for  the  vessel  towed  to  steer  by,  but  such 
light  shall  not  be  visible  forward  of  the  beam. 


Q.  45.  What  are  the  lights  for  an  ocean  steamer  under  way 
with  and  without  a tow?  Ans.  International  Rules,  Art.  2.  A 
st(*am  vessel  when  under  way  shall  carry — (a)  On  or  in  front  of 
the  foremast,  or  if  a vessel  without  a foremast,  then  in  the  fore 
part  of  the  vessel,  at  a height  above  the  hull  of  not  less  than 
twenty  feet,  and  if  the  breadth  of  the  vessel  exceeds  twenty  feet, 
then  at  a height  above  the  hull  not  less  than  such  breadth,  so, 
however,  that  the  light  need  not  be  carried  at  a greater  height 
above  the  hull  than  forty  feet,  a bright  white  light,  so  con- 
structed as  to  show  an  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon 
of  twenty  points  of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light 
ten  points  on  each  side  of  the  vessel,  namely,  from  right  ahead 
to  two  points  abaft  tlie  beam  on  either  side,  and  of  such  a char- 
acter as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  five  miles. 

( h ) On  the  starboard  side  a green  light  so  constructed  as  to 
show  an  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points 
of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to 
two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  starboard  side,  and  of  such  a 
cliaracter  as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  two  miles. 

(c)  On  the  port  side  a red  light  so  constructed  as  to  show  an 
unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points  of  the 
compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to  two 
points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  port  side,  and  of  such  a character 
as  to  he  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  two  miles. 

(d)  The  said  green  and  red  side-lights  shall  he  fitted  with 
inboard  screens  projecting  at  least  three  feet  forward  from  the 
light,  so  as  to  prevent  these  lights  from  being  seen  across  the  bow. 

(e)  A steam  vessel  when  under  way  may  carry  an  additional 
white  light  similar  in  construction  to  the  light  mentioned  in  sub- 


57 


division  (a).  These  two  lights  shall  he  so  placed  in  line  with  the 
keel  that  one  shall  he  at  least  fifteen  feet  higlier  than  the  other, 
and  in  such  a position  witli  reference  to  each  other  that  the  lower 
light  shall  he  forward  of  the  upper  one.  The  vertical  distance 
between  tliese  lights  shall  he  less  than  the. horizontal  distance. 

Art.  3.  A steam  vessel  when  towing  another  vessel  shall,  in 
addition  to  her  side-lights,  carry  two  bright  white  lights  in  a 
vertical  line  one  over  the  other,  not  less  than  six  feet  apart,  and 
when  towing  more  than  one  vessel  shall  carry  an  additional 
bright  white  light  six  feet  above  or  below  such  lights,  if  the 
length  of  the  tow  measuring  from  the  stern  of  the  towing  vessel 
to  the  stern  of  the  last  vessel  towed  exceeds  si.x  hundred  feet. 
Each  of  these  lights  shall  be  of  the  same  construction  and  char- 
acter, and  shall  l)e  carried  in  the  same,  position  as  the  white  light 
mentioned  in  Article  2 (a),  e.xcepting  the  additional  light,  which 
may  be  carried  at  a height  of  not  less  than  fourteen  feet  above 
the  hull. 

Such  steam  vessel  may  carry  a small  white  light  abaft  the 
funnel  or  aftermast  for  the  vessel  towed  to  steer  by,  but  such 
light  shall  not  he  visible  forward  of  the  beam. 

Q.  46.  What  are  the  lights  for  a sailing  vessel  under  way  or 
being  towed?  Ans.  Art.  5.  A sailing  vessel  under  way  or  being 
towed  shall  carry  the  same  lights  as  are  prescribed  by  Article  2 
for  a steam  vessel  under  way,  with  the  exception  of  the  vdiite 
lights  mentioned  therein,  which  they  shall  never  carry. 

Q.  47.  What  are  the  lights  for  ferryboats  and  how  far  are  they 
visible?  Ans.  Ferryboats  propelled  by  machinery  and  navigating 
the  harbors,  rivers,  and  other  inland  waters  of  the  United  States, 
except  the  Great  Lakes  and  their  connecting  and  tributary  waters 
as  far  east  as  Montreal  and  the  Red  River  of  the  North  and 
rivers  emptying  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  their  tributaries, 
shall  carry  the  range  lights  and  the  colored  side-lights  required 
by  law  to  be  carried  on  steam  vessels  navigating  those  waters. 


except  that  douhle-end  ferryhoats  shall  carry  a central  range  of 
clear,  bright,  white  lights,  showing  all  around  the  horizon,  placed 
at  equal  altitudes  forward  and  aft,  also  on  the  starboard  side 
a green  light,  and  on  the  port  side  a red  light,  ol  such  a char- 
acter as  to  he  visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere 
at  a distance  of  at  least  2 miles,  and  so  constructed  as  to  show 
a uniform  and  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  10 
points  of  the  compass,  and  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from 
right  ahead  to  2 points  abaft  the  beam  on  their  respective  sides. 

The  green  and  red  lights  shall  be  fitted  with  inboard  screens 
projecting  at  least  3 feet  forward  from  the  light,  so  as  to  pre- 
vent them  from  being  seen  across  the  bow. 

Local  inspectors  in  districts  having  ferryboats  shall,  whenever 
the  safety  of  navigation  may  reejuire,  designate  for  each  line  of 
such  boats  a certain  light,  white  or  colored,  which  shall  show  all 
around  the  horizon,  to  designate  and  distinguish  such  lines  from 
each  other,  which  light  shall  be  carried  on  a flagstaff  amidships, 
15  feet  above  the  white  range  lights. 

Q.  48.  What  are  the  lights  for  canal  boats  and  barges? 
Ans.  All  nondescript  vessels  known  as  scows,  car  floats,  lighters, 
and  vessels  of  similar  type,  navigating  the  waters  referred  to  in 
the  following  rules,  shall  carry  the  lights  required  to  be  carried 
liy  barges  and  canal  boats  in  tow  of  steam  vessels,  as  prescribed 
in  such  rules. 

Barges  and  canal  boats,  when  being  towed  by  steam  vessels  on 
the  waters  of  the  Hudson  River  and  its  tributaries  from  Troy  to 
the  boundary  lines  of  Xew  York  Harbor  off  Sandy  Hook,  as 
defined  pursuant  to  section  2 of  the  act  of  Congress  of  February 
in,  1895,  the  East  River,  and  Long  Island  Sound  (and  the  waters 
entering  thereon,  and  to  the  Atlantic  Ocean),  to  and  including 
Narragansett  Bay,  R.  I.,  and  tributaries,  and  Lake  Champlain, 
shall  carry  lights  as  follows: 

Barges  and  canal  boats  being  towed  astern  of  steam  vessels, 
when  towed  singly  or  what  is  known  as  tandem  towing,  shall  each 
carry  a white  light  on  the  bow'  and  a white  light  on  the  stern. 


50 


except  that  the  last  vessel  of  such  tow  shall  carry  two  white 
lights  on  her  stern,  athwartship,  horizontal  to  each  other,  not  less 
than  5 feet  apart,  and  not  less  than  4 feet  above  the  deck  house, 
and  so  placed  as  to  show  all  around  the  horizon:  Provided,  Tliat 
sea-going  barges  shall  not  he  required  to  make  any  change  in  their 
sea-going  lights  (red  and  green)  on  waters  coming  within  the 
scope  of  these  rules,  except  that  the  last  vessel  of  the  tow  shall 
carry  two  white  lights  on  her  stern,  athwartship,  horizontal  to 
each  other,  not  less  than  5 feet  apart,  and  not  less  than  4 feet 
above  the  deck  house,  and  so  placed  as  to  show  all  around  the 
horizon. 

Barges  and  canal  boats,  when  towed  at  a hawser  two  or  more 
abreast,  when  in  one  tier,  shall  carry  a white  light  on  the  bow 
and  a white  light  on  the  stern  of  each  of  the  outside  boats; 
when  in  more  than  one  tier,  each  of  the  outside  boats  shall  carry 
a white  light  on  its  bow;  and  the  outside  boats  in  the  last  tier 
shall  each  carry,  in  addition,  a white  light  on  the  outer  afterpart 
of  the  stern. 

Barges  or  canal  boats  towed  alongside  a steam  vessel,  if  on  the 
starboard  side  of  said  steam  vessel,  shall  display  a white  light  on 
her  own  starboard  bow ; and  if  on  the  port  side  of  said  steam 
vessel  shall  display  a white  light  on  her  own  port  bow ; and  if 
there  is  more  than  one  barge  or  canal  boat  alongside,  the  white 
lights  shall  be  displayed  from  the  outboard  side  of  the  outside 
barge  or  canal  boat:  Provided,  That  barges  known  as  car  floats 
when  towed  alongside  shall  have  a white  light  at  each  outboard 
corner  of  said  barge. 

When  barges  or  canal  boats  are  massed  in  tiers  and  towed  at  a 
hawser,  as  is  usual  on  the  Hudson  River,  there  shall  be  carried  on 
the  forward  port  side  of  the  port  boat  of  each  tier  a white  light, 
and  on  the  forvvard  starboard  side  of  the  starboard  boat  in  each 
tier  a white  light,  and  on  the  after  port  side  of  the  port  boat  in 
the  stern  tier  a white  light,  and  on  the  after  starboard  side  of  the 
starboard  boat  in  the  stern  tier  a white  light. 

The  white  how  lights  for  barges  and  canal  boats  referred  to  in 
the  preceding  rules  shall  be  carried  at  least  10  feet  and  not  more 


60 


than  30  feet  abaft  the  stem  or  extreme  forward  end  of  the  vessel. 
On  barges  and  canal  boats  required  to  carry  a white  how  light, 
the  white  light  on  bow  and  the  white  light  on  stern  shall  each  be 
so  placed  above  the  hull  or  deck  house  as  to  show  an  unbroken 
light  all  around  the  horizon,  and  of  such  a character  as  to  be 
visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere  at  a distance  of 
at  least  5 miles. 

Provided,  That  nothing  in  these  rules  shall  be  construed  as  com- 
pelling barges  or  canal  boats  in  tow  of  steam  vessels,  passing 
through  any  waters  coining  within  the  scope  of  these  rules  where 
lights  for  barges  or  canal  boats  are  different  from  those  of  the 
waters  whereon  such  vessels  are  usually  employed,  to  change 
their  lights  from  those  required  on  the  waters  from  which  their 
trip  begins  or  terminates;  but  should  such  vessels  engage  in  local 
employment  on  waters  requiring  different  lights  from  those  where 
they  are  customarily  employed,  they  shall  comply  with  the  local 
rules  where  employed. 

Q.  49.  What  are  the  lights  for  scows  being  towed?  Ans.  Scows 
when  being  towed  by  steam  vessels  on  the  waters  covered  by 
the  first  paragraph  of  these  rules  shall  carry  a white  light  at  each 
end  of  each  scow,  except  that  when  such  scows  are  massed  in  tiers, 
two  or  more  abreast,  each  of  the  outside  scows  shall  carry  a white 
light  on  its  outer  bow,  and  the  outside  scows  in  the  last  tier  shall 
each  carry,  in  addition,  a white  light  on  the  outer  part  of  the 
stern.  The  white  light  shall  he  carried  not  less  than  8 feet  above 
the  surface  of  the  water,  and  shall  be  so  placed  as  to  show  an 
unbroken  light  all  around  the  horizon,  and  shall  be  of  such  a 
character  as  to  be  visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere 
at  a distance  of  at  least  5 miles. 

Q.  50.  When  and  by  what  class  of  vessels  can  portable  side 
lights  be  used?  ffws.  Art.  6.  Whenever,  as  in  the  case  of  vessels 
of  less  than  ten  gross  tons  under  way  during  bad  weather,  the 
green  and  red  side-lights  cannot  be  fi.xed,  these  lights  shall  be 
kept  at  hand,  lighted  and  ready  for  use;  and  shall,  on  the 
approach  of  or  to  other  vessels,  be  exliibited  on  their  respective 


Cl 


sides  in  sufficient  time  to  prevent  collision,  in  such  manner  as 
to  make  them  most  visible,  and  so  that  the  green  light  shall  not 
be  seen  on  the  port  side  nor  the  red  light  on  the  starboard  side, 
nor,  if  practicable,  more  than  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on 
their  respective  sides.  To  make  the  use  of  these  portable  lights 
more  certain  and  easy,  the  lanterns  containing  them  shall  each 
he  painted  outside  with  the  color  of  the  light  they  respectively 
contain,  and  shall  be  provided  with  proper  screens. 

A pilot-vessel  of  such  a class  as  to  be  obliged  to  go  alongside 
of  a vessel  to  put  a pilot  on  board  may,  instead  of  the  colored 
lights  above  mentioned,  have  at  hand,  ready  for  use,  a lantern 
with  a green  glass  on  the  one  side  and  a red  glass  on  the  other, 
to  be  used  as  prescribed  above. 

Q.  51.  What  is  the  light  for  a rowing  boat?  Ans.  Art.  7. 
Rowing  boats,  whether  under  oars  or  sail,  shall  have  ready  at 
hand  a lantern  showing  a white  light,  which  shall  be  temporarily 
exhibited  in  sufficient  time  to  prevent  collision. 

Q.  52.  What  are  lights  for  a pilot  boat?  Ans.  Art.  8.  Pilot 
vessels  when  engaged  on  their  station  on  pilotage  duty  shall 
not  show  the  lights  required  for  other  vessels,  but  shall  carry 
a white  light  at  the  masthead,  visible  all  around  the  horizon, 
and  shall  also  exhibit  a flare-up  light  or  flare-up  lights  at  short 
intervals,  which  shall  never  exceed  fifteen  minutes. 

On  the  near  approach  of  or  to  other  vessels  they  shall  have 
their  side-lights  lighted,  ready  for  use,  and  shall  flasli  or  show 
them  at  short  intervals,  to  indicate  the  direction  in  which  they 
are  heading,  but  the  green  light  shall  not  be  shown  on  the  port 
side  nor  the  rod  light  on  the  starboard  side. 

A pilot  vessel  of  such  a class  as  to  be  obliged  to  go  alongside 
of  a vessel  to  put  a pilot  on  board  may  show  the  white  light 
instead  of  carrying  it  at  the  masthead,  and  may,  instead  of  the 
colored  lights  above  mentioned,  have  at  hand,  ready  for  use,  a 
lantern  with  a green  glass  on  the  one  side  and  a red  glass  on 
the  other,  to  be  used  as  prescribed  above. 


62 


Pilot  vessels,  when  not  engaged  on  their  station  on  pilotage 
duty,  shall  carry  lights  similar  to  those  of  other  vessels  of  their 
tonnage. 

A steam  pilot  vessel,  when  engaged  on  her  station  on  pilotage 
duty  and  in  waters  of  the  United  States,  and  not  at  anchor,  shall, 
in  addition  to  the  lights  required  for  all  pilot  boats,  carry  at  a 
distance  of  eight  feet  below  her  white  masthead  light  a red  light, 
visible  all  around  the  horizon  and  of  such  a character  as  to  be 
visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere  at  a distance 
of  at  least  two  miles,  and  also  the  colored  side-lights  required 
to  be  carried  by  vessels  when  under  way. 

When  engaged  on  her  station  on  pilotage  duty  and  in  waters 
of  the  United  States,  and  at  anchor,  she  shall  carry  in  addition 
to  the  lights  required  for  all  pilot  boats  the  red  light  above 
mentioned,  but  not  the  colored  side-lights. 

When  not  engaged  on  her  station  on  pilotage  duty,  she  shall 
carry  the  same  lights  as  other  steam  vessels. 

Q.  53.  What  are  the  lights  for  vessels  fishing,  trawling  or 
dredging?  Ans.  Art.  0.  (a)  Fishing-vessels  of  less  than  ten 
gross  tons,  when  under  way  and  when  not  having  their  nets, 
trawls,  dredges,  or  lines  in  the  water,  shall  not  be  obliged  to  carry 
tlie  colored  side-lights ; but  every  such  vessel  shall,  in  lieu  thereof, 
liave  ready  at  hand  a lan.tern  witli  a green  glass  on  one  side  and 
a red  glass  on  the  other  side,  and  on  approaching  to  or  being 
approached  by  another  vessel  sucli  lantern  shall  be  exhibited  in 
sufficient  time  to  prevent  collision,  so  that  the  green  light  shall 
not  be  seen  on  tlie  port  side  nor  the  red  light  on  the  starboard 
side. 

(b)  All  fishing-vessels  and  fishing-boats  of  ten  gross  tons  or 
upward,  when  under  way  and  when  not  having  their  nets,  trawls, 
dredges,  or  lines  in  the  water,  shall  carry  and  show  the  same  lights 
as  other  vessels  under  way. 

(c)  All  vessels,  when  trawling,  dredging,  or  fishing  with  any 
kind  of  drag-nets  or  lines,  shall  exhit)it.  from  some  part  of  the 
vessel  where  they  can  be  best  seen,  two  lights.  One  of  these  lights 


63 


shall  be  red  and  the  other  shall  be  white.  The  red  light  shall  be 
above  the  white  light,  and  shall  be  at  a vertical  distance  from  it 
of  not  less  than  six  feet  and  not  more  than  twelve  feet ; and  the 
horizontal  distance  between  them,  if  any.  shall  not  be  more  than 
ten  feet.  Tliese  two  lights  shall  be  of  sucb  a character  and  con- 
tained in  lanterns  of  such  construction  as  to  be  visible  all  around 
the  horizon,  the  white  light  a distance  of  not  less  than  three  miles 
and  the  red  light  of  not  less  than  two  miles. 

Q.  54.  What  additional  light  shall  an  overtaken  vessel  show? 
Ans.  Art.  10.  A vessel  which  is  being  overtaken  by  another, 
except  a steam  vessel  with  an  after  range-light  showing  all  around 
the  horizon,  shall  show  from  her  stern  to  such  last-mentioned 
vessel  a white  light  or  a flare-up  light. 


Q.  55.  What  are  the  lights  for  vessels  at  anchor?  Ans.  Art.  11. 
A vessel  under  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  in  length  when  at 
anchor  shall  carry  forward,  where  it  can  best  be  seen,  but  at  a 
height  not  exceeding  twenty  feet  above  the  hull,  a white  light, 
in  a lantern  so  constructed  as  to  show  a clear,  uniform,  and 
unbroken  light  visible  all  around  the  horizon  at  a distance  of 
at  least  one  mile. 

A vessel  of  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  or  upwards  in  length 
when  at  anchor  shall  carry  in  the  forw'ard  part  of  the  vessel, 
at  a height  of  not  less  than  twenty  and  not  exceeding  forty 
feet  above  the  hull,  one  such  light,  and  at  or  near  the  stern 
of  the  vessel,  and  at  such  a height  that  it  shall  be  not  less  than 
fifteen  feet  lower  than  the  forward  light,  another  such  light. 

Tlie  length  of  a vessel  shall  be  deemed  to  be  the  length  appear- 
ing in  her  certificate  of  registry. 

Q.  56.  What  signals  may  a vessel  use  in  addition  to  her  lights 
when  necessary?  A«s.  Art.  12.  Every  vessel  may,  if  necessary, 
in  order  to  attract  attention,  in  addition  to  the  lights  which  she 
is  by  these  rules  required  to  carry,  show  a flare-up  light  or  use 


64 


any  detonating  signal  that  cannot  be  mistaken  for  a distress 

signal. 

Q.  57.  What  are  the  signals  for  a vessel  not  under  command? 
Ans.  A vessel  which  from  any  accident  is  not  under  command 
shall  carry  at  the  same  height  as  a white  light  mentioned  in 
Article  2 (a),  where  they  can  best  be  seen,  and  if  a steam  vessel 
in  lieu  of  that  light  two  red  lights,  in  a vertical  line  one  over 
the  other,  not  less  than  six  feet  apart,  and  of  such  a character 
as  to  be  visible  all  around  the  horizon  at  a distance  of  at  least 
two  miles ; and  shall  by  day  carry  in  a vertical  line  one  over  the 
other,  not  less  than  six  feet  apart,  where  they  can  best  be  seen, 
two  black  halls  or  shapes,  each  two  feet  in  diameter.  Fog  signal, 
one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  tw'o  short  blasts  at  intervals  of 
two  minutes. 

Q.  58.  Wliat  is  the  rule  for  signals  to  be  displayed  by  a towing 
vessel  when  towing  a submerged  or  partly  submerged  object  upon 
a hawser,  when  no  signals  are  displayed  upon  the  object  which  is 
towed?  A»s.  The  vessel  having  the  submerged  object  in  tow  shall 
display  by  day,  where  they  can  best  be  seen,  two  shapes,  one  above 
the  other,  not  less  than  6 feet  apart,  the  lower  shape  to  be  carried 
not  less  than  10  feet  above  the  deck  houses.  Tire  shapes  shall  be 
in  the  form  of  a double  frustum  of  a cone,  base  to  l.ase.  not  less 
than  2 feet  in  diameter  at  the  center  nor  less  than  8 inches  at  the 
ends  of  the  cones,  and  to  be  not  less  than  4 feet  lengthwise  from 
end  to  end,  the  upper  shape  to  be  painted  in  alternate  horizontal 
stripes  of  black  and  white,  8 inches  in  width,  and  the  lower  shape 
to  he  painted  a solid  bright  red. 

By  night  the  towing  vessel  shall  display  the  regular  side-lights, 
but  in  lieu  of  the  regular  white  towing  lights  shall  display  four 
lights  in  a vertical  position  not  less  than  .3  feet  nor  more  than  6 
feet  apart,  the  upper  and  lower  of  such  lights  to  be  white,  and 
the  two  middle  lights  to  be  red.  all  of  such  lights  to  be  of  the 
same  character  as  is  now  prescribed  for  the  regular  towing  lights. 


65 


Q.  59.  What  is  the  rule  for  steamers,  derrick  boats,  lighters,  or 
other  types  of  vessels  made  fast  alongside  a wreck,  or  moored 
over  a wreck  which  is  on  the  bottom  or  partly  submerged,  or 
which  may  be  drifting?  Ans.  Steamers,  derrick  boats,  lighters, 
or  other  types  of  vessels  made  fast  alongside  a wreck,  or  moored 
over  a wreck  which  is  on  the  bottom  or  partly  submerged,  or 
which  may  be  drifting,  shall  display  by  day  two  shapes  of  the 
same  cliaracter  and  dimensions  and  displayed  in  the  same  manner 
as  required  by  the  foregoing  rule,  except  that  both  the  shapes 
shall  be  painted  a solid  bright  red,  but  where  more  than  one 
vessel  is  working  under  the  above  conditions,  the  shapes  need  be 
displayed  only  from  one  vessel  on  each  side  of  the  wreck  from 
which  it  can  best  be  seen  from  all  directions. 

By  night  this  situation  shall  be  indicated  by  the  display  of  a 
white  light  from  the  bow  and  stern  of  each  outside  vessel  or 
lighter  not  less  than  6 feet  above  the  deck,  and  in  addition  thereto 
there  sliall  be  displayed  in  a position  where  they  may  l)est  be 
seen  from  all  directions  two  red  lights  carried  in  a vertical  line 
not  less  than  3 feet  nor  more  than  6 feet  apart,  and  not  less 
than  15  feet  above  tlie  deck. 

Q.  60.  What  is  the  rule  for  dredges  which  are  held  in  stationary 
position  by  moorings  or  spuds?  Ans.  Dredges  which  are  held  in 
stationary  position  by  moorings  or  spuds  shall  display  by  day  two 
red  balls  not  less  than  2 feet  in  diameter  and  carried  in  a vertical 
line  not  less  than  3 feet  nor  more  than  6 feet  apart,  and  at  least 
15  feet  above  the  deck  house  and  in  such  a position  where  they 
can  best  be  seen  from  all  directions.  By  night  they  shall  display 
a white  light  at  each  corner,  not  less  than  6 feet  above  the  deck, 
and  in  addition  thereto  there  shall  be  displayed  in  a position 
where  they  may  best  be  seen  from  all  directions  two  red  lights 
carried  in  a vertical  line  not  less  than  3 feet  nor  more  than  6 feet 
apart,  and  not  less  than  15  feet  above  the  deck.  When  scows  are 
moored  alongside  a dredge  in  the  foregoing  situation  they  shall 
display  a white  light  on  each  outboard  corner,  not  less  than  6 
feet  above  the  deck. 


66 


Q.  61.  What  is  the  nile  for  self-propelling  suction  dredges 
under  way  with  their  suctions  on  the  bottom?  Ans.  Self- 
propelling  suction  dredges  under  way  with  their  suction  on  the 
bottom  shall  display  by  day  the  same  signals  as  are  used  to 
designate  any  steamer  not  under  control;  that  is  to  say,  two  black 
balls  not  less  than  2 feet  in  diameter  and  carried  not  less  than 
1.5  feet  above  the  deck  house,  and  where  they  may  best  be  seen 
from  all  directions. 

By  night  they  shall  carry,  in  addition  to  the  regular  running 
lights,  two  red  lights  of  tlie  same  character  as  the  masthead  light, 
in  tlie  same  vertical  plane  and  underneath  the  masthead  light,  the 
red  lights  to  be  not  less  than  3 feet  nor  more  than  6 feet  apart 
and  the  upper  red  light  to  be  not  less  than  4 feet  and  not  more 
than  6 feet  below  the  white  masthead  light,  and  on  or  near  the 
stern  two  red  lights  in  the  same  vertical  jjlane  not  less  than  4 
feet  nor  more  than  6 feet  apart,  to  show  through  4 points  of  the 
compass;  that  is,  from  right  astern  to  2 points  on  each  quarter. 

Q.  62.  What  is  the  rule  for  vessels  which  are  moored  or 
anchored  and  engaged  in  laying  pipe  or  operating  on  submarine 
construction  or  excavation?  Ans.  Vessels  which  are  moored  or 
anchored,  and  engaged  in  laying  pipe  or  operating  on  submarine 
construction  or  excavation  shall  display  by  day.  not  less  than  15 
feet  above  the  deck,  where  they  can  best  be  seen  from  all  direc- 
tions, two  balls  not  less  than  2 feet  in  diameter,  in  a vertical 
line  not  less  than  3 feet  and  not  more  than  6 feet  apart,  the 
upper  ball  to  be  painted  in  alternate  black  and  white  vertical 
stripes  6 inches  wide,  and  the  lower  ball  to  be  painted  a solid 
bright  red.  By  night  they  shall  display  three  red  lights,  carried 
in  a vertical  line  not  less  than  3 feet  nor  more  than  6 feet  apart 
and  not  less  than  15  feet  above  the  deck,  and  in  such  position  as 
may  best  be  seen  from  all  directions. 

All  the  lights  req^iired  by  tliese  special  rules  for  dredges,  wreck- 
ing boats,  lighters,  etc.,  shall  be  of  such  size  and  character  as  to  be 
visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere  for  a distance  of 
at  least  2 miles. 


67 


Q.  63.  What  are  the  rules  for  lights  for  rafts  and  other  water 
craft  navigating  by  hand  power,  horsepower,  or  by  the  current  of 
the  river?  Ans.  Any  vessel,  except  rafts  and  rowing  boats  under 
oars,  navigating  by  hand  poice}-,  horsepoicer,  or  hy  the  current  of 
the  river,  shall  carry  one  white  light  forward,  not  less  than  8 feet 
above  the  surface  of  the  water. 

Rafts  propelled  by  hand  power  or  by  the  current  of  the  river,  or 
which  shall  be  ancliored  or  moored  in  or  near  a channel  or  fair- 
way, shall  carry  white  lights,  as  follows: 

Eafts  of  one  crib  and  not  more  than  two  in  length  shall  carry 
one  wliite  light.  Eafts  of  three  or  more  cribs  in  length  and  one 
crib  in  width  shall  carry  one  white  light  at  each  end  of  the  raft. 
Eafts  of  more  tlian  one  crib  abreast  shall  carry  one  white  light  on 
each  outside  corner  of  the  raft,  making  four  lights  in  all. 

The  U'hite  light  required  by  these  rules  for  rafts  and  other 
water  craft  shall  be  carried,  from  sunset  to  sunrise,  in  a lantern 
so  fixed  and  constructed  as  to  show  a clear,  uniform,  and  un- 
broken light,  visible  all  around  the  horizon,  and  of  such  intensity 
as  to  be  visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere  at  a 
distance  of  at  least  1 mile.  Tlie  lights  for  rafts  shall  be  suspended 
from  poles  of  such  height  that  the  lights  shall  not  be  less  than  8 
feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water. 

Q.  64.  What  are  the  fog  signals  for  a sailing  vessel  under  way  ? 
Ans.  A sailing  vessel  under  way  shall  sound,  at  intervals  of 
not  more  than  one  minute,  when  on  the  starboard  tack,  one  blast ; 
when  on  the  port  tack,  two  blasts  in  succession,  and  when  with 
the  wind  abaft  the  beam,  three  blasts  in  succession. 

Q.  65.  How  would  you  know  if  a sailing  vessel  ns  on  the  star- 
board or  port  tack?  Ans.  Wind  on  the  starboard  side,  vessel 
is  on  the  starboard  tack.  Wind  on  the  port  side,  vessel  is  on 
the  port  tack. 

Q.  66.  What  are  the  rules  for  sailing  vessels  under  way?  Ans. 
Art.  17.  When  two  sailing  vessels  are  approaching  one  another, 


68 


so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  one  of  them  shall  keep  out  of 
the  way  of  the  other  as  follows,  namely: 

(а)  A vessel  wliich  is  running  free  shall  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  a vessel  wliich  is  close-hauled. 

(б)  A vessel  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  port  tack  shall  keep 
out  of  the  Way  of  a vessel  wliich  is  close-hauled  on  the  star- 
board tack. 

(c)  When  both  are  running  free,  with  the  wind  on  different 
sides,  the  vessel  which  has  the  wind  on  the  port  side  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

(d)  When  both  are  running  free,  with  the  wind  on  the  same 
side,  the  vessel  which  is  to  the  windward  shall  keep  out  of  the 
way  of  the  vessel  which  is  to  the  leeward. 

(e)  A vessel  which  has  the  wind  aft  shall  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  the  other  vessel. 

Q.  67.  What  are  the  distress  signals?  Ams.  Art.  31.  When  a 
vessel  is  in  distress  and  requires  assistance  from  other  vessels 
or  from  the  shore,  the  following  shall  be  the  signals  to  be  used 
or  displayed  by  her,  either  together  or  separately,  namely: 

IN  THE  DAYTIME 

A continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus,  or  firing 
a gun. 


AT  NIGHT 

First.  Flames  on  the  vessel  as  from  a burning  tar  barrel,  oil 
barrel,  and  so  forth. 

Second.  A continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus, 
or  firing  a gun. 


60 


Q.  68. 

Name 

the 

points 

of  the 

compass. 

A«s. 

N. 

to 

E. 

N. 

to 

W. 

s. 

to 

E. 

S. 

to 

W. 

N. 

N. 

s. 

S. 

N. 

E. 

N. 

by 

W. 

s. 

by 

E. 

s. 

by 

W. 

N". 

N. 

E. 

N. 

N. 

W. 

s. 

s. 

E. 

s. 

s. 

W. 

N. 

E. 

ijy 

N. 

N. 

W. 

by 

N. 

s. 

E. 

by 

S. 

s. 

w. 

by  S. 

N. 

E. 

N. 

w. 

s. 

E. 

s. 

w. 

y. 

E. 

hy 

E. 

N. 

w. 

by 

W. 

s. 

E. 

by 

E. 

s. 

w. 

by  W. 

E. 

N. 

E. 

W. 

N.' 

■ W. 

E. 

S. 

E. 

w. 

s. 

E. 

N. 

W. 

by 

N. 

E. 

by 

S. 

w. 

by 

s. 

E. 

w. 

E. 

w. 

Q.  69.  What  are  tlie  chief  essentials  that  make  an  efficient 
compass?  Ans.  It  should  have  one  or  more  light  needles  of  strong 
directive  force,  the  magnetic  axis  of  which  must  be  parallel  to  the 
north  and  south  points  of  the  card.  The  pivot  should  be  hard  and 
sharp.  The  cap  is  fitted  with  a finely  finished  agate  or  ruby  that 
the  card  will  be  subjected  to  the  least  possible  friction.  The  bowl 
is  made  of  some  non-magnetic  substance.  The  complete  compass  is 
swung  in  gimbals.  The  edge  of  the  card  is  divided  into  4 quad- 
rants, each  of  which  are  divided  into  8 points,  making  a total 
of  32  points,  whicli  are  subdivided  to  Vi  and  % points.  Tlie 
edge  of  the  card  is  also  divided  into  360°,  which  are  counted  from 
0°  at  north  and  south  to  90°  toward  east  and  west.  On  some 
compasses  the  degrees  are  counted  from  0°  at  nortli  by  way  of 
east,  south  and  west  to  360°  at  north.  This  style  is  now  used  on 
the  latest  charts.  On  the  inside  of  the  bowl  one  or  more  lubber's 
points  are  painted,  usually  four. 

Q.  70.  State  the  chief  points  to  be  considered  when  select- 
ing a place  for  your  compass  on  board  ship  and  what  must  be 
particularly  guarded  against?  Ans.  It  should  be  placed  in  the 
middle  line  of  the  vessel  at  a height  suitable  for  observations  and 
of  easy  access,  and  as  far  as  possible  from  any  considerable  mass 
of  iron  or  steel.  Vertical  and  movable  iron  or  steel  must  be  par- 
ticularly guarded  against. 


70 


Q.  71.  Describe  how  you  would  stow  a compass  when  out 
of  use  and  why?  Ans.  A compass  should  he  stowed  awaj'  bottom 
up  to  prevent  wear  of  the  pivot  and  agate. 

Q.  72.  What  is  leeway?  Ans.  Leeway  is  the  angle  between 
the  compass  course  and  the  direction  the  ship  makes  through  the 
water. 

Q.  73.  What  is  compass  error  ? Ans.  The  difference  between  the 
ship’s  compass  and  the  true  compass.  It  includes  the  deviation. 

Q.  74.  What  is  variation  of  the  compass  and  how  do  you 
find  it?  Ans.  The  difference  between  the  true  and  magnetic 
compasses.  It  is  found  on  the  chart. 

Q.  75.  What  is  deviation  of  the  compass?  Ans.  Tlie  difference 
between  the  ship’s  compass  and  the  magnetic  compass  or  the 
difference  between  the  compass  error  and  variation. 

Q.  76.  Wliat  is  lieeling  error  of  the  compass?  Ans.  It  is 
the  difference  between  the  deviation  when  the  ship  is  upright  and 
when  she  is  heeled. 

Q.  77.  What  is  a time  bearing?  A«s.  A bearing  free  of  varia- 
tion and  deviation. 

Q.  78.  What  is  a compass  bearing?  Ans.  A bearing  by  compass. 
It  includes  the  variation  and  deviation  and  heeling  error  if  any. 

Q.  79.  What  is  a magnetic  bearing?  Ans.  A bearing  including 
the  variation. 

Q.  80.  What  is  a compass  course?  Ans.  The  course  steered 
by  compass.  It  includes  the  variation  and  deviation,  heeling  error, 
current  and  leeway  if  any. 


71 


Q.  81.  What  is  a true  course?  Arts.  A course  corrected  for 
\-ariation,  deviation,  heeling  error,  leeway  and  current  if  any. 

Q.  82.  How  can  you  find  the  deviation  of  the  compass  by  use 
of  the  azimuth  tables?  .4ns.  Observe  the  compass  bearing  of 
the  body  and  take  the  true  bearing  from  azimuth  tables  corre- 
sponding to  the  local  apparent  time  and  declination,  noting  if 
the  latitude  and  declination  are  of  same  or  different  name.  The 
remainder  of  the  work  is  the  same  as  by  altitude  azimuths. 

Q.  83.  How  can  you  find  the  deviation  of  tlie  compass  by 
reciprocal  bearings?  Ans.  One  observer  is  ashore  with  a second 
compass  where  it  is  not  influenced  by  iron,  etc.,  and  can  be  seen 
from  the  ship.  The  ship  is  then  swung  to  each  point  of  the  com- 
pass and  bearings  by  both  compasses  taken  at  the  same  instant  by 
signal;  The  difference  between  the  bearings  by  the  shore  com- 
pass reversed  and  the  ship’s  compass  will  be  the  deviations  for 
the  points  on  which  the  ship’s  head  was  at  the  time  of  the  bear- 
ings. Instead  of  taking  a compass  ashore  a pelorus  may  be  used 
by  having  the  time  and  azimuth  tables  and  by  their  use  the 
pelorus  may  be  set  to  correspond  with  the  magnetic  compass. 
Tliis  is  the  better  method,  as  the  danger  of  the  shore  compass 
having  deviation  is  eliminated. 

y.  84.  How  can  you  find  the  deviation  of  the  compass  while 
sailing  along  a coast?  Ans.  Take  the  compass  bearing  of  any 
two  known  objects  when  in  range.  The  difference  between  the 
magnetic  bearing  as  found  by  the  chart  and  the  compass  bearing 
will  be  the  deviation. 

y.  85.  Name  some  of  the  objects  by  which  you  could  obtain 
the  deviation  of  the  compass  while  sailing  along  a coast  on  which 
you  are  acquainted?  Ans.  Any  of  the  many  ranges  for  entering 
harbors. 

Q.  86.  To  construct  a deviation  table  is  it  necessary  to  bring  the 
ship’s  head  to  more  than  one  point  and  if  so,  state  the  reason? 


72 


Ans.  It  Is,  because  tlie  deviation  is  diflferent  for  every  point  of 
the  coni])ass. 

87.  When  swinging  sliip  to  construct  a deviation  table, 
wliat  is  the  least  number  of  points  to  which  the  sliip's  head 
should  be  brought?  Ans,  Eight  equidistant  points. 

Q.  88.  How  often  would  you  test  the  deviation  table?  Ans. 
As  often  as  may  be  convenient  or  at  least  twice  each  watch  and 
every  time  the  course  is  changed  if  possible  and  when  on  any 
known  bearings  or  ranges.  Also  swing  the  ship  before  entering 
a port  and  after  leaving  on  at  least  the  course  intended  to  be 
used. 

Q.  89.  Having  found  the  deviation  of  the  compass,  how  would 
you  know  if  it  is  east  or  west?  Ans.  If  the  magnetic  bear- 
ing is  to  the  right  of  the  compass  bearing,  the  deviation  is  east. 
To  tlie  left  it  is  west.  If  the  true  bearing  is  to  the  right  of  the 
compass  liearing  the  compass  error  is  east.  To  tlie  left  it  is  west. 
The  deviation  them  is  the  distance  from  the  variation  to  the  com- 
pass error  and  is  named  after  the  direction  from  the  variation  to 
the  compass  error. 

Q.  90.  Under  what  conditions  would  you  expect  the  devia- 
tions of  the  compass  to  change?  Ans.  In  a new  iron  ship,  a 
great  change  of  latitude,  the  ship  being  heeled,  heavy  shock  as  in 
seaway,  being  on  one  course  for  several  days,  at  every  change  of 
course,  alteration  in  the  construction  of  the  vessel,  the  ship  being 
heated  by  a hot  sun  and  particularly  if  painted  black  and  one 
side  is  exposed  to  the  sun  all  day  and  if  the  smokestack  is  near 
the  comjiass  the  deviation  will  change  with  the  heat  of  it. 

Q.  91.  What  effect  do  like  and  unlike  poles  of  magnets  have  on 
each  other  ? Ans.  The  north  and  south  poles  will  attract  each 
other.  Two  north  or  two  soutli  poles  will  repel  each  other. 


GROVER  C BERGDOLL 

I «J 

Q.  02.  Wliat  are  the  causes  of  local  deviation  of  the  compass  ? 
Ann.  li’on  and  steel,  of  which  the  ship  may  he  wholly  or  partly 
constructed,  and  like  material  in  tlie  cargo. 

(J.  03.  How  can  you  ascertain  their  extent?  A«s.  By  observing 
tlie  bearing  by  compass  of  two  known  objects  wlieii  in  range. 
Tiie  dilference  lietweim  the  observed  and  magnetic  Iiearings  will 
he  deviation. 

Q.  04.  How  can  you  correct  them?  Avs.  By  use  of  magnets. 


Q.  05.  Sandy  Hook  IMain  liglit  and  South  Hook  Beacon  were 
in  range  and  bore  by  compass  N.  W.  ^2  W.  Find  the  deviation 
of  the  compass.  Ans.  See  the  following  example: 

Magnetic  bearing  N.  W.  % W.  = 4.5  points 

Compass  bearing  N.  W.  by  W.  V4,  W.  = 5.25  points 

Deviation  % point  E.  = .75  E. 

Q.  00.  Romer  Shoal  and  Old  Orchard  lights  were  in  range  and 
bore  liy  compass  W.  y.^  N.  Find  the  deviation  of  the  compass. 
An.9.  See  the  following  example: 

Magnetic  bearing  W.  % N.  = 7 . 25  points 

Compass  bearing  W.  ’4  N.  =7.75  points 

Deviation  y,  point  E.  = . 50  E. 

Q.  07.  Give  the  course  to  steer  by  compass  entering  the  harbor 
through  the  Swash  Ciiannel,  the  deviation  for  the  ship’s  head 
being  % point  E.  Ans.  See  the  following  example: 

Magnetic  course  N.  W.  % X.  =3%  points 

Deviation  + % point  E. 


Compass  course  N.  W.  % W. 


4%  points 


74 


Q.  98.  Give  the  course  to  steer  by  compass  leaving  the  harbor 
through  the  Geduey  Channel,  the  deviation  for  the  ship's  head 
Iteing  Vs  point  W.  Aus.  See  the  following  example: 


Q.  99.  Ambrose  Channel  Lightship  bears  X.  E.  and  Scotland 
Lightship  bears  X.  W.  i/o  W.  by  compass.  Deviation  6“  W. 
Locate  the  vessel  on  the  chart  and  give  the  magnetic  bearing  to 
Xavesink  (Higlilands)  light.  An  ansicer  to  this  question  cannot 
he  given  here,  as  it  can  only  he  u'orked  out  on  the  chart. 

Q.  100.  You  are  heading  S.  by  W.  % W.  and  have  an  object 
abeam  on  the  starboard  side.  How  does  it  bear?  Ans. 

W.  by  N.  % X. 

Q.  101.  You  are  heading  E.  % X.  and  have  an  object  2 points 
aliaft  the  Ijeam  on  the  port  side.  How  does  it  bear?  Ans. 

X.  \Y.  by  X.  % X. 

Q.  102.  What  is  latitude?  Aj?s.  The  distance  any  placed  is  north 
( r soutli  of  th('  equator,  and  is  expressed  in  degrees,  minutes 
and  seconds. 

G.  103.  What  is  longitude?  Ans.  It  is  the  are  of  the  equator 
intercepted  bidween  the  prime  meridian  and  the  meridian  of  any 
])lace. 

y.  104.  \t'hat  is  a meridian?  A«s.  A semi-great  circle  passing 
from  pole  to  pole,  its  plane  cutting  that  of  the  equator  at  right 
angles. 

C.  105.  Wliat  is  a chart?  Ans.  A projection,  usually  Mercator, 
on  a map  of  a seacoast  and  a portion  of  the  sea  on  which  are 
sliown  tlie  lieight  of  tlie  land,  depth  of  water,  nature  of  the 


Magnetic  course  E,  S,  E,  14  E. 
Deviation 


0'4  points 
Vu  point  W, 


Compass  course  E,  S,  E.  14  S, 


5-%  points 


75 


bottom,  shoals,  rocks  or  other  dangers,  aids  to  navigation, 
currents,  data  regarding  tides,  variation  of  the  compass,  anchor- 
ages, harbors,  etc.  It  is  made  for  the  use  of  navigators. 

y.  106.  Describe  a Mercator  chart.  Ans.  This  eliart  is  a 
cylindrical  projection,  and  constructed  on  the  theory  that  the 
earth  is  a cylinder.  The  meridians  are  parallel  to  each  other. 
The  distances  between  the  parallels  of  latitude  are  increased 
toward  the  poles  in  the  same  ju'oportion  that  the  meridians  are  ex- 
panded. All  places  are  in  their  proper  geographical  positions  and 
all  courses  and  Ijearings  ai-e  straight  lines  except  the  great  circle 
track  when  between  two  ports  not  on  the  same  meridian. 

Q.  107.  Where  do  you  measure  latitude  on  a Mercator  chart? 
A?is.  On  the  graduated  meridian  at  either  side  of  the  chart. 

Q.  108.  Where  do  you  measure  longitude  on  a Mercator  chart? 
Ans.  On  the  graduated  j)arallel  of  latitude  at  the  top  or  bottom 
of  the  chart. 

Q.  109.  Where  do  you  measure  distance  on  a Mercator  chart? 
Ans.  On  the  graduated  meridian  at  either  side  of  the  chart  in 
the  middle  latitude. 

I 

Q.  110.  AYhat  do  the  figures  on  the  white  surface  indicate? 
Ans.  Soundings  in  fathoms. 

Q.  111.  What  do  tlie  figures  on  the  dark  surface  indicate? 
Ans.  Soundings  in  feet. 

Q.  112.  What  do  the  figures  on  the  land  portion  indicate? 
Ans.  Height  of  the  land  in  feet. 

Q.  113.  How  would  you  know  if  the  compasses  on  the  chart  are 
true  or  magnetic?  A«s.  The  north  and  south  line  of  a true 


76 


compass  is  parallel  to  the  meridians.  The  north  and  south  line 
of  a magnetic  conijiass  is  not. 

Q.  114.  How  can  you  find  a course  and  distance  iiy  chart? 
Ans.  The  course  is  found  lyv  placing  the  edge  of  the  parallel  rules 
over  the  places  between  which  the  course  is  wanted..  Then  move 
them  to  the  center  of  the  nearest  compass  rose  and  read  either 
the  true  or  magnetic  course.  The  inside  compass  is  magnetic  and 
outside  one  is  true.  After  the  course  is  found  the  rules  should 
be  moved  back  to  prove  it.  It  should  be  noticed  if  there  are  any 
obstructions  on  the  course ; also  the  depth  of  water.  The  tide 
wind  and  currents  should  be  considered.  Tlie  distance  is  found 
by  measuring  with  the  dividers  taking  the  miles  from  the  grad- 
uated meridian  at  the  side  of  the  chart  in  the  middle  latitude 
of  the  places  or  on  some  charts  (usually  harbor  charts)  from  a 
scale  of  miles.  If  the  magnetic  compass  on  the  chart  is  used  the 
deviation  if  any  must  be  applied  to  produce  the  compass  course. 
If  the  true  compass  is  used  the  variation  must  also  be  used. 
A course  protractor  is  more  convenient  for  this  purpose  than  the 
parallel  rules,  as  it  can  be  used  where  the  chart  cannot  be  opened 
as  required  to  use  parallel  rules. 

Q.  115.  How  can  you  find  a vessel's  position  on  a chart  by 
cross  bearings  of  two  or  more  fixed  objects  which  are  shown 
on  the  chart  ? A)is.  Lay  off  the  bearings  on  the  proper  side  of 
the  objects  and  the  ship’s  position  will  be  at  the  point  where 
they  cross. 

Q.  116.  Where  would  you  stow  heavy  cargo  in  a river  steamer? 
Ans.  In  the  hold  near  a hatch  amidship  or  on  deck  amidship 
not  near  any  deck  opening  and  well  chocked  off  with  other  cargo 
not  easily  injured,  such  as  bales.  Heavy  cargo  should  be  carried 
on  deck  only  in  places  well  supported  by  stanchions. 

Q.  117.  How  would  you  stow  barrels  or  casks?  Ans.  Begin 
amidship  along  the  keelson  and  work  fore  and  aft.  StoW 


77 


the  casks  bilge  and  cantline,  bung  up  and  bilge  fi'ee  with  good 
beds  at  the  quarters  and  quoins  at  the  sides  and  eliime  to  chime. 
Another  way  is  to  stow  them  bilge  to  bilge. 

Q.  118.  How  would  you  stow  the  second  tier  of  casks?  Ans. 
In  the  cantlines  of  the  first  tier  and  use  some  dunnage  for 
the  quoins  on  each  side  under  the  quarters  to  take  on,  to  lessen 
the  strain  on  the  lower  tier. 

Q.  119.  How  can  you  find  the  Inmg  side  of  a cask  in  the  dark? 
Ans.  By  the  rivets  in  the  hoops  which  are  in  line  with  the  bung. 

Q.  120.  Why  should  casks  be  stowed  bung  up?  Ans.  To 
prevent  leakage  and  because  the  head  pieces  are  vertical  and 
therefore  the  cask  is  strongest  in  that  position. 

Q.  121.  Where  would  you  stow  carboys  of  acids?  Ans.  Well 
secured  on  deck,  where  they  could  be  quickly  thrown  overboard 
in  case  of  leakage. 

Q.  122.  Where  would  you  stow  tar,  oil,  rosin  and  other  cargo 
of  that  nature  in  a general  cargo?  Ans.  Under  and  away  from 
cargo  that  it  might  damage  by  leakage  or  odor.  Also  where  it 
cannot  leak  into  the  limbers  and  pumpwells.  If  a large  quantity 
is  shipped  the  skin  should  be  caulked. 

Q.  123.  Where  would  you  stow  wines,  liquors,  etc.?  Ans. 
Under  other  cargo  that  it  may  not  be  accessible  during  the  voyage. 

Q.  124.  When,  where  and  what  kind  of  petroleum  is  allowed 
as  cargo  in  passenger  steamers?  Ans.  Refined  petroleum  which 
will  not  ignite  at  a temperature  of  less  than  110°  F.  may,  upon 
routes  where  tliere  is  no  other  practicable  mode  of  transporting  it, 
be  carried  on  passenger  steamers;  but  it  shall  not  be  lawful  to 
receive  on  board  or  transport  any  petroleum  unless  the  owner  or 
master  of  the  steamer  shall  have  first  received  from  the  inspectors 


78 


a permit  designating  the  place  or  places  on  such  steamer  in  which 
the  same  may  be  carried  or  stowed,  with  the  further  condition 
that  the  permit  sliall  he  conspicuously  posted  on  the  steamer. 

Refined  petroleum  shall  not  in  any  case  be  received  on  hoard  or 
carried  unless  it  is  put  up  in  good  iron-bound  casks  or  barrels  or 
in  good  metallic  cans  or  vessels,  carefully  packed  in  boxes,  and 
the  casks,  barrels,  or  boxes  plainly  marked  on  tlie  heads  thereof 
with  the  shipi)er’s  name,  the  name  of  the  article,  and  the  degree  of 
temperature  (Fahrenheit)  at  which  the  petroleum  will  ignite. 

Vessels  carrying  passengers  or  freight  for  hire  permitted  under 
the  authority  of  the  act  of  Congress  approved  October  22.  1914, 
amending  section  4472,  Revised  Statutes  of  the  United  States,  to 
transport  and  use  gasoline  or  any  of  the  products  of  petroleum  for 
the  operation  of  engines  to  supply  an  auxiliary  lighting  and  wire- 
less system  independent  of  the  vessel’s  main  power  plant,  shall  he 
allowed  to  carry  not  to  exceed  40  gallons  of  gasoline  or  any  of  the 
products  of  petroleum  for  such  purposes  when  contained  in  a 
seamless  steel  tank,  cylindrical  in  form,  not  less  than  one-fourth 
(.25)  of  an  inch  thick,  and  of  a capacity  of  at  least  10  per  cent 
more  than  the  volume  of  the  contents.  Tlic  tank  shall  he  tinned 
on  the  inside  and  tested  to  300  pounds  pressure  to  insure  tight- 
ness, and  fitted  with  a vent  pipe  of  ample  capacity,  with  no  angles 
in  pipe  greater  than  45°,  opening  to  the  atmosphere  at  a point 
not  less  than  10  feet  above  the  highest  house,  the  vent  pipe  to  end 
with  a U bend  with  the  opening  protected  by  wire  gauze.  The 
filling  pipe  or  cap  shall  be  entirely  independent  of  other  con- 
ditions. The  tank  shall  be  carried  on  the  highest  deck  of  the 
steamer  and  so  located  that  there  may  be  a free  circulation  of  air 
all  around  it. 

Steamers  engaged  in  transoceanic  .service  or  on  voyages  of  more 
than  10  days’  duration  in  either  direetion  may  carry  such  quan- 
tities of  gasoline  or  any  of  the  jiroducts  of  petroleum  as  may  be 
necessary  to  supply  an  auxiliary  service  already  installed,  the 
tanks  already  installed  and  the  location  of  same  being  allowed 
for  this  purpose.  On  steamers  where  the  auxiliaries  are  main- 
tained by  engines  using  the  heavy  oils,  the  oil  may  be  carried  in 


79 


quantities  not  to  exceed  15  tons,  when  contained  in  iron  or  steel 
tanks  of  sufficient  strength  to  withstand  the  action  of  sea  or 
temperature,  and  so  located  as  to  be  properly  insulated  or  venti- 
lated if  eitlier  is  necessary. 

All  tanks  shall  be  firmly  and  properly  secured  to  prevent  being 
torn  away  from  beds  or  saddles  by  heavy  weather  or  excessive  list 
of  the  ship,  and  shall  be  the  object  of  daily  inspection  by  the 
officers  of  the  ship  intrusted  with  their  care. 

There  shall  be  placed  within  5 feet  of  every  tank  containing 
gasoline,  benzine,  or  naphtha  not  less  than  twm  fire  extinguishers 
of  approved  type  which  have  demonstrated  a capacity  for  ex- 
tinguishing burning  gasoline,  which  fire  extinguishers  shall  be  in 
addition  to  the  fire  extinguishers  already  required. 

The  fuel-oil  tanks  on  all  inland  st(‘auiers  subject  to  the  rules 
and  regulations  of  the  Steamboat-Inspection  Service  shall  be  con- 
structed of  material  of  such  thickness  and  workmanship  as,  in  the 
judgment  of  the  inspector  in  whose  district  the  installation  is 
made,  is  safe. 

Q.  125.  What  cargoes  are  most  liable  to  spontaneous  com- 
bustion ? Ans.  Cotton,  jute,  coal,  rags,  hemp,  etc. 

Q.  126.  What  precautions  would  you  take  when  loading  a ship 
in  shallow  water  ? Ans.  Keep  her  on  an  even  keel  and  afloat. 

Q.  127.  What  cargo  is  prohibited  in  passenger  steamers  ? 
Ans.  No  loose  hay,  loose  cotton,  or  loose  hemp,  camphene,  nitro- 
glycerin, naphtha,  benzine,  benzole,  coal  oil,  crude  or  refined 
petroleum,  or  other  like  explosive  burning  fluids,  or  like  dangerous 
articles,  shall  be  carried  as  freight  or  used  as  stores  on  any 
steamer  carrying  passengers ; nor  shall  baled  cotton  or  hemp  be 
carried  on  such  steamers  unless  the  bales  are  compactly  pressed 
and  thoroughly  covered  and  secured  in  such  manner  as  shall  be 
prescribed  by  the  regulations  established  by  the  board  of  super- 
vising inspectors  with  the  approval  of  the  Secretary  of  Com- 


80 


merce;  nor  shall  gunpowder  be  carried  on  an}^  such  vessel  except 
under  special  license;  nor  shall  oil  of  vitriol,  nitric  or  other 
chemical  acids  be  carried  on  such  steamers  except  on  the  decks 
or  guards  thereof  or  in  such  other  safe  part  of  the  vessel  as  shall 
be  prescribed  by  the  inspectors.  Refined  petroleum,  which  will 
not  ignite  at  a temperature  less  than  one  hundred  and  ten  degrees 
of  Fahrenheit  thermometer,  may  be  carried  on  board  such 
steamers  upon  routes  where  there  is  no  other  practicable  mode  of 
transporting  it,  and  under  such  regulations  as  shall  be  prescribed 
by  the  board  of  supervising  inspectors  with  the  approval  of  the 
Secretary  of  Commerce;  and  oil  or  spirits  of  turpentine  may  be 
carried  on  such  steamers  when  put  up  in  good  metallic  vessels  or 
casks  or  barrels  well  and  securely  bound  with  iron  and  stowed  in 
a secure  part  of  the  vessel ; and  friction  .matches  may  be  carried 
on  such  steamers  when  securely  packed  in  strong,  tight  chests  or 
boxes,  the  covers  of  which  shall  be  well  secured  by  locks,  screws, 
or  other  reliable  fastenings,  and  stowed  in  a safe  part  of  the 
vessel  at  a secure  distance  from  any  fire  or  heat.  All  such  other 
provisions  shall  be  made  on  every  steamer  carrying  passengers  or 
freight,  to  guard  against  and  extinguish  fire,  as  shall  be  pre- 
scribed by  the  lioard  of  supervising  inspectors  and  approved  by 
the  Secretary  of  Commerce.  Nothing  in  the  foregoing  or  follow- 
ing sections  of  this  Act  shall  prohibit  the  transportation  by  steam 
vessels  of  gasoline  or  any  of  the  products  of  petroleum  when 
carried  by  motor  vehicles  (commonly  known  as  automobiles) 
using  the  same  as  a source  of  motive  power:  Provided,  however. 
That  all  fire,  if  any,  in  such  vehicles  or  automobiles  be  extin- 
guished immediately  after  entering  the  said  vessel,  and  that  the 
same  be  not  relighted  until  immediately  before  said  vehicle  shall 
leave  the  vessel:  Provided  further.  Tliat  any  owner,  master,  agent, 
or  other  person  having  charge  of  passenger  steam  vessels  shall 
have  the  right  to  refuse  to  transport  automobile  vehicles  the 
tanks  of  which  contain  gasoline,  naphtha,  or  other  dangerous 
burning  fluids. 

Provided,  however.  That  nothing  in  the  provisions  of  this  Title 
shall  prohibit  the  transportation  by  vessels  not  carrying  pas- 


81 


sengers  for  hire,  of  gasoline  or  any  of  the  products  of  petroleum 
for  use  as  a source  of  motive  power  for  the  motor  boats  or 
launches  of  such  vessels : Provided  further,  That  nothing  in  the 
foregoing  or  following  sections  of  this  Act  shall  prohibit  tlie  use, 
by  steam  vessels  carrying  passengers  for  hire,  of  lifeboats 
equipped  with  gasoline  motors,  and  tanks  containing  gasoline  for 
the  operation  of  said  motor-driven  lifeboats:  Provided,  hotcever. 
That  no  gasoline  sliall  be  carried  other  than  that  in  the  tanks 
of  the  lifeboats:  Provided  further,  Tliat  the  use  of  such  lifeboats 
equipped  with  gasoline  motors  shall  be  under  such  regulations  as 
shall  be  prescribed  by  the  board  of  supervising  inspectors  with 
the  approval  of  the  Secretary  of  Commerce:  Provided,  however. 
That  nothing  in  the  foregoing  or  following  sections  of  tliis  Act 
shall  prohibit  the  transportation  and  use  by  vessels  carrying 
passengers  or  freight  for  hire  of  gasoline  or  any  of  the  products 
of  petroleum  for  the  operation  of  engines  to  supply  an  auxiliary 
lighting  and  wireless  system  independent  of  the  vessel's  main 
power  plant:  Provided  further,  Tliat  the  transportation  or  use 
of  such  gasoline  or  any  of  the  products  of  petroleum  shall  be 
under  such  regulations  as  shall  be  prescribed  by  the  board  of 
supervising  inspectors,  with  the  approval  of  the  Secretary  of 
Commerce. 

Sec.  4473.  Every  bale  of  cotton  or  hemp  tliat  shall  be  shipped  or 
carried  on  any  passenger  steamer,  without  conforming  to  the  pro- 
visions of  the  preceding  section,  shall  be  subject  to  a penalty  of 
five  dollars,  and  shall  be  liable  to  seizure  and  sale  to  secure  the 
payment  of  such  penalty. 

Tlie  Secretary  of  Commerce  may  grant  permission  to  the  owner 
of  any  steam  vessel,  to  use  any  invention  or  process  for  the 
utilization  of  petroleum  or  other  mineral  oils  or  substances  in  the 
production  of  motive  power,  and  may  make  and  enforce  regula- 
tions concerning  the  application  and  use  of  the  same  for  such 
purpose.  But  no  such  permission  shall  be  granted,  unless  upon 
the  certificate  of  the  supervising  inspector  of  steamboats  for  the 
district  wherein  such  vessel  is  registered,  and  other  satisfactory 
proof  that  the  use  of  the  same  is  safe  and  efficient ; and  upon  such 


82 


proof,  and  the  approval  of  such  certificate  by  the  Secretary  of 
Commerce,  a special  license  for  the  use  of  such  process  or  inven- 
tion shall  issue  under  the  seal  of  the  Department  of  Commerce. 

Provided,  however,  That  tlie  Secretary  of  Commerce  may  permit 
the  use  of  petroleum  as  fuel  on  steamers  not  carrying  passengers, 
without  the  certificate  of  the  Supervising  Insjjector  of  the  district 
where  the  vessel  is  to  be  used,  subject  to  such  conditions  and  safe- 
guards as  the  Secretary  of  Commerce  in  his  judgment  shall 
provide.  For  a violation  of  any  of  the  conditions  imposed  by  the 
Secretary  of  Commerce  a penalty  of  five  hundred  dollars  shall  be 
imposed,  which  penalty  shall  be  a lien  upon  the  vessel,  but  a 
iDond  may,  as  jjrovided  in  other  cases,  be  given  to  secure  the  satis- 
faction of  the  judgment. 

Provided  further,  Tliat  when  crude  petroleum  of  a flash  point 
not  less  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  degrees  Fahrenheit,  is  carried 
in  the  double-bottom  fuel  tanks  of  steamers  using  the  same  for 
fuel,  tlie  crude  petroleum  carried  in  such  tanks  in  excess  of  the 
necessities  of  the  voyage  may  be  discharged  at  terminal  ports 
when  no  passengers  are  on  board  the  ship.  Crude  petroleum 
carried  and  discharged  under  these  conditions  will  not  be  con- 
sidered stores  or  cargo  within  the  contemplation  of  section  forty- 
four  hundred  and  seventy-two.  Revised  Statutes  of  the  United 
States. 

All  gunpowder,  nitro-glyeerine,  camphene,  naphtha,  benzine, 
benzole,  coal-oil,  crude  or  refined  jjetroleum,  oil  of  vitriol,  nitric 
or  other  chemical  acids,  oil  or  spirits  of  turpentine,  friction- 
matches,  and  all  other  articles  of  like  character,  when  packed  or 
put  up  for  shipment,  shall  be  securely  packed  and  put  up 
separately  from  each  other  and  from  all  other  articles;  and  the 
package,  box,  cask,  or  other  vessel  containing  the  same  shall  be 
distinctly  marked  on  the  outside,  witli  the  name  or  description  of 
the  article  contained  tlierein. 

Every  person  who  packs  or  puts  rq),  or  causes  to  bo  packed  or 
put  up  for  sliipment.  any  gunpowder,  nitro-glyeerine,  camphene, 
naphtha,  benzine,  benzole,  coal-oil,  crude  or  refined  petroleum, 
oil  of  vitriol,  nitric  or  other  chemical  acids,  oil  or  spirits  of 


83 


turpentine,  friction-matches,  or  other  articles  of  like  character 
otherwise  than  as  directed  by  the  preceding  section,  or  who 
knowingly  ships  or  attempts  to  ship  the  same,  or  delivers  the 
same  to  any  such  vessel  as  stores,  unless  duly  packed  and  marked, 
shall  be  deemed  guilty  of  a misdemeanor,  and  punished  by  fine 
not  exceeding  two  thousand  dollars,  or  imprisonment  not  exceed- 
ing eigliteen  months,  or  both ; one-half  of  the  fine  to  go  to  the 
informer,  and  the  articles  to  be  liable  to  seizure  and  forfeiture. 


Q.  128.  Where  would  you  stow  acids  or  matches  ? Ams.  Mate-lies 
may  be  carried  on  steamers  when  securely  packed  in  strong, 
tight  chests  or  boxes,  the  covers  of  which  shall  be  well  secured 
by  locks,  screws,  or  other  reliable  fastenings,  and  stowed  on 
deck  in  a safe  part  of  the  vessel  at  a secure  distance  from  any 
fire  or  lieat.  Acids  should  also  be  carried  on  deck,  and  both 
where  they  could  be  quickly  thrown  overboard  in  case  of  danger. 

Q.  129.  How  would  you  stow  hay,  straw,  etc.?  Ans.  In  bales 
on  deck  a safe  distance  from  any  fire  or  heat,  covered  with  a 
tarpaulin,  and  where  it  could  be  quickly  thrown  overboard  in 
case  of  danger. 


Q.  130.  What  would  you  do  in  case  of  fire?  Aks,  Call  all 
liands  to  their  stations  and  stretch  the  hose  and  get  water  on 
the  fire  as  soon  as  possible  after  the  fire  is  located,  and  then  lay 
the  vessel  so  that  the  fire  will  be  to  leeward.  If  the  fire  is  in 
the  liold,  batten  down  tlie  hatches  as  tight  as  possible  and  turn 
on  the  steam.  If  necessary  also  use  water,  but  pump  it  out  if 
it  can  be  done  and  is  not  needed  in  the  bottom  of  the  ship.  Have 
boats  and  all  other  life-saving  equipment  ready  for  use  at  any 
moment,  and  get  outside  assistance  if  it  can  be  obtained,  and 
take  advantage  of  the  first  opportunity  to  land  the  passengers  if 
any.  If  tlie  vessel  can  be  beached  or  scuttled,  do  so  where  life 
can  be  saved  and  the  vessel  raised  or  hauled  oil’  at  the  least 
expense,  but  in  enough  water  to  put  the  fire  out.  Enter  same  in 


84 


the  log-book  in  full  detail  with  time  and  date,  and  report  it  to 
the  United  States  local  inspectors. 

Q.  131.  When  your  vessel  is  to  be  hauled  out,  what  report  do 
you  make  and  to  whom?  Ans.  Report  to  the  United  States  local 
inspectors  the  place,  time  and  date  and  the  purpose  for  which  the 
vessel  is  to  be  hauled  out  and  the  repairs  intended. 

Q.  132.  Describe  the  size  and  construction  of  a fog  bell?  .4ns. 
The  efficient  fog  bell  required  upon  vessels  by  law  shall  be  held  to 
mean  a bell  not  less  than  8 inches  in  diameter  from  outside  to 
outside,  and  constructed  of  bronze  or  brass  or  other  material  equal 
thereto  in  tone  and  volume  of  sound. 

Q.  133.  What  equipment  does  a lifeboat  require  by  law?  Ans. 
Lifeboats  required  on  lake,  bay,  and  sound  steamers  shall  be 
equipped  with  a properly  secured  life  line  the  entire  length  on 
each  side,  such  life  line  to  be  festooned  in  liights  not  longer  than 
3 feet,  with  a seine  float  in  each  bight;  at  least  2 life  preservers, 
or  2 wooden  flats  where  the  same  are  allowed  by  law;  1 painter 
of  not  less  than  2%-inch  manila  rope  (about  .0  inch  diameter), 
properly  attached  and  of  suitable  length ; a full  complement  of 
oars  and  2 spare  oars  of  suitable  length;  a full  complement  of 
rowlocks  and  2 spare  rowlocks,  each  rowlock  to  be  attached  to 
the  boat  with  a separate  chain;  1 steering  oar  with  rowlock  or 
becket,  or  1 rudder  with  yoke  and  suitable  yoke  ropes;  1 boat 
hook  attached  to  staff  of  suitable  length,  1 a.x,  1 bucket  with 
lanyard  attached.  Wooden  boats  shall  have,  in  addition  to  the 
above,  2 jilugs  for  each  drain  hole,  attached  to  the  boat  with 
chains. 

Q.  134.  How  must  lifeboats  be  carried  and  overhauled?  Ans. 
All  lifeboats  on  vessels  carrying  passengers  shall,  if  practicable, 
be  carried  under  substantial  davits  or  cranes;  but  if  it  is  not 
practicable  so  to  carry  all  the  lifeboats  required,  the  remainder 
shall  be  stowed  near  at  hand,  so  as  to  be  easily  and  readily 


85 


launched.  Sucli  davits,  cranes,  and  necessary  gear  shall  he  such 
as  will  enable  the  lifeboats  to  he  lowered  to  the  water  in  less  than 
two  minutes  from  tlie  time  the.  clearing  away  of  the  boats  is 
begun. 

Each  lifeboat  carried  under  davits  shall  be  provided  with  two 
separate  davits.  Wlieu  a single  crane  is  properly  adapted  to  lower 
a lifeboat,  it  may  be  allowed  to  take  the  place  of  the  two  davits. 
Such  davits  or  cranes,  and  the  blocks  and  the  falls  thereof,  on  all 
passenger  vessels  except  ferryboats,  shall  be  of  sufficient  strength 
to  carry  the  boat  with  its  full  load. 

It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  master  or  officer  in  charge  of  all 
vessels  to  see  that  the  boat  davit  falls  shall  at  all  times  be  in 
readiness  for  immediate  use.  and  protected  from  ice,  and  not 
painted,  and  such  boat  davit  falls  on  all  boats  not  swung  out  at 
boat  drills  shall  be  cut  adrift  and  overhauled;  and  it  shall  he 
unlawful  to  stow  in  any  lifeboat  articles  other  than  those  required 
by  law  and  regulations.  On  all  steamers  over  1.000  gross  tons, 
covered  tubs,  boxes  or  reels  shall  be  provided  in  which  to  stow 
away  the  boat  davit  falls. 

Lifeboats  shall  be  stripped,  cleaned,  painted,  and  thoroughly 
overhauled  at  least  once  in  every  year. 

All  lifeboats  shall  have  the  number  of  boat  plainly  marked  or 
painted  on  each  how,  in  figures  not  less  than  .3  inches  high.  Where 
lifeboats  are  carried  on  both  sides  of  a vessel,  lifeboat  No.  1 shall 
be  forward  on  starboard  side  of  vessel,  lifeboat  No.  2 forward  on 
port  side,  lifeboat  No.  3 next  abaft  lifeboat  No.  1 on  starboard 
side,  lifeboat  No.  4 next  abaft  lifeboat  No.  2 on  port  side,  and  so 
forth,  the  odd-numbered  boats  being  on  the  starboard  side  and 
the  even-numbered  boats  being  on  the  port  side  of  vessel.  All 
lifeboats  shall  have  their  cubical  contents  and  the  number  of 
persons  such  lifeboat  is  allowed  to  carry  plainly  marked  or 
painted  on  each  bow,  in  letters  and  figures  not  less  than  three- 
fourths  of  an  inch  high.  All  lifeboats  shall  also  have  the  number 
of  persons  allowed  to  be  carried  plainly  marked  or  painted  on 
top  of  at  least  two  of  the  thwarts,  in  letters  and  figures  not  less 
than  3 inches  high.  When  the  letters  and  figures  above  required 


86 


are  painted  on  lifeboats,  such  letters  and  figures  shall  be  dark 
on  a light  ground  or  light  on  a dark  ground. 

Tile  deck.s  on  wliich  lifel)oats  of  any  class  or  life  rafts  are 
carried  sliall  Ije  kept  clear  of  freight  or  any  other  obstruction  that 
would  interfere  with  the  immediate  launching  of  the  lifeboats  or 
life  rafts. 

Q.  135.  What  equipment  does  a liferaft  require  by  law?  Ans. 
All  liferafts  must  be  equipped  with  2 life  lines,  securely  fas- 
tened to  the  gunwales;  1 painter  of  2%-inch  manila  rope  of  a 
suitable  length;  not  less  than  4 oars  of  suitable  size;  2 paddles, 
each  of  not  less  than  5 feet  in  length,  the  blade  of  each  to  be  of 
not  less  area  than  one-half  that  of  the  blade  of  one  of  the  oars 
of  such  raft;  4 rowlocks;  1 steering  oar,  with  rowlock  or  hecket, 
and  1 boat  hook.  Liferafts  must  be  stripped,  cleaned,  painted, 
and  thoroughly  overhauled  at  least  once  in  every  year. 

Q.  136.  Where  are  life-preservers  to  he  located?  Ans.  In 
the  cabins,  staterooms,  berths  and  other  places  convenient  for 
passengers,  and  when  carried  over  head  at  a height  greater  than 
seven  feet  from  the  deck  below  efficient  nu'ans  must  be  provided 
for  such  immediate  release  and  distribution,  to  be  operated  by 
persons  standing  on  the  deck  below. 

Q.  137.  How  many  life-preservers  are  required?  Ans.  One  for 
each  and  every  person  allowed  to  he  carried  by  the  certificate  of 
insjjection. 

Q.  138.  Where  does  the  law  require  the  steam  whistle  to  be 
located?  Ans.  Xot  less  than  six  feet  above  the  top  of  the  pilot 
house;  but  not  higher  than  the  top  of  the  smokestack. 

Q.  139.  What  is  a station  hill?  Ans.  A list  of  the  crew 
with  their  stations  and  duty  in  case  of  fire,  collision  or  other 
accident.  Station  bills  are  to  be  posted  in  all  parts  of  the  vessel 
occupied  or  frequented  by  the  crew. 


GROVER  C.  BERGDOLL 

87 

Q.  140.  How  can  yon  test  fire  hose  and  how  would  you  keep 
it  ready  for  use?  Ans.  By  applying  a cold  water  pressure  of 
100  pounds  and  at  all  times  keep  at  least  one  length  of  hose 
attached  to  each  outlet  of  the  fire  main  and  provided  with  a 
suitable  nozzle. 

Q.  141.  What  is  the  fire  alarm?  Avs.  A continuous  ringing 
of  the  ship’s  bell  for  a period  of  not  less  than  20  seconds,  and 
this  signal  shall  not  be  used  for  any  other  purpose  whatsoever. 

Q.  142.  How  often  arc  fire  and  boat  drills  required  by  law? 
Ans.  At  least  once  each  week,  weather  permitting.  Enter  it  in 
the  log-book  with  the  time  and  date  and  report  it  once  a month 
to  the  United  States  local  inspectors  rvith  a statement  of  the 
general  condition  of  the  equipment  and  the  vessel,  using  the  form 
provided  for  that  purpose,  the  drill  to  consist  of  calling  all  hands 
to  quarters  and  exercising  them  in  the  clearing  away  and  swing- 
ing out  the  boats  and  in  the  use  of  all  other  apparatus  for  the 
.safety  of  life,  with  special  regard  for  the  drill  of  the  crew  in 
the  method  of  adusting  life-preservers  and  educating  passengers 
and  others  in  this  procedure  and  see  that  all  the  equipments 
required  by  law  are  in  complete  working  order  for  immediate 
use. 

Q.  143.  How  does  the  law  require  woodwork  around  stoves, 
stovepipes,  in  lamp  lockers,  etc.,  to  be  protected?  Ans.  Stoves 
must  be  well  secured  so  as  to  prevent  them  from  being  moved 
or  overthrown,  and  all  woodwork  about  them  and  the  stove- 
pipes must  be  protected  with  metal,  leaving  an  air  space  of  one 
inch.  Lamp  lockers  and  other  such  places  to  be  protected  in  the 
same  manner. 

Q.  144.  How  often  are  you  required  to  drill  the  crew  in  the 
use  of  the  line-carrying  gun?  Ans.  Tlie  master  of  every  vessel 
equipped  with  a line-carrying  gun  shall  drill  his  crew  in  the  use 
thereof,  and  fire  said  gun  at  least  once  in  every  three  months. 


88 


using  one-half  the  usual  charge  of  powder  and  any  ordinary  line 
of  proper  length  and  see  that  these  drills  are  entered  on  the  log 
of  the  vessel. 

Q.  145.  How  can  you  test  a life-preserver?  Ans.  Every  life- 
preserver  adjustable  to  the  body  of  a person  shall  be  made  of 
good  cork  blocks  or  other  suitable  material  approved  by  the 
Board  of  Supervising  Inspectors,  with  belts  and  shoulder  straps 
properly  attached,  and  shall  be  so  constructed  as  to  place  the 
device  underneath  the  shoulders  and  around  the  body  of  the 
person  wearing  it.  All  such  life-preservers  shall  be  not  less  than 
52  inches  in  length  when  measured  laid  flat,  and  every  cork  life- 
preserver  shall  contain  an  aggregate  weight  of  at  least  oVa  pounds 
of  good  cork,  and  every  life-preserver  shall  be  capable  of  sustain- 
ing for  a continuous  period  of  24  hours  an  attached  weight  so 
arranged  that  whether  the  said  weight  be  submerged  or  not  there 
shall  be  a direct  downward  gravitation  pull  upon  said  life- 
preserver  of  at  least  20  pounds. 

All  life-preservers  shall  be  covered  with  material  of  sufficient 
weight  and  strength  to  fully  protect  the  contents,  such  material 
to  be  of  a strength  equivalent  to  unbleached  cotton  twill  not  less 
than  6 ounces  in  weight  to  a section  of  30  by  36  inches.  Such 
covering  on  each  life-preserver  shall  be  of  one  piece  only,  and  the 
outside  longitudinal  edges  of  the  covering  at  the  seam  shall  be 
turned  to  a roll  and  closely  rope  stitched.  Each  life-preserver 
shall  have  two  shoulder  straps  of  heavy  double-woven  cotton  tape 
11/4  inches  in  width.  Each  strap  shall  be  made  of  one  piece  only, 
and  such  strap  shall  be  not  less  than  23  inches  net  in  length,  and 
shall  be  securely  attached  to  the  covering  of  the  life-preserver  by 
not  less  than  four  rows  of  stitching  and  at  not  less  than  two 
places  for  each  strap,  the  rear  ends  of  the  straps  to  be  sewed  on 
not  less  than  3 or  more  than  5 inches  from  the  center  of  the  upper 
edge  of  the  jacket,  measured  to  the  center  of  the  straps.  Tlie 
said  shoulder  straps  shall  be  securely  attached  to  each  other  by 
not  less  than  four  rows  of  stitching  at  the  point  where  they  cross 
each  other  on  the  back,  the  forward  ends  to  be  sewed  on  the 


80 


jacket  in  such  a position  as  to  allow  it  to  be  opened  out  to  its 
full  length  without  straining  the  cross  seizing.  There  shall  also 
he  on  each  life-preserver  a breast  or  button  strap  of  heavy  double- 
woven  cotton  tape  1 inch  wide  and  12  inches  long,  one  end  of 
which  shall  be  securely  fastened  to  one  shoulder  strap  hy  four 
rows  of  stitching  at  a point  4 inches  above  the  jacket,  and  the 
other  end  of  such  breast  strap  shall  be  doubled  back  2 inches 
and  a buttonhole  worked  through  both  parts.  A button  of  non- 
corrosive  material  shall  be  securely  sewed  on  the  other  shoulder 
strap  4 inches  above  the  jacket.  There  shall  also  be  on  each  life- 
preserver  a belt  of  heavy  double-woven  cotton  tape  inches 
wide,  extending  along  the  middle  line  on  the  outside  of  the  jacket, 
securely  sewed  to  the  covering  of  the  life-preserver  at  not  less 
than  si.x  places,  the  end  blocks  being  left  free,  and  the  ends  of  the 
belt  to  extend  12  inches  beyond  the  ends  of  the  jacket.  All  thread 
used  in  the  construction  of  life-preservers  shall  be  linen  of  a size 
and  strength  not  less  than  Barbour’s  three-cord.  No.  25,  machine 
thread.  All  seams  and  other  machine  sewing  on  life-preservers 
shall  be  with  a short  lock  stitch,  not  less  than  eight  Stitches  to 
the  inch. 

Blocks  of  compressed  cork  when  used  in  life-preservers  shall 
weigh  in  the  aggregate  not  less  than  6 pounds  to  each  life- 
preserver  and  shall  be  so  constructed  that  said  blocks  will  sustain, 
without  disintegration  or  substantial  expansion,  a submersion  test 
satisfactory  to  the  inspector  examining  the  same,  and  that  at  the 
expiration  of  such  test  shall  have  the  buoyancy  above  required. 
Where  the  blocks  of  life-preservers  are  made  up  of  separate  pieces 
of  cork,  said  pieces  shall  be  fastened  with  noncorrosive  materials. 

After  the  approval  of  this  rule  no  life-preserver  shall  be  passed 
at  the  factory  inspection  which  does  not  fulfill  the  foregoing 
requirements,  but  life-preservers  now  in  use  or  already  passed  at 
factory  inspection  may  be  used  on  board  vessels,  provided  they 
are  constructed  in  accordance  with  the  laws  and  regulations  in 
force  up  to  the  date  of  approval  of  this  section,  and  are  in  good 
and  serviceable  condition:  Provided,  That  all  block-cork  life- 

preservers  now  in  use  that  have  been  approved  by  this  board  shah 


90 


l)e  passed  by  the  local  inspectors  when  they  are  not  less  than  48 
inches  in  lengtli  and  have  the  other  necessary  requirements.  In- 
spectors are  furtlier  required  to  direct  such  life-preservers  to  be 
distributed  throughout  the  cabins,  staterooms,  Ijerths,  and  other 
places  convenient  for  passengers  on  sucli  steamers,  and  there  shall 
be  a printed  notice  posted  in  every  cabin  and  stateroom  and  in 
conspicuous  places  about  the  deck,  informing  passengers  of  the 
location  of  life-preservers  and  other  life-saving  appliances,  and  of 
the  mode  of  applying  or  adjusting  the  same.  Life-preservers  on 
passenger,  excursion,  and  ferry  steamers  when  stowed  overhead 
shall  be  so  supported  that  they  can  be  quickly  released  and  dis- 
tributed among  the  passengers,  and  the  inspector  shall  satisfy 
himself  as  to  the  efficiency  of  the  means  used  for  such  purpose 
by  actual  experiment.  And  when  such  life-preservers  are  stowed 
overhead  at  a height  greater  than  7 feet  from  the  deck  below, 
efficient  means  shall  be  provided  for  such  immediate  release  and 
distribution  to  be  operated  by  persons  standing  on  the  deck  below. 

The  supervising  inspector  of  the  district  shall  detail  a local  or 
assistant  inspector  to  any  place  where  life-preservers  are  manu- 
factured, whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  test  and  examine  all  life- 
preservers  manufactured  at  that  place  and  satisfy  himself  that 
such  life-preservers  are  in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of 
the  Board  of  Supervising  Inspectors,  ^^'hen  found  to  be  in  accord- 
ance with  the  requirements,  the  inspector  shall  stamp  them  with 
a stamp  bearing  the  initials  of  his  name  and  the  date  of  examina- 
tion, and  certifying  that  they  have  been  examined  and  passed. 
When  life-preservers  are  so  stamped  it  shall  be  prima  facie  evi- 
dence that  they  comply  with  the  requirements  of  law  and  regula- 
tions as  to  their  original  construction,  and  they  may  thereafter 
be  accepted  by  inspectors,  in  their  discretion,  as  being  in  accord- 
ance with  the  rules  and  regulations  of  the  Board  of  Supervising 
Inspectors. 

Q.  146.  What  is  the  penalty  for  flashing  a searchlight  into 
the  pilot  house  of  a passing  vessel  ? .4  ns.  The  officer's  license  may 
be  suspended  or  revoked. 


01 


Q.  147.  What  is  tlie  penalty  when  an  officer  of  a steamer  fails 
to  kec])  tlie  eqnipment  in  jiroper  order?  Ans.  His  license  may  fie 
suspended  or  revoked. 

Q.  148.  What  montlily  report  are  you  required  by  law  to  make 
to  tlie  United  States  local  inspectors  ? Ans.  The  number  of  pas- 
sengers carried,  dates  and  particulars  of  fire  and  boat  drills  and 
that  the  general  condition  of  the  vessel  and  equipment  are  as 
required  by  law.  This  report  is  not  required  for  months  during 
which  the  steamer  is  not  navigated. 

Q.  14!).  How  do  you  mark  a lead-line?  Ans.  2 fathoms,  2 
strips  of  leather;  3 fathoms.  3 strips  of  leather;  5 fathoms,  white 
rag;  7 fathoms,  red  rag;  10  fathoms,  piece  of  leather  with  hole 
in  it;  13  fathoms,  blue  rag;  1.5  fathoms,  white  rag;  17  fathoms, 
red  rag;  20  fathoms,  piece  of  leather  with  2 holes  in  it,  or  piece 
of  cod  line  with  2 knots. 

After  that  every  10  fathoms  marked  with  one  additional  knot, 
and  such  as  25,  35  and  45  fathoms  are  marked  with  one  knot. 

Q.  150.  What  signal  do  you  make  for  a pilot?  Ans.  Code  flag  S 
or  jack  on  the  fore,  or  use  the  code  signal.  During  the  night, 
flash  a white  light  at  short  intervals,  burn  white — red — white 
Coston  signal,  or  a blue  light  every  15  minutes, 

Q.  151.  What  publications  are  required  liy  law  to  be  on  board 
steamers  and  which  are  you  compelled  to  allow  passengers  to  use 
if  called  for?  Ans.  Pilot  rules,  notice  excluding  passengers  from 
the  pilot  house  or  bridge,  and  at  least  two  copies  form  800,  Laws 
flovorning  the  Steamboat-Inspection  Service.  The  last  are  to  be 
used  by  passengers  if  called  for.  Also  three  copies  of  section  50, 
Rule  5 of  General  Rules  and  Regulations. 

Q.  152.  What  are  the  duties  of  watchmen  in  passenger 
steamers  and  how  many  are  required?  Ans.  Their  duties  are  to 
prevent  any  unlawful  act  by  any  member  of  the  crew  or  any 


92 


passenger,  and  in  case  of  accident  to  alarm  the  passengers  and 
assist  tliem  in  tlie  use  of  the  life-saving  appliances.  One  watch- 
man is  required  in  each  cabin  and  steerage  and  report  to  tin- 
officer  of  the  watch  every  half  hour.  Also  a man  on  the  lookout 
forward  whose  duty  is  to  report  all  lights,  vessels,  etc.,  as  they 
come  in  sight  and  also  report  tlie  condition  of  the  vessels  running 
lights  at  regular  intervals  and  perform  no  other  duty  while  on 
the  lookout. 

Q.  15,3.  What  notices  regarding  life-preservers  are  required 
and  how  many  ? Arts.  Tliere  shall  he  a printed  notice  posted  in 
every  cabin  and  stateroom  and  in  conspicuous  places  about  the 
decks,  informing  passengers  of  the  location  of  life-preservers  and 
otlier  life-saving  appliances,  and  of  the  mode  of  applying  or 
adjusting  tlie  same. 

Q.  154.  What  would  you  do  in  case  of  collision?  Ans.  Call 
all  hands  to  quarters  and  get  the  life-saving  equipment  cleared 
away.  At  the  same  time  sound  the  bilges,  and  if  the  vessel  is 
making  water  and  if  possible  pump  it  out  and  learn  the  e.xtent 
of  the  damage.  If  the  vessel  is  dangerously  injured,  beach  her 
if  possible  where  she  can  he  hauled  off  or  raised  at  the  least 
e.xpense.  If  that  is  not  possible  take  to  the  boats  and  see  that 
women,  children  and  other  passengers  are  first  to  leave  the  ship, 
the  officers  being  last.  Also  take  any  other  action  to  save  life  and 
property  that  the  circumstances  may  permit.  Enter  a full  account 
of  the  accident  in  the  log-book  with  the  time  and  date  and 
report  it  to  the  nearest  United  States  local  inspectors  on  arrival 
in  port.  In  every  ease  of  collision  between  two  vessels  it  shall  be 
the  duty  of  the  master  or  person  in  charge  of  each  vessel,  if  and  so 
far  as  he  can  do  so  without  serious  danger  to  his  own  vessel,  crew, 
and  passengers  (if  any),  to  stay  by  the  other  vessel  until  he  has 
ascertained  that  she  has  no  need  of  further  assistance,  and  to  ren- 
der to  the  other  vessel,  her  master,  crew,  and  passengers  (if  any), 
such  assistance  as  may  be  practicable  and  as  may  he  necessary  in 
order  to  save  them  from  any  danger  caused  by  the  collision  and 


93 


also  to  give  to  tlie  master  or  person  in  charge  of  the  other  vessel 
the  name  of  his  own  vessel  and  her  pm't  of  registi'v,  or  the  port 
or  place  to  which  she  belongs,  and  also  the  names  of  the  ports 
and  places  from  which  and  to  which  she  is  bound.  Every  master 
or  person  in  charge  of  a United  States  vessel  who  fails,  without 
reasonable  cause,  to  render  such  assistance  or  give  such  informa- 
tion as  aforesaid  shall  be  deemed  guilty  of  a misdemeanor,  and 
shall  be  liable  to  a penalty  of  one  thousand  dollars,  or  imprison- 
ment for  a term  not  exceeding  two  years. 

Q.  155.  If  your  vessel  was  anchored  near  a shoal  on  either  side, 
which  way  would  you  sheer  the  ship  and  why?  J.hs.  Toward  the 
shoal  because  if  she  broke  her  sheer  she  would  go  from  the  shoal. 

Q.  15G.  IMiat  is  the  penalty  for  blowing  unnecessary  whistles? 

Tile  officer  may  be  fined  or  his  license  may  be  suspended. 

Q.  157.  What  is  the  penalty  for  navigating  a steamer  beyond 
the  waters  called  for  in  her  certificate  or  the  officer’s  license? 
-las.  His  license  may  be  suspended  or  revoked. 

Q.  158.  l\’hat  are  the  bell  signals  from  the  pilot  house  to 
the  engine  room?  Ans.  When  engines  are  stopped,  one  bell — • 
ahead  slow.  When  engines  are  working  ahead  slow,  jingle  bell — 
full  speed  ahead.  When  engines  are  working  full  speed  ahead, 
one  bell — slow  down.  l\'hen  engines  are  working  ahead  slow,  one 
bell — stop.  Mdien  engines  are  stopped,  two  bells — astern  slow. 
When  engines  are  working  astern  slow,  jingle  bell — full  speed 
astern.  When  engines  are  working  astern  either  slow  or  full 
speed,  one  bell — stop.  l\dien  engines  are  working  full  speed  ahead, 
four  bells — astern.  With  jingle  bell,  full  speed  astern. 

V-  159.  What  precautions  would  you  take  when  making  the 
land  during  thick  or  any  bad  weather?  Ans.  During  thick  or  bad 
weather  soimd  the  whistle  as  required  by  law,  and  when  making 


94 


the  land  have  the  anchors  ready,  look  up  the  tides  and  currents 
and  sound  frequently  and  keep  a good  lookout.  Run  at  moderate 
speed  and  if  in  a sailing  vessel,  have  her  under  manageable  sail. 
Listen  for  horns,  bells,  etc.,  and  stop,  anchor,  or  stand  off  shore 
if  the  jiosition  of  the  ship  becomes  too  uncertain  to  run  to  pick 
up  the  light  or  other  object  intended  to  make.  Also  be  sure  the 
deviation  of  the  compass  is  known  and  properly  applied. 

Q.  160.  How  can  you  convert  statute  miles  into  nautical  miles? 
Ans.  By  multiplying' the  number  of  statute  miles  by  1.152. 

y.  161.  What  are  j'our  duties  on  joining  a vessel  as  master? 
Ans.  Have  my  name  indorsed  on  the  papers  at  the  Custom  House. 
lnsf)ect  the  vessel  and  her  equipment,  and  if  any  defects  are  found 
have  such  repairs  and  alterations  made  as  may  be  necessary, 
and  if  that  cannot  be  done  or  if  some  considerable  change  is  made, 
a report  to  the  LTnited  States  local  inspectors  would  be  necessary. 
Also  take  an  inventory  of  the  stores  and  see  that  the  vessel 
is  in  proper  condition,  equipped,  has  the  full  complement  of 
officers  and  crew  and  stored.  If  possible  obtain  from  the  former 
master  such  vouchers  and  accounts  as  he  may  have. 

Q.  162.  What  would  be  your  duty  when  relieving  the  officer  in 
charge  of  the  watch  and  while  you  are  in  charge  of  the  watch? 
Aws.  Inquire  if  any  orders  had  been  left  and  what  they  were, 
the  course,  and  if  on  a coast  the  time  the  ship  passed  the  last 
light  or  prominent  point,  see  that  the  running  lights  are  show- 
ing properly  and  before  he  leaves  the  bridge  look  over  the  log- 
and  order-book.  While  in  charge  of  the  watch  see  that  the  proper 
course  is  being  made,  lookout  on  duty,  watchmen  in  cabins  and 
steerage  during  the  night,  that  lights  are  showing  properly,  keep 
a good  lookout  and  call  the  captain  if  the  weather  becomes  tliick. 
if  a light  is  made  unexpectedly,  if  soundings  are  not  about  what 
they  are  supposed  to  be  or  if  in  doubt  about  the  safety  of  the 
ship  in  any  way;  but  in  any  case  call  him  in  time. 


95 


Q.  163.  You  being  the  officer  in  charge  of  a steamer  or  the  of- 
ficer detailed  to  accompany  the  United  States  Steamboat  Inspec- 
tor during  the  inspection  of  the  vessel,  what  would  be  your  duty  ? 
-•ins.  All  licensed  officers  shall  assist  the  inspectors  in  their  exam- 
ination of  any  vessel  to  which  such  licensed  officers  belong,  and 
shall  point  out  all  defects  and  imperfections  known  to  them  in 
the  hull,  equipments,  boilers,  or  machinery  of  such  vessel. 

Q.  164.  How  can  you  test  the  stability  of  a vessel?  Ans.  Place 
a known  weight  on  one  side  of  the  vessel  and  note  the  angle  of 
heel.  Place  an  equal  weight  the  same  distance  from  amidships  on 
the  same  side  and  again  note  the  angle  of  heel.  If  the  second 
weight  heeled  the  ship  a less  number  of  degrees  than  the  first, 
the  stability  is  good.  If  the  same  or  more,  it  is  bad. 

Q.  165.  Y’hat  would  be  your  duty  when  anchored  in  a fairway 
by  necessity?  Ans.  Keep  a good  lookout  and  tend  the  helm  and 
use  power  if  necessary  to  keep  as  much  as  possible  on  the  star- 
board side  of  the  channel  while  steamers  are  passing.  When  sail 
vessels  are  passing,  keep  the  windward  side  of  the  channel. 

Q.  166.  When  two  steam  vessels  meet  in  a narrow  channel  in  a 
tideway  where  one  or  both  must  slow  down  or  stop  their  engines 
to  pass  in  safety,  which  one  has  the  right  of  way?  A«s.  The 
steamer  having  a fair  tide. 


96 


LAWS  RELATING  TO  THE  NAVIGATION  OF  VESSELS  ON 
ALL  HARBORS,  RIVERS,  AND  INLAND  WATERS  OF  THE 
UNITED  STATES,  EXCEPT  THE  GREAT  LAKES  AND 
THEIR  CONNECTING  AND  TRIBUTARY  WATERS  AS  FAR 
EAST  AS  MONTREAL  AND  THE  RED  RIVER  OF  THE 
NORTH  AND  RIVERS  EMPTYING  INTO  THE  GULF  OF 
MEXICO  AND  THEIR  TRIBUTARIES. 


AN  ACT  To  adopt  regulations  for  preventing  collisions  upon  certain 
harbors,  rivers,  and  inland  waters  of  the  United  States. 

Whereas  the  provisions  of  chapter  eight  hundred  and  two  of  the 
laws  of  eighteen  hundred  and  ninety,  and  the  amendments 
thereto,  adopting  regulations  for  preventing  collisions  at  sea, 
apply  to  all  waters  of  the  United  States  connected  with  the  high 
seas  navigable  by  seagoing  vessels,  except  so  far  as  the  naviga- 
tion of  any  harbor,  river,  or  inland  waters  is  regulated  by 
special  rules  duly  made  by  local  authority ; and 

Whereas  it  is  desirable  that  the  regulations  relating  to  the  naviga" 
tioii  of  all  harbors,  rivers,  and  inland  waters  of  the  United 
States,  except  the  Great  Lakes  and  their  connecting  and  trib- 
utary waters  as  far  east  as  Montreal  and  the  Red  River  of  the 
North  and  rivers  emptying  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  their 
tributaries,  shall  be  stated  in  one  Act;  Therefore, 

Be  it  enacted  hy  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives  of  the 
United  States  of  America  in  Congress  assembled,  That  the  follow- 
ing regulations  for  preventing  collisions  shall  be  followed  by  all 
vessels  navigating  all  harbors,  rivers,  and  inland  waters  of  the 


97 


United  States,  except  the  Great  Lakes  and  their  connecting  and 
tributary  waters  as  far  east  as  Montreal  and  the  Eed  River 
of  the  North  and  rivers  emptying  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and 
their  tributaries,  and  are  hereby  declared  special  rules  duly  made 
by  local  authority: 

PRELIMINARY. 

In  the  following  rules  every  steam-vessel  which  is  under  sail 
and  not  under  steam  is  to  be  considered  a sailing-vessel,  and  every 
vessel  under  steam,  whether  under  sail  or  not,  is  to  be  considered 
a steam-vessel. 

The  word  “steam-vessel”  shall  include  any  vessel  propelled  by 
machinery. 

A vessel  is  “under  way,”  within  the  meaning  of  these  rules, 
when  she  is  not  at  anchor,  or  made  fast  to  the  shore,  or  aground. 

RULES  CONCERNING  LIGHTS,  AND  SO  FORTH. 

The  word  “visible”  in  these  rules,  when  applied  to  lights,  shall 
mean  visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere. 

Article  1.  The  rules  concerning  lights  shall  be  complied  with 
in  all  weathers  from  sunset  to  sunrise,  and  during  such  time  no 
other  lights  which  may  be  mistaken  for  the  prescribed  lights  shall 
be  exhibited. 

Art.  2.^  A steam-vessel  when  under  way  shall  carry — (a)  On  or 
in  front  of  the  foremast,  or,  if  a vessel  without  a foremast,  then 
in  the  fore  part  of  the  vessel,  a bright  white  liglit  so  constructed 
as  to  show  an  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  twenty 
points  of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  ten  points  on 
each  side  of  the  vessel,  namely,  from  right  ahead  to  two  points 
abaft  the  beam  on  either  side,  and  of  such  a character  as  to  be 
visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  five  miles. 


’Article  2 is  amended  by  act  of  Congress  approved  June  g,  1910,  effective 
on  and  after  July  g,  iqio,  in  rules  for  lights  required  to  be  carried  by 
every  vessel  propelled  by  machinery  and  not  more  than  65  feet  in  length, 
except  tugboats  and  towboats  propelled  by  steam 


98 


(b)  On  the  starboard  side  a green  light  so  constructed  as  to 
show  an  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points 
of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to 
two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  starboard  side,  and  of  such  a 
character  as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  two  miles. 

(c)  On  the  port  side  a red  light  so  constructed  as  to  show  an 
unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points  of  the 
compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to  two 
points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  port  side,  and  of  such  a character  as 
to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  two  miles. 

(d)  The  said  green  and  red  side-lights  shall  be  fitted  with 
inboard  screens  projecting  at  least  three  feet  forward  from  the 
light,  so  as  to  prevent  these  lights  from  being  seen  across  the 
bow. 

(e)  A sea-going  steam-vessel  when  under  way  may  carry  an 
additional  white  light  similar  in  construction  to  the  light  men- 
tioned in  subdivision  (a).  These  two  lights  shall  be  so  placed 
in  line  with  the  keel  that  one  shall  be  at  least  fifteen  feet  higher 
than  the  other,  and  in  such  a position  with  refeience  to  each  other 
that  tlie  lower  light  shall  be  forward  of  the  upper  one.  The 
vertical  distance  between  these  lights  shall  be  less  than  the 
horizontal  distance. 

(f)  All  steam- vessels  (except  sea-going  vessels  and  ferry-boats), 
shall  carry  in  addition  to  green  and  red  lights  required  by  article 
two  (b),  (e),  and  screens  as  required  by  article  two  (d),  a central 
range  of  two  white  lights ; the  after-light  being  carried  at  an  eleva- 
tion at  least  fifteen  feet  above  the  light  at  the  head  of  the  vessel. 
The  head-light  shall  be  so  constructed  as  to  show  an  unbroken 
light  through  twenty  points  of  the  compass,  namely,  from  right 
ahead  to  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  either  side  of  the  vessel, 
and  the  after-light  so  as  to  show  all  around  the  horizon. 

Art.  3.  A steam-vessel  when  towing  another  vessel  shall,  in 
addition  to  her  side-lights,  carry  two  bright  white  lights  in  a 
vertical  line  one  over  the  other,  not  less  than  three  feet  apart. 


99 


and  when  towing  more  than  one  vessel  shall  carry  an  additional 
bright  white  light  three  feet  above  or  below  such  lights,  if  the 
length  of  the  tow  measuring  from  the  stern  of  the  towing  vessel 
to  the  stern  of  the  last  vessel  towed  exceeds  six  hundred  feet. 
Each  of  these  lights  shall  be  of  the  same  construction  and  char- 
acter, and  shall  be  carried  in  the  same  position  as  the  white  light 
mentioned  in  article  two  (a)  or  the  after  range  light  mentioned 
in  article  two  ( f ) . 

Such  steam-vessel  may  carry  a small  white  light  abaft  the 
funnel  or  aftermast  for  the  vessel  towed  to  steer  by,  but  such 
light  shall  not  be  visible  forward  of  the  beam. 

Art.  o.  a sailing-vessel  under  way  or  being  towed  shall  carry 
the  same  lights  as  are  prescribed  by  article  two  for  a steam-vessel 
under  way,  with  the  exception  of  the  white  lights  mentioned 
therein,  which  they  shall  never  carry. 

Art.  6.  Whenever,  as  in  the  case  of  vessels  of  less  than  ten 
gross  tons  under  way  during  bad  weather,  the  green  and  red  side- 
lights can  not  be  fixed,  these  lights  shall  be  kept  at  hand,  lighted 
and  ready  for  use;  and  shall,  on  the  approach  of  or  to  other 
vessels,  be  exhibited  on  their  respective  sides  in  sufficient  time  to 
prevent  collision,  in  such  manner  as  to  make  them  most  visible, 
and  so  that  the  green  light  shall  not  be  seen  on  the  port  side  nor 
the  red  light  on  the  starboard  side,  nor,  if  practicable,  more  than 
two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  their  respective  sides.  To  make 
the  use  of  these  portable  lights  more  certain  and  easy  the  lanterns 
containing  them  shall  each  be  painted  outside  with  the  color  of 
the  light  they  respectively  contain,  and  shall  be  provided  with 
proper  screens. 

Art.  7.  Rowing  boats,  whether  under  oars  or  sail,  shall  have 
ready  at  hand  a lantern  showing  a white  light  which  shall  be 
temporarily  exhibited  in  sufficient  time  to  prevent  collision. 


100 


Art.  8.^  Pilot-vessels  when  engaged  on  their  station  on  pilotage 
duty  shall  not  show  the  lights  required  for  other  vessels,  but  shall 
carry  a white  light  at  the  masthead,  visible  all  around  the  horizon, 
and  shall  also  exhibit  a flare-up  light  or  flare-up  lights  at  short 
intervals,  which  shall  never  exceed  fifteen  minutes. 

On  the  near  approach  of  or  to  other  vessels  they  shall  have  their 
side-lights  lighted,  ready  for  use,  and  shall  flash  or  show  them  at 
short  intervals,  to  indicate  the  direction  in  which  they  are 
heading,  but  the  green  light  shall  not  be  shown  on  the  port  side 
nor  the  red  light  on  the  starboard  side. 

A pilot-vessel  of  such  a class  as  to  be  obliged  to  go  alongside  of 
a vessel  to  put  a pilot  on  board  may  show  the  white  light  instead 
of  carrying  it  at  the  masthead,  and  may,  instead  of  the  colored 
lights  above  mentioned,  have  at  hand,  ready  for  use,  a lantern 
with  a green  glass  on  the  one  side  and  a red  glass  on  the  other, 
to  be  used  as  prescribed  above. 

Pilot-vessels,  when  not  engaged  on  their  station  on  pilotage 
duty,  shall  carry  lights  similar  to  those  of  other  vessels  of  their 
tonnage. 


^AN  ACT  Relating  to  lights  on  steam  pilot  vessels. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives  of  the  United 
States  of  America  in  Congress  assembled.  That  a_  steam  pilot  vessel,  when 
engaged  on  her  station  on  pilotage  duty  and  in  waters  of  the  United 
States,  and  not  at  anchor,  shall,  in  addition  to  the  lights  required  for  all 
pilot  boats,  carry  at  a distance  of  eight  feet  below  her  white  masthead  light 
a red  light,  visible  all  around  the  horizon  and  of  such  a character  as  to  be 
visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere  at  a distance  of  at  least 
two  miles,  and  also  the  colored  side  lights  required  to  be  carried  by  ves- 
sels when  under  way. 

When  engaged  on  her  station  on  pilotage  duty  and  in  waters  of  the 
United  States,  and  at  anchor,  she  shall  carry  in  addition  to  the  lights 
required  for  all  pilot  boats  the  red  light  above  mentioned,  but  not  the 
colored  side  lights. 

When  not  engaged  on  her  station  on  pilotage  duty,  she  shall  carry  the 
same  lights  as  other  steam  vessels. 

Sec.  2.  That  this  act  shall  be  construed  as  supplementars'  to  article 
eight  of  the  Act  approved  June  seventh,  eighteen  hundred  and  ninety-seven, 
entitled  “An  act  to  adopt  regulations  for  preventing  collisions  upon  cer- 
tain harbors,  rivers,  and  inland  waters  of  the  United  States,”  and  to 
article  eight  of  an  Act  approved  August  nineteenth,  eighteen  hundred  and 
ninety,  entitled  “An  act  to  adopt  regulations  for  preventing  collisions 
at  sea.” 

Sec.  3.  That  this  act  shall  take  effect  on  June  thirtieth,  nineteen 
hundred. 

Approved,  February  ig,  1900. 


101 


Art.  9.  (a)  Fishing-vessels  of  less  than  ten  gross  tons,  when 
under  way  and  when  not  having  their  nets,  trawls,  dredges,  or 
lines  in  the  water,  shall  not  be  obliged  to  carry  the  colored  side- 
lights; but  every  such  vessel  shall,  in  lieu  thereof,  have  ready  at 
hand  a lantern  with  a green  glass  on  one  side  and  a red  glass  on 
the  other  side,  and  on  approaching  to  or  being  approached  by 
another  vessel  such  lantern  shall  be  exhibited  in  sufficient  time  to 
prevent  collision,  so  that  the  green  light  shall  not  be  seen  on  the 
port  side  nor  the  red  light  on  the  starboard  side. 

(b)  All  fishing- vessels  and  fishing-boats  of  ten  gross  tons  or 
upward,  when  under  way  and  when  not  having  their  nets,  trawls, 
dredges,  or  lines  in  the  water,  shall  carry  and  show  the  same 
lights  as  other  vessels  under  way. 

(e)  All  vessels,  when  trawling,  dredging,  or  fishing  with  any 
kind  of  drag-nets  or  lines,  shall  exhibit,  from  some  part  of  the 
vessel  where  they  can  be  best  seen,  two  lights.  One  of  these  lights 
shall  be  red  and  the  other  shall  be  white.  The  red  light  shall  be 
above  the  white  light,  and  shall  be  at  a vertical  distance  from  it 
of  not  less  than  six  feet  and  not  more  than  twelve  feet ; and  the 
horizontal  distance  between  them,  if  any,  shall  not  be  more  than 
ten  feet.  These  two  lights  shall  be  of  such  a character  and  con- 
tained in  lanterns  of  such  construction  as  to  be  visible  all  round 
the  horizon,  the  white  light  a distance  of  not  less  than  three  miles 
and  the  red  light  of  not  less  than  two  miles. 

(d)  Rafts,  or  other  water  craft  not  herein  provided  for,  navi- 
gating by  hand  power,  horse  power,  or  by  the  current  of  the  river, 
shall  carry  one  or  more  good  white  lights,  which  shall  be  placed 
in  such  manner  as  shall  be  prescribed  by  the  Board  of  Supervising 
Inspectors  of  Steam  Vessels. 

ART.  10.  A vessel  which  is  being  overtaken  by  another,  except  a 
steam-vessel  with  an  after  range-light  showing  all  around  the 
horizon,  shall  show  from  her  stern  to  such  last-mentioned  vessel 
a white  light  or  a flare-up  light. 

Art.  11.  A vessel  under  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  in  length 
when  at  anchor  shall  carry  forward,  where  it  can  best  be  seen. 


102 


but  at  a height  not  exceeding  twenty  feet  above  the  hull,  a white 
light,  in  a lantern  so  constructed  as  to  show  a clear,  uniform, 
and  unbroken  light  visible  all  around  the  horizon  at  a distance  of 
at  least  one  mile. 

A vessel  of  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  or  upwards  in  length 
when  at  anchor  shall  carry  in  the  forward  part  of  the  vessel,  at  a 
height  of  not  less  than  twenty  and  not  exceeding  forty  feet  above 
the  hull,  one  such  light,  and  at  or  near  the  stern  of  the  vessel, 
and  at  such  a height  that  it  shall  be  not  less  than  fifteen  feet 
lower  than  the  forward  light,  another  such  light. 

Tlie  length  of  a vessel  shall  be  deemed  to  be  the  length  appearing 
in  her  certificate  of  registry. 

Akt.  12.  Every  vessel  may,  if  necessary,  in  order  to  attract 
attention,  in  addition  to  the  lights  which  she  is  by  these  rules 
required  to  carry,  show  a flare-up  light  or  use  any  detonating 
signal  that  can  not  be  mistaken  for  a distress  signal. 

Art.  13.  Nothing  in  these  rules  shall  interfere  with  the  opera- 
tion of  any  special  rules  made  by  the  Government  of  any  nation 
with  respect  to  additional  station  and  signal  lights  for  two  or 
more  ships  of  war  or  for  vessels  sailing  under  convoy,  or  with  the 
exhibition  of  recognition  sig^ials  adopted  by  shipowners,  which 
have  been  authorized  by  their  respective  Governments,  and  duly 
registered  and  pulilished. 

Art.  14.  a steam-vessel  proceeding  under  sail  only,  but  having 
her  funnel  up,  may  carry  in  daytime,  forward,  where  it  can  best 
be  seen,  one  black  ball  or  shape  two  feet  in  diameter. 

SOUND  SIGNALS  FOR  FOG,  AND  SO  FORTH. 

Art.  15.  All  signals  prescribed  by  this  article  for  vessels  under 
way  shall  be  given : 

1.  By  “steam-vessels”  on  the  whistle  or  siren. 

2.  By  “sailing-vessels”  and  “vessels  towed”  on  the  fog  horn. 

The  words  “prolonged  blast”  used  in  this  article  shall  mean  a 

blast  of  from  four  to  six  seconds  duration. 


103 


A steam-vessel  shall  be  provided  with  an  efficient  whistle  or 
siren,  sounded  by  steam  or  by  some  substitute  for  steam,  so  placed 
that  the  sound  may  not  be  intercepted  by  any  obstruction,  and 
with  an  efficient  fog  horn ; also  with  an  efficient  bell.  A sailing- 
vessel  of  twenty  tons  gross  tonnage  or  upward  shall  be  provided 
with  a similar  fog  horn  and  bell. 

In  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rainstorms,  whether  by  day 
or  night,  the  signals  described  in  this  article  shall  be  used  as 
follows,  namely: 

(a)  A steam-vessel  under  way  shall  sound,  at  intervals  of  not 
more  than  one  minute,  a prolonged  blast. 

(c)  A sailing-vessel  under  way  shall  sound,  at  intervals  of  not 
more  than  one  minute,  when  on  the  starboard  tack,  one  blast; 
when  on  the  port  tack,  two  blasts  in  succession,  and  when  with 
the  wind  abaft  the  beam,  three  blasts  in  succession. 

(d)  A vessel  when  at  anchor  shall,  at  intervals  of  not  more 
than  one  minute,  ring  the  bell  rapidly  for  about  five  seconds. 

(e)  A steam-vessel  when  towing,  shall,  instead  of  the  signals 
prescribed  in  subdivision  (a)  of  this  article,  at  intervals  of  not 
more  than  one  minute,  sound  three  blasts  in  succession,  namely, 
one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  two  short  blasts.  A vessel  towed 
may  give  this  signal  and  she  shall  not  give  any  other. 

(f)  All  rafts  or  other  water  craft,  not  herein  provided  for, 
navigating  by  hand  power,  horse  power,  or  by  the  current  of  the 
river,  shall  sound  a blast  of  the  fog-horn,  or  equivalent  signal, 
at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute. 

SPEED  OF  SHIPS  TO  BE  MODERATE  IN  FOG,  AND  SO  FORTH. 

Art.  If).  Every  vessel  shall,  in  a fog.  mist,  falling  snow,  or 
heavy  rainstorms,  go  at  a moderate  speed,  having  careful  regard 
to  the  existing  circumstances  and  conditions. 

A steam-vessel  hearing,  apparently  forward  of  her  beam,  the 
fog-signal  of  a vessel  the  position  of  which  is  not  ascertained  shall, 
so  far  as  the  circumstances  of  the  case  admit,  stop  her  engines, 
and  then  navigate  with  caution  until  danger  of  collision  is  over. 


104 


STEERING  AND  SAILING  RLTLES. 

PRELIMINAKY — RISK  OF  COLLISION. 

Risk  of  collision  can,  when  circumstances  permit,  be  ascertained 
by  carefully  watching  the  compass  bearing  of  an  approaching 
vessel.  If  the  bearing  does  not  appreciably  change,  such  risk 
should  be  deemed  to  exist. 

Art.  17.  When  two  sailing-vessels  are  approaching  one  another, 
so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  one  of  them  shall  keep  out  of 
the  way  of  the  other  as  follows,  namely: 

(a)  A vessel  which  is  running  free  shall  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  a vessel  which  is  close-hauled. 

(b)  A vessel  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  port  tack  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  a vessel  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  starboard 
tack. 

(c)  When  both  are  running  free,  with  the  wind  on  different 
sides,  the  vessel  which  has  the  wind  on  the  port  side  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

(d)  When  both  are  running  free,  with  the  wind  on  the  same 
side,  the  vessel  which  is  to  the  windward  shall  keep  out  of  the 
way  of  the  vessel  which  is  to  the  leeward. 

(e)  A vessel  which  has  the  wind  aft  shall  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  the  other  vessel. 

Art.  18.  Rule  I.  When  steam-vessels  are  approaching  each 
other  head  and  head,  that  is,  end  on,  or  nearly  so,  it  shall  be  the 
duty  of  each  to  pass  on  the  port  side  of  the  other ; and  either 
vessel  shall  give,  as  a signal  of  her  intention,  one  short  and 
distinct  blast  of  her  whistle,  which  the  other  vessel  shall  answer 
promptly  by  a similar  blast  of  her  whistle,  and  thereupon  such 
vessels  shall  pass  on  the  port  side  of  each  other.  But  if  the 
courses  of  such  vessels  are  so  far  on  the  starboard  of  each  other 
as  not  to  be  considered  as  meeting  head  and  head,  either  vessel 
shall  immediately  give  two  short  and  distinct  blasts  of  her 
whistle,  which  the  other  vessel  shall  answer  promptly  by  two 


105 


similar  blasts  of  her  whistle,  and  they  shall  pass  on  the  starboard 
side  of  each  other. 

The  foregoing  only  applies  to  cases  where  vessels  are  meeting 
end  on  or  nearly  end  on.  in  such  a manner  as  to  involve  risk  of 
collision ; in  other  words,  to  cases  in  which,  by  day.  each  vessel 
sees  the  masts  of  the  other  in  a line,  or  nearly  in  a line,  with  her 
own,  and  by  night  to  cases  in  which  each  vessel  is  in  such  a 
position  as  to  see  both  the  side-lights  of  the  other. 

It  does  not  apply  by  day  to  cases  in  which  a vessel  sees  another 
ahead  crossing  her  own  course,  or  by  night  to  cases  where  the  red 
light  of  one  vessel  is  opposed  to  the  red  light  of  the  other,  or 
where  the  green  light  of  one  vessel  is  opposed  to  the  green  light 
of  the  other,  or  where  a red  light  without  a green  light  or  a green 
light  without  a red  light,  is  seen  ahead,  or  where  both  green  and 
red  lights  are  seen  anywhere  but  ahead. 

Eule  111.  If,  when  steam-vessels  are  approaching  each  other, 
either  vessel  fails  to  understand  the  course  or  intention  of  the 
other,  from  any  cause,  the  vessel  so  in  doubt  shall  immediately 
signify  the  same  by  giving  several  short  and  rapid  blasts,  not 
less  than  four,  of  the  steam-whistle. 

Rule  V.  lYhenever  a steam-vessel  is  nearing  a short  bend  or 
curve  in  the  channel,  where,  from  the  height  of  the  banks  or  other 
cause,  a steam-vessel  approaching  from  the  opposite  direction  can 
not  be  seen  for  a distance  of  half  a mile,  such  steam-vessel,  when 
she  shall  have  arrived  within  half  a mile  of  such  curve  or  bend, 
shall  give  a signal  by  one  long  blast  of  the  steam  whistle,  which 
signal  shall  be  answered  by  a similar  blast,  given  by  any 
approaching  steam-vessel  that  may  be  within  hearing.  Should 
such  signal  be  so  answered  by  a steam-vessel  upon  the  farther  side 
of  such  bend,  then  the  usual  signals  for  meeting  and  passing 
shall  immediately  be  given  and  answered;  but,  if  the  first  alarm 
signal  of  such  vessel  be  not  answered,  she  is  to  consider  the 
channel  clear  and  govern  herself  accordingly. 

When  steam-vessels  are  moved  from  their  docks  or  berths,  and 
other  boats  are  liable  to  pass  frojn  any  direction  toward  them, 


IOC 


they  shall  give  the  same  signal  as  in  the  ease  of  vessels  meeting 
at  a bend,  hut  immediately  after  clearing  the  berths  so  as  to  be 
fully  in  sight  they  shall  be  governed  by  the  steering  and  sailing 
rules. 

Rule  VIII.  When  steam-vessels  are  running  in  the  same  direc- 
tion, and  the  vessel  which  is  astern  shall  desire  to  pass  on  the 
right  or  starboard  hand  of  the  vessel  ahead,  she  shall  give  one 
short  blast  of  the  steam-whistle,  as  a signal  of  such  desire,  and 
if  the  vessel  ahead  answers  with  one  blast,  she  shall  put  her  helm 
to  port;  or  if  she  shall  desire  to  pass  on  the  left  or  port  side  of 
the  vessel  ahead,  she  shall  give  two  short  blasts  of  the  steam- 
whistle  as  a signal  of  such  desire,  and  if  the  vessel  ahead  answers 
with  two  Idasts,  sliall  put  her  helm  to  starboard;  or  if  the  vessel 
aiiead  does  not  think  it  safe  for  the  vessel  astern  to  attempt  to 
pass  at  that  point,  she  shall  immediately  signify  the  same  by 
giving  several  short  and  rapid  blasts  of  the  steam-wliistle,  not 
less  than  four,  and  under  no  circumstances  shall  the  vessel  astern 
attempt  to  pass  the  vessel  aliead  until  such  time  as  they  liave 
reached  a point,  where  it  can  be  safely  done,  when  said  vessel 
ahead  shall  signify  her  willingness  by  blowing  the  proper  signals. 
The  vessel  ahead  shall  in  no  case  attempt  to  cross  the  bow  or 
crowd  upon  the  course  of  the  passing  vessel. 

Rule  IX.  The  whistle  signals  provided  in  the  rules  under  this 
article,  for  steam-vessels  meeting,  passing,  or  overtaking,  are 
never  to  be  used  except  when  steamers  are  in  sight  of  each  other, 
and  the  course  and  position  of  each  can  be  determined  in  the 
daytime  by  a sight  of  the  vessel  itself,  or  by  night  by  seeing  its 
signal  lights.  In  fog,  mist,  falling  snow  or  heavy  rainstorms, 
wlien  vessels  can  not  so  see  each  other,  fog-signals  only  must  be 
given. 

Art.  10.  When  two  steam-vessels  are  crossing,  so  as  to  involve 
risk  of  collision,  the  vessel  which  has  the  other  on  her  own  star- 
board side  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

Art.  ‘20.  When  a steam-vessel  and  a sailing-vessel  are  proceed- 


107 


ing  in  such  directions  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  the  steam- 
vessel  sliall  keep  out  of  tlie  way  of  the  sailing-vessel. 

Akt.  21.  Where,  by  any  of  these  rules,  one  of  the  two  vessels  is 
to  keep  out  of  the  way,  the  other  shall  keep  her  course  and  speed. 

Aut.  22.  Every  vessel  which  is  directed  by  these  rules  to  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  another  vessel  shall,  if  the  circumstances  of  the 
case  admit,  avoid  crossing  ahead  of  the  other. 

Art.  2.3.  Every  steam-vessel  which  is  directed  by  these  rules  to 
keep  out  of  the  way  of  another  vessel  shall,  on  approaching  her, 
if  necessary,  slacken  her  speed  or  stop  or  reverse. 

Art.  24.  Notwithstanding  anything  contained  in  these  rules 
every  vessel,  overtaking  any  other,  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of 
the  overtaken  vessel. 

Every  vessel  coming  up  with  another  vessel  from  any  direction 
more  than  two  points  abaft  her  beam,  that  is,  in  such  a position, 
with  reference  to  the  vessel  which  she  is  overtaking  that  at  night 
she  would  be  unable  to  see  either  of  that  vessel’s  side-lights,  shall 
be  deemed  to  be  an  overtaking  vessel ; and  no  subsequent  altera- 
tion of  the  bearing  between  the  two  vessels  shall  make  the  over- 
taking vessel  a crossing  vessel  within  the  meaning  of  these  rules, 
or  relieve  her  of  the  duty  of  keeping  clear  of  the  overtaken  vessel 
until  she  is  Anally  past  and  clear. 

As  by  day  the  overtaking  vessel  can  not  always  know  with  cer- 
tainty whether  she  is  forward  of  or  abaft  this  direction  from  the 
other  vessel  she  should,  if  in  doubt,  assume  that  she  is  an  over- 
taking vessel  and  keep  out  of  the  way. 

Art.  25.  In  narrow  channels  every  steam-vessel  shall,  when  it  is 
safe  and  practicable,  keep  to  that  side  of  the  fair-way  or  mid- 
channel which  lies  on  the  starboard  side  of  such  vessel. 

Art.  26.  Sailing-vessels  under  way  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of 
sailing-vessels  or  boats  fishing  with  nets,  or  lines,  or  trawls.  This 
rule  shall  not  give  to  any  vessel  or  boat  engaged  in  fishing  the 
right  of  obstructing  a fair-way  used  by  vessels  other  than  fishing- 
vessels  or  boats. 


108 


Art.  27.  In  obeying  and  construing  those  rules  due  regard  shall 
be  had  to  all  dangers  of  navigation  and  collision,  and  to  any 
special  circumstances  which  may  render  a departure  from  the 
above  rules  necessary  in  order  to  avoid  immediate  danger. 

SOUND  SIGNALS  FOR  VESSELS  IN  SIGHT  OF  ONE  ANOTHER. 

Art.  28.  When  vessels  are  in  sight  of  one  another  a steam- 
vessel  under  way  whose  engines  are  going  at  full  speed  astern 
sliall  indicate  that  fact  by  three  short  blasts  on  the  whistle. 

NO  VESSEL  UNDER  ANY  CIRCUMSTANCES  TO  NEGLECT  PROPER 
PRECAUTIONS. 

Art.  20.  Nothing  in  these  rules  shall  exonerate  any  vessel,  or 
the  owner  or  master  or  crew  thereof,  from  the  consequences  of  any 
neglect  to  carry  lights  or  signals,  or  of  any  neglect  to  keep  a 
proper  lookout,  or  of  the  neglect  of  any  precaution  which  may  be 
required  by  the  ordinary  practice  of  seamen,  or  by  the  special 
circumstances  of  the  case. 

Art.  30.  The  exhibition  of  any  light  on  board  of  a vessel  of  war 
of  the  United  States  or  a revenue  cutter  may  be  suspended  when- 
ever, in  the  opinion  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy,  the  commander 
in  chief  of  a squadron,  or  the  commander  of  a vessel  acting  singly, 
the  special  character  of  the  service  may  require  it. 

DISTRE.SS  SIGNALS. 

Art.  31.  When  a vessel  is  in  distress  and  requires  assistance 
from  other  vessels  or  from  the  shore  the  following  shall  be  the 
signals  to  be  used  or  displayed  by  her,  either  together  or 
separately,  namely: 


IN  THE  DAYTUIE. 

A continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus,  or  firing 


a gun. 


109 


AT  NIGHT. 

First.  Flames  on  tlie  vessel  as  from  a burning  tar  barrel,  oil 
l)arrel,  and  so  forth. 

Second.  A continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  ap2Jaratus, 
or  firing  a gun. 

Sec.  2.^  Tliat  the  supervising  inspectors  of  steam-vessels  and 
the  Supervising  Inspector  General  shall  establish  such  rules  to  be 
observed  by  steam-vessels  in  passing  each  other  and  as  to  the 
lights  to  be  carried  by  ferry-boats  and  by  barges  and  canal  boats 
when  in  tow  of  steam-vessels,  and  as  to  the  lights  and  day  signals 
to  be  carried  by  vessels,  dredges  of  all  types,  and  vessels  working 
on  wrecks  by  other  obstruction  to  navigation  or  moored  for  sub- 
marine oiierations,  or  made  fast  to  a sunken  object  wliich  may 
drift  with  the  tide  or  be  towed,  not  inconsistent  with  the  j)i’o- 
visions  of  this  Act,  as  they  from  time  to  time  may  deem  necessary 
for  safety,  which  rules  when  approved  by  the  Secretary  of  Com- 
merce are  hereby  declared  special  rules  duly  made  by  local  author- 
ity, as  jirovided  for  in  article  thirty  of  chajiter  eight  hundred  and 
two  of  the  laws  of  eighteen  hundred  and  ninety.  Two  printed 
copies  of  such  rules  shall  he  furnished  to  such  ferry-boats,  barges, 
dredges,  canal  boats,  vessels  working  on  wrecks,  and  steam-vessels, 
which  rules  shall  he  kept  posted  up  in  consjiicuous  j)laces  in  such 
vessels,  barges,  dredges,  and  boats. 

Sec.  3.  Tliat  every  pilot,  engineer,  mate,  or  master  of  any  steam- 
vessel,  and  every  master  or  mate  of  any  barge  or  canal-boat,  who 
neglects  or  refuses  to  observe  the  provisions  of  this  Act,  or  the 
regulations  established  in  jnirsuance  of  the  {ireceding  section, 
shall  be  liable  to  a penalty  of  fifty  dollars,  and  for  all  damages 
sustained  by  any  passenger  in  his  jierson  or  baggage  by  such 
neglect  or  refusal:  Provided,  That  nothing  herein  shall  relieve 
any  vessel,  owner  or  corporation  from  any  liability  incurred  by 
reason  of  such  neglect  or  refusal. 


*As  amended  by  act  of  Congress  approved  May  as,  1914. 


110 


Sec.  4.  That  every  vessel  that  shall  be  navigated  without  com- 
plying with  the  provisions  of  this  Act  shall  be  liable  to  a penalty 
of  two  hundred  dollars,  one-half  to  go  to  the  informer,  for  which 
sum  tlie  vessel  so  navigated  shall  be  liable  and  may  be  seized  and 
proceeded  against  by  action  in  any  district  court  of  the  United 
States  having  jurisdiction  of  the  offense. 

Sec.  5.  That  sections  forty-two  hundred  and  thirty-three  and 
forty-four  hundred  and  twelve  (with  the  regulations  made  in 
pursuance  thereof,  except  the  rules  and  regulations  for  the  govern- 
ment of  2^ilots  of  steamers  navigating  the  Red  River  of  the  Xorth 
and  rivers  emptying  into  tlie  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  their  tributaries, 
and  except  the  rules  for  the  Great  Lakes  and  their  connecting  and 
tributary  waters  as  far  east  as  INIontreal),  and  forty-four  hundred 
and  thirteen  of  the  Revised  Statutes  of  the  United  States,  and 
eliaj^ter  two  hundred  and  two  of  the  laws  of  eighteen  hundred  and 
ninety-three,  and  sections  one  and  three  of  chapter  one  hundred 
and  two  of  tlie  laws  of  eighteen  hundred  and  ninety-five,  and 
sections  five,  twelve,  and  thirteen  of  the  Act  approved  March 
third,  eighteen  hundred  and  ninety-seven,  entitled  “An  Act  to 
amend  the  laws  relating  to  navigation,”  and  all  amendments 
thereto,  are  hereby  repealed  so  far  as  the  harbors,  rivers,  and 
inland  waters  aforesaid  ( exeept  the  Great  Lakes  and  their  con- 
necting and  triljutarv  waters  as  far  east  as  Montreal  and  the  Red 
River  of  the  Xorth  and  rivers  emptying  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
and  their  tributaries)  are  concerned. 

Sec.  (i.  That  this  Act  shall  take  effect  four  months  from  the 
date  of  its  approval. 

Aiiproved.  June  7,  1897. 


Ill 


BOUNDARY  LINES  OF  THE  HIGH  SEAS. 


The  following  lines  dividing  the  high  seas  from  rivers,  harbors, 
and  inland  waters  are  hereby  designated  and  defined  pursuant  to 
section  2 of  the  act  of  Congress  of  February  19,  1895.  Waters  in- 
shore of  the  lines  here  laid  down  are  “inland  waters,”  and  ujjon 
them  the  inland  rules  and  pilot  rules  made  in  pursuance  thereof 
apply.  LTpon  the  high  seas,  viz.,  waters  outside  of  the  lines  here 
laid  down,  the  international  rules  apply.  Tlie  following  lines  shall 
be  effective  on  and  after  March  1,  1913: 

Inland  icatcrs  on  the  Atlantic,  Pacific,  and  Gulf  coasts  of  the 
United  States  tvhere  the  Inland  Rules  of  the  Road  are  to  he 
followed;  and  inland  icaters  of  the  United  States  hordering  on 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico  ichere  the  inland  Rules  of  the  Road  or  Pilot 
Rules  for  Western  Rivers  are  to  he  followed. 

[All  bearings  are  in  degrees  true  and  points  magnetic,  and  are 
given  approximately;  distances  in  nautical  miles.] 

CuTLEU  (Little  River)  Harbor,  Me. — A line  drawn  from  Long 
Point  220°  (SW.  by  W.  % W. ) to  Little  River  Head. 

Little  Machias  Bay,  Machias  Bay,  Englishman  Bay, 
Chandler  Bay,  IMoosabec  Reach,  Pleasant  Bay'.  Narraguagus 
Bay,  and  Pigeon  Hill  Bay,  Me. — A line  drawn  from  Little  River 
Head  232°  (WSW.  14  W.)  to  the  outer  side  of  Old  Man:  thence 
234°  (WSW.  % W.)  to  the  outer  side  of  Doul)le  Shot  Islands; 
thence  245°  (W.  % S.)  to  Libby  Islands  Lightliouse;  thence 
231%°  (WSW.  % W.)  to  Moose  Peak  Lighthouse;  thence  233° 
(WSW.  14  W. ) to  Little  Pond  Head;  from  Pond  Point,  Great 
Wass  Island,  239°  (WSW.  % W.)  to  outer  side  of  Crumple 
Island;  thence  248°  (W.  % S.)  to  Petit  Manan  Lighthouse. 


112 


AtL  Harbors  on  the  Coast  of  Maine,  New  Hampshire,  and 
Massachusetts  Between  Petit  Manan  Lighthouse,  Me.,  and 
Cape  Ann  Lighthouses,  Mass. — A line  drawn  from  Petit  Manan 
Lighthouse  205%°  ( SW.  % S. ),  261/2  miles,  to  Mount  Desert 
Lighthouse;  thence  2501/2°  (W.  % S. ) , about  3.3  miles,  to  Matini- 
cus  Rock  Lighthouses;  thence  267%°  (WNW.  Yg  W.),  231/2  miles, 
to  Monhegan  Island  Lighthouse;  thence  260°  (W.  % N.),  19% 
miles,  to  Seguin  Lighthouse;  thence  233°  (WSW.),  18%  miles, 
to  Cape  Elizabeth  Lightvessel,  No.  74;  thence  214%°  (SW.  % M’.), 
29%  miles,  to  Boon  Island  Lighthouse;  thence  2101/2°  (SW.),  11 
miles,  to  Anderson  Ledge  Spindle,  off  Isles  of  Shoals  Lighthouse; 
thence  176%°  (S.  % W.),  lO/g  miles,  to  Cape  Ann  Lighthouses, 
Mass. 

Boston  Harbor. — From  Eastern  Point  Lighthouse  215°  (SW. 
% W. ),  15%  miles,  to  The  Graves  Lighthouse;  thence  139%° 
(SSE.  % E.),  7%  miles,  to  Minots  Ledge  Lighthouse. 

All  Harbors  in  Cape  Cod  Bay,  Mass. — A line  drawn  from 
Plymouth  (Gurnet)  Lighthouses  77%°  (E.  % S.),  16%  miles,  to 
Race  Point  Lighthouse. 

Nantucket  Sound,  Vineyard  Sound,  Buzzards  Bay,  Narra- 
gansett  Bay,  Block  Island  Sound,  and  Easterly  Entrance  to 
Long  Island  Sound. — A line  drawn  from  Chatham  Lighthouses, 
Mass.,  146°  (S.  by  E.  Vg  E.),  4%  miles,  to  Pollock  Rip  Shoals 
Lightvessel,  No.  73;  thence  142°  (SSE.  % E.),  12%  miles,  to 
Great  Round  Shoal  Entrance  Gas,  Whistling,  and  Submarine  Bell 
Buoy  (PS)  ; thence  229°  (SW.  by  W.  % W.),  14Y2  miles,  to 
Sankaty  Head  Lighthouse ; from  Smith  Point,  Nantucket  Island. 
265°  (W.  % N.),  25%  miles,  to  southeasterly  point  No  Mans 
Land;  from  westerly  point  No  IMans  Land,  359°  (N.  by  E.),  5% 
miles,  to  Gay  Head  Lighthouse;  thence  250%°  (W.  % S.).  34% 
miles,  to  Block  Island  Southeast  Lighthouse;  thence  250%° 
(W.  % S. ),  14%  miles,  to  Montauk  Point  Lighthouse,  on  the 
easterly  end  of  Long  Island.  N.  Y. 

New  York  Harbor. — A line  drawn  from  Rockaway  Point  Life- 


113 


Saving  Station  16714°  (S.  14  E.),  614  miles,  to  Ambrose  Channel 
Lightvessel,  ISTo.  87;  thence  23814°  (WSW.),  814  miles  to  Nave- 
sink  (southerly)  Lighthouse. 

Philadelphia  Hap.bor  and  Delaware  Bay.— A line  drawn 
from  Cape  May  Lighthouse  200°  (SSW.  % IT.),  8%  miles,  to 
Overfalls  Lightvessel,  No.  60;  thence  24614°  (WSW.  14  W. ),  3% 
miles,  to  Cape  Henlopen  Lighthouse. 

Baltimore  Harbor  and  Chesapeake  Bat. — A line  drawn  from 
Cape  Charles  Lighthouse  18814°  (S.  by  W.  % W. ),  10  miles,  to 
Outer  Entrance  Whistling  Buoy,  2;  thence  241%°  (SW.  by  W. 
% W. ) , 4 miles,  to  Cape  Henry  Lighthouse. 

Charleston  Harbor.- — A line  drawn  from  Ferris  Wheel,  on  Isle 
of  Palms,  154°  (SSE.  % E.),  7 miles,  to  Charleston  Lightvessel, 
No.  34;  thence  259°  (W.  % S.),  through  Charleston  Whistling 
Buoy  6C,  7%  miles,  until  Charleston  Lighthouse  bears  350° 
(N.  ■%  W. ) ; thence  270°  (W.),  2%  miles,  to  the  beach  of  Folly 
Island. 

Savannah  Harbor  and  Calibogue  Sound. — A line  drawn  from 
Braddock  Point,  Hilton  Head  Island,  149°  (SSE.  % E.),  9% 
miles,  to  Tybee  Gas  and  Whistling  Buoy,  T (PS)  ; thence  270° 
(W.)  to  the  beach  of  TVbee  Island. 

St.  Simon  Sound  (Brunswick  Harbor)  and  St.  Andrew 
Sound. — From  hotel  on  beach  of  St.  Simon  Island  mile  60° 
(NE.  by  E.  % E.)  from  St.  Simon  Lighthouse,  130%°  (SE.  % 
E.),  6%  miles,  to  St.  Simon  Whistling  Buoy;  thence  192° 
(S.  by  W.),  8%  miles,  to  St.  Andrew  Sound  Bar  Buoy  (PS); 
thence  270°  (W.  % S.),  4%  miles,  to  the  shore  of  Little  Cumber- 
land Island. 

St.  Johns  River,  Fla. — A straight  line  from  the  outer  end  of 
the  northerly  jetty  to  the  outer  end  of  the  southerly  jetty. 

Florida  Reefs  and  Keys. — A line  drawn  from  the  easterly  end 
of  the  northerly  jetty,  at  the  entrance  to  the  dredged  channel  % 
mile  northerly  of  Norris  Cut,  114%°  (ESE.),  1%  miles,  to  Florida 


114 


Reefs  North  End  Beacon,  W.;  thence  178%“  (S.  % E.).  7%  miles, 
to  Biscayne  Bay  Sea  Bell  Buoy,  1 ; thence  181%°  (S. ),  2%  miles, 
to  Fowey  Rocks  Lighthouse;  thence  188°  (S.  i/j  W.),  0%  miles,  to 
Triumph  Reef  Beacon.  O;  thence  193°  (S. 'by  W.),  4%.  miles,  to 
Ajax  Reef  Beacon.  M;  thence  1941/2°  ( S.  by  W.  % W.),  2 miles, 
to  Pacific  Reef  Beacon,  L;  thence  196V2°  (S.  by  lY.  % W.),  o 
miles,  to  Turtle  Harbor  Sea  Buoy,  2;  thence  210°  ( SSW.  Vz  W.), 
4yg  miles,  to  Carysfort  Reef  Lighthouse;  thence  2091/2°  (SSW. 
% W. ),  5%  miles,  to  Elbow  Reef  Beacon,  J;  thence  218°  (SW. 
% S. ),  7%  miles,  to  French  Reef  Beacon,  G;  thence  2201/2° 
(SW.  1/2  S. ),  2 miles,  to  Molasses  Reef  Beacon,  T;  thence  234%° 
(SW.  % W. ),  6 miles,  to  Conch  Reef  Beacon.  E;  thence  23.5°  (SW. 
% W. ) through  Crocker  Reef  Beacon,  D,  10%  miles,  to  Alligator 
Reef  Lighthouse;  thence  238°  (SW.  by  W.),  9 miles,  to  Tennessee 
Reef  Beacon,  7;  thence  222%°  (SW.  14  S.),  2 miles,  to  Tennessee 
Reef  Buoy,  4;  thence  251°  (WSW.  i/g  W.),  lOVi  miles,  to  Coffins 
Patches  Beacon,  C;  thence  247°  ( SW.  by  W.  % W. ) , 8%  miles, 
to  Sombrero  Key  Lighthouse;  thence  250°  (WSW.),  2%  miles,  to 
Sombrero  Key  Turn  Buoy  (PS)  ; tlience  253°  (WSW.  % W.).  fi% 
miles,  to  Bahia  Honda  Sea  Buoy  (PS);  thence  2551/2°  (WSW. 
V2  W.),  7%  miles,  to  Looe  Key  Beacon,  6;  thence  257i->°  (WSW. 
% W.),  0%  miles,  to  American  Shoal  Lighthouse;  thence  253%° 
(WSW.  % W. ) , 2%  miles,  to  Maryland  Shoal  Beacon,  S:  thence 
259°  (WSW’.  % W.),  5%  miles,  to  Eastern  Sambo  Beacon,  A; 
thence  250%°  (WSW.  % W.),  2%  miles,  to  Western  Sambo 
Beacon,  R;  thence  252%°  (WSW.  % W.),  1%  miles,  to  Western 
Sambo  Buoy,  2;  thence  201%°  (W.  by  S.),  through  Ship  Channel 
Shoal  Beacon,  5,  3%  miles,  to  iMain  Ship  Channel  Entrance  Bar 
Buoy  (PS)  ; thence  259yo°  (WSW.  ■%  W. ).  2%  miles,  to  Eastern 
Dry  Rocks  Beacon.  4:  thence  250%°  (WSW.  % W.).  1%  miles, 
to  Sand  Key  Lighthouse:  thence  201°  (W.  by  S.).  2%  miles,  to 
Western  Dry  Rocks  Beacon.  2:  thence  208%°  (W.  % S.).  3% 
miles,  through  Satan  Shoal  Buoy  (HS)  to  Vestal  Shoal  Buoy,  1; 
thence  273%°  (W.  % N. ),  5%  miles,  to  Coal  Bin  Rock  Buoy 
(HS);  thence  324%°  (XW.  % X.),  7%  miles,  to  Conch  Key; 
from  northwesterly  point  Marquesas  Keys  01%°  (XE.  by  E. 


115 


’4  E•)^  4i/g  miles,  to  North  Entrance  Buoy  (PS),  Boca  Grande 
Channel;  thence  84°  (E.  % N. ),  0%  miles,  to  Northwest  Channel 
Entrance  Bell  Buoy  (PS),  Northwest  Channel  into  Key  West; 
thence  6844°  (NE.  by  E.  Yg  E.),  231/2  miles,  to  northerly  side  of 
Content  Keys;  thence  48%°  (NE.  % E.),  29%  miles,  to  East 
Cape,  Cape  Sable. 

Charlotte  Harbor  and  Punta  Gorda,  Fla. — Eastward  of  En- 
trance Bell  Buoy  (PS),  off  Boca  Grande,  and  in  Charlotte  Har- 
bor, in  Pine  Island  Sound  and  Matlacha  Pass.  Pilot  Rules  for 
Western  Rivers  apply  in  Peace  and  Myacca  Rivers  north  of  a 
250°  and  70°  (WSW.  and  ENE.)  line  through  Mangrove  Point 
Light;  and  in  Caloosahatchee  River  northward  of  the  steamboat 
wharf  at  Puntarasa. 

TAjrPA  Bay  and  Tributaries,  Fla. — From  the  southerly  end  of 
Long  Key  24544°  (SW.  by  W.  % W.),  3 miles,  to  Entrance  Gas 
and  Whistling  Buoy  (PS)  ; thence  128%°  (SE.  % E. ),  6%  miles, 
to  Bar  Bell  Buoy  (PS)  at  the  entrance  to  Southwest  Channel; 
thence  1021/2°  (E.  Yg  S.),  2%  miles,  to  the  house  on  the  north 
end  of  Anna  Maria  Key.  Pilot  Rules  for  Western  Rivers  apply  in 
Manatee  River  inside  Entrance  Buoy  (PS)  ; in  Hillsboro  River 
inside  Barrel  Stake  Beacon. 

St.  George  Sound,  Apalachicola  Bay,  Carrabelle,  and  Apa- 
lachicola Rivers,  and  St.  Vincent  Sound,  Fla. — North  of  a line 
from  Lighthouse  Point  246°  (SW.  by  W.  % W.),  I344  miles,  to 
southeasterly  end  of  Dog  Island;  to  northward  of  East  Pass  Bell 
Buoy  (PS)  at  the  entrance  to  East  Pass,  and  inside  West  Pass 
Bell  Buoy  (PS)  at  the  seaward  entrance  to  West  Pass.  Pilot 
Rules  for  Western  Rivers  apply  in  Carrabelle  River  and  when  on 
the  range  and  crossing  the  bar  at  the  entrance;  in  Apalachicola 
River  and  northward  of  Five-Foot  Lump  Buoy,  5,  when  crossing 
till'  bar. 

Pensacola  Harbor. — From  Caucus  Cut  Entrance  Whistling 
Buoy  (PS)  8°  (N.  % E.)  tangent  to  easterly  side  of  Fort  Pickens’ 
to  the  shore  of  Santa  Rosa  Island,  and  from  the  Whistling  Buoy 
northward  in  the  buoyed  channel  through  Caucus  Shoal. 


116 


Mobile  Harbor  and  Bay. — From  Outer  Whistling  Buoy  (PS) 
40°  (NE.  by  N. ) to  shore  of  Mobile  Point,  and  from  the  Whistling 
Buoy  320°  (NW.)  to  the  shore  of  Dauphin  Island.  Pilot  Rules 
for  Western  Rivers  apply  in  Mobile  River  above  Battery  Gladden 
Light. 

Sounds,  Lakes,  and  Harbors  on  the  Coasts  of  Alabama, 
Mississippi,  and  Louisiana,  Between  Mobile  Bay  Entrance 
AND  THE  Delta  of  the  Mississippi  River. — From  Sand  Island 
Lighthouse  250°  (WSW.  % W.),  43i/^  miles,  to  Chandeleur  Light- 
house; westward  of  Chandeleur  and  Errol  Islands,  and  west  of  a 
line  drawn  from  the  southwesterly  point  of  Errol  Island  182° 
(S.  14  E.),  2314  miles,  to  Pass  a Loutre  Lighthouse.  Pilot  Rules 
for  Western  Rivers  apply  in  Pascagoula  River,  and  in  the  dredged 
cut  at  the  entrance  to  the  river,  above  Pascagoula  River  Entrance 
Light,  A,  marking  the  entrance  to  the  dredged  cut. 

New  Orleans  Harbor  and  the  Delta  of  the  Mississippi 
River. — Inshore  of  a line  drawn  from  the  outermost  mud  lump 
showing  above  low  water  at  the  entrance  to  Pass  a Loutre  to  a 
similar  lump  off  the  entrance  to  Northeast  Pass ; thence  to  a sim- 
ilar lump  off  the  entrance  to  Southeast  Pass;  thence  to  the  outer- 
most aid  to  navigation  off  the  entrance  to  South  Pass ; thence  to 
the  outermost  aid  to  navigation  off  the  entrance  to  Southwest 
Pass;  thence  northerly,  about  18%  miles,  to  the  westerly  point 
of  the  entrance  to  Jaque  Bay. 

Sabine  Pass,  Tex. — Pilot  Rules  for  Western  Rivers  apply  to 
Sabine  Pass  northward  of  Sabine  Pass  Whistling  Buoy  (PS),  and 
in  Sabine  Lake  and  its  tributaries.  Outside  of  this  buoy  the 
International  Rules  apply. 

Galveston  Harbor. — A line  drawn  from  Galveston  North  Jetty 
Light  164°  (SSE.  i/g  E.),  2%  miles,  to  Galveston  Bar  Gas  Buoy 
(PS)  ; tlience  312yo°  (NW.  % W.),  !■%  miles,  to  Galveston  (S.) 
Jetty  Light. 

Brazos  River,  Tex. — Pilot  Rules  for  Western  Rivers  apply  in 
the  Brazos  River  above  the  outer  ends  of  the  jetties.  Inter- 
national Rules  apply  outside  the  ends  of  the  jetties. 


117 


San  Diego  Harbor. — A line  drawn  from  southerly  tower  Coro- 
nado Hotel  22114°  (SSW.  % W. ),  4%  miles,  to  Outside  Bar 
Whistling'  Buoy,  SD,  (PS);  thence  356%°  (N.  by  W.  % W.), 
2%  miles,  to  Point  Loma  Lighthouse. 

San  Francisco  Harbor. — A line  drawn  through  Mile  Rocks 
Lighthouse  326°  ((NTW.  % W.)  to  Bonita  Point  Lighthouse. 

Columbia  River  Entrance. — A line  drawn  from  knuckle  of 
Columbia  River  south  jetty  351°  (NNW.  % W.)  to  Cape  Dis- 
appointment Lighthouse. 

Juan  de  Fuca  Strait,  Washington  and  Puget  Sounds. — A 
line  drawn  from  New  Dungeness  Lighthouse  1914°  (N.  % W. ), 
1714  miles,  to  Cattle  Point  Light,  on  southeasterly  point  of  San 
Juan  Island  (Mount  Constitution,  on  Oreas  Island,  is  in  range 
with  Cattle  Point  Light  on  this  line)  ; from  Bellevue  Point,  San 
Juan  Island,  335%°  (NW.  % W. ) , to  Kellett  Bluff,  Henry  Island; 
thence  346°  (NW.  % N. ) to  Turn  Point  Light;  thence  7014° 
(NE.  14  E.),  8%  miles,  to  westerly  point  of  Skipjack  Island; 
thence  37%°  (N.  by  E.  % E.),  4%  miles,  to  Patos  Islands  Light; 
thence  337%°  (NW.  14  W.) , 12  miles,  to  Point  Roberts  Light. 

General  Rule. — At  all  buoyed  entrances  from  seaward  to  bays, 
sounds,  rivers,  or  other  estuaries,  for  which  specific  lines  have  not 
been  described,  inland  rules  shall  apply  inshore  of  a line,  approxi- 
mately parallel  with  the  general  trend  of  the  shore,  drawn  through 
the  outermost  buoy  or  other  aid  to  navigation  of  any  system  of 
aids. 


118 


PILOT  RULES  FOR  ALL  HARBORS,  RIVERS,  AXD  INLAND 
WATERS  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES.  EXCEPT  THE  GREAT 
LAKES  AND  THEIR  CONNECTING  AND  TRIBUTARY 

wati:rs  as  far  east  as  :uontreal  and  the  red 

RIVER  OF  THE  NORTH  AND  RIVERS  EMPTYING  INTO 
THE  GULF  OF  MEXICO  AND  THEIR  TRIBUTARIES. 


Rules  and  regulations  for  the  government  of  pilots  of  vessels 
propelled  by  steam,  gas,  fluid,  naphtha,  or  electric  motors,  and 
of  other  vessels  propelled  by  machinery,  navigating  the  harbors, 
rivers,  and  inland  waters  of  the  United  States,  except  the  Great 
Lakes  and  their  connecting  and  tributary  waters  as  far  east  as 
Montreal,  the  Red  River  of  the  North,  and  rivers  emptying  into 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  their  tributaries,  as  amended  by  the 
Board  of  United  States  Supervising  Inspectors,  Steamboat- 
Inspection  Service,  on  February  27,  1!U2,  and  approved  by  the 
Secretary  of  Commerce,  under  the  authority  of  an  act  of  Con- 
gress approved  June  7,  1807,  and  the  acts  of  Congress  approved 
February  14.  1003,  and  March  4,  1013,  establishing  the  Depart- 
ment of  Commerce. 


These  Rules  shall  he  effective  on  and  after  May  1.  1912. 


PRELIMINARY. 

In  the  following  rules  the  words  steam  vessel  shall  include  any 
vessel  propelled  by  machinery. 

A vessel  is  under  way,  within  the  meaning  of  these  rules,  when 
she  is  not  at  anchor,  or  made  fast  to  the  shore,  or  aground. 

Risk  of  collision  can,  when  circumstances  permit,  be  ascertained 
by  carefully  watching  the  compass  bearing  of  an  approaching 
vessel.  If  the  bearing  does  not  appreciably  change,  such  risk 
should  be  deemed  to  exist. 


119 


SIGNALS. 

The  whistle  signals  provided  in  these  rules  shall  be  sounded  on 
an  efficient  whistle  or  siren  sounded  by  steam  or  by  some  sub- 
stitute for  steam. 

A short  Hast  of  tbe  whistle  shall  mean  a blast  of  about  one 
second’s  duration. 

A prolonged  blast  of  the  whistle  shall  mean  a blast  of  from  four 
to  six  seconds’  duration.^ 

One  short  blast  of  the  whistle  signifies  intention  to  direct 
course  to  own  starboard,  except  when  two  steam  vessels  are 
a]jproaehing  each  other  at  right  angles  or  obliquely,  when  it  sig- 
nifies intention  of  steam  vessel  which  is  to  starboard  of  the  other 
to  hold  course  and  speed. 

Tido  short  blasts  of  the  whistle  signify  intention  to  direct 
course  to  own  port. 

Three  short  blasts  of  the  whistle  shall  mean,  “My  engines  are 
going  at  full  speed  astern.” 

When  vessels  are  in  sight  of  one  another  a steam  vessel  under 
way  whose  engines  are  going  at  full  speed  astern  shall  indicate 
that  fact  by  three  short  blasts  on  the  whistle. 

Rule  I.  If,  when  steam  vessels  are  approaching  each  other, 
either  vessel  fails  to  understand  the  course  or  intention  of  the 
other,  from  any  cause,  the  vessel  so  in  doubt  shall  immediately 
signify  the  same  by  giving  several  short  and  rapid  blasts,  not  less 
than  four,  of  the  steam  whistle,  the  danger  signal. 

Rule  II.  Steam  vessels  are  forbidden  to  use  what  has  become 
technically  known  among  pilots  as  “cross  signals,”  that  is,  an- 
swering one  whistle  with  two,  and  answering  two  whistles  with 
one. 

Rule  III.  Tlie  signals  for  passing,  by  the  blowing  of  the 


'Under  the  provisions  of  par.  (a),  sec.  4,  of  act  of  Congress  approved 
June  9.  1910,  “a  blast  of  at  least  two  seconds  shall  be  deemed  a pro- 
longed blast  within  the  meaning  of  the  law,”  when  given  by  vessels  pro- 
pelled by  machinery  and  not  more  than  65  feet  in  length,  except  tugboats 
and  towboats  propelled  by  steam. 


120 


whistle,  shall  be  given  and  answered  by  pilots,  in  compliance 
with  these  rules,  not  only  when  meeting  "head  and  head,”  or 
nearly  so,  but  at  all  times,  when  the  steam  vessels  are  in  sight 
of  each  other,  wlien  passing  or  meeting  at  a distance  within  half 
a mile  of  each  other,  and  whether  passing  to  the  starboard  or  port. 

Tlie  whistle  signals  provided  in  the  rules  for  steam  vessels 
meeting,  passing,  or  overtaking,  are  never  to  be  used  except  when 
steam  vessels  are  in  sight  of  each  other,  and  the  course  and 
position  of  each  can  be  determined  in  the  daytime  by  a sight  of 
the  vessel  itself,  or  by  night  by  seeing  its  signal  lights.  In  fog, 
mist,  falling  snow  or  heavy  rainstorms,  when  vessels  can  not  so 
see  each  other,  fog  signals  only  must  be  given. 

SITUATIONS. 

Rule  IV.  When  steam  vessels  are  approaching  each  other 

HEAD  AND  HEAD,  THAT  IS,  END  ON,  OR  NEARLY  SO,  it  shall  be  the 
duty  of  each  to  pass  on  the  port  side  of  the  other ; and  either 
vessel  shall  give,  as  a signal  of  her  intention,  one  short  and 
distinct  blast  of  her  whistle,  which  the  other  vessel  shall  answer 
promptly  by  a similar  blast  of  her  whistle,  and  thereupon  such 
vessels  shall  pass  on  the  port  side  of  each  other.  But  if  the 
courses  of  such  vessels  are  so  far  on  the  starboard  of  each  other 
as  not  to  be  considered  as  meeting  head  and  head,  either  vessel 
shall  immediately  give  two  short  and  distinct  blasts  of  her 
whistle,  which  the  other  vessel  shall  answer  promptly  by  two 
similar  blasts  of  her  whistle,  and  they  shall  pass  on  the  starboard 
side  of  each  other. 

The  foregoing  only  applies  to  cases  where  vessels  are  meeting 
end  on  or  nearly  end  on,  in  such  a manner  as  to  involve  risk  of 
collision;  in  other  words,  to  eases  in  which,  by  day,  each  vessel 
sees  the  masts  of  the  other  in  a line,  or  nearly  in  a line,  with  her 
own,  and  by  night  to  cases  in  which  each  vessel  is  in  such  a 
position  as  to  see  both  the  side-lights  of  the  other. 

It  does  not  apply  by  day  to  cases  in  which  a vessel  sees  an- 
other ahead  crossing  her  own  course,  or  by  night  to  cases  where 


GROVER  C.  BERGDOLL 

121 

the  red  light  of  one  vessel  is  opposed  to  the  red  light  of  the  other, 
or  where  the  green  light  of  one  vessel  is  opposed  to  the  green  light 
of  the  other,  or  where  a red  light  without  a green  light  or  a 
green  light  without  a red  light,  is  seen  ahead,  or  where  both 
green  and  red  lights  are  seen  anywhere  but  ahead. 

Rule  V.  Whenever  a steam  vessel  is  jSteaeing  a short  be:xd  or 
CURVE  IX  THE  CHAXXEL,  where,  from  the  height  of  the  hanks  or 
other  cause,  a steam  vessel  approaching  from  the  opposite  direc- 
tion can  not  be  seen  for  a distance  of  half  a mile,  such  steam 
vessel,  when  she  shall  have  arrived  within  half  a mile  of  such 
curve  or  bend,  shall  give  a signal  by  one  long  blast  of  the  steam 
whistle,  which  signal  shall  be  answered  by  a similar  blast,  given 
by  any  approaching  steam  vessel  that  may  be  within  hearing. 
Should  such  signal  be  so  answered  by  a steam  vessel  upon  the 
farther  side  of  such  bend,  then  the  usual  signals  for  meeting  and 
passing  shall  immediately  be  given  and  answered ; but,  if  the  first 
alarm  signal  of  such  vessel  be  not  answered,  she  is  to  consider 
the  channel  clear  and  govern  herself  accordingly. 

When  steam  vessels  are  moved  from  their  docks  or  berths, 
and  other  boats  are  liable  to  pass  from  any  direction  toward  them, 
they  shall  give  the  same  signal  as  in  the  case  of  vessels  meeting 
at  a bend,  but  immediately  after  clearing  the  berths  so  as  to  be 
fully  in  sight  they  shall  be  governed  by  the  steering  and  sailing 
rules. 

Rule  VI.  When  steam  vessels  are  running  in  the  same 
DIRECTION,  and  the  vessel  which  is  astern  shall  desire  to  pass  on 
the  right  or  starboard  hand  of  the  vessel  ahead,  she  shall  give  one 
short  blast  of  the  steam  whistle,  as  a signal  of  such  desire,  and 
if  the  vessel  ahead  answers  with  one  blast,  she  shall  put  her  helm 
to  port;  or  if  she  shall  desire  to  pass  on  the  left  or  port  side  of 
the  vessel  ahead,  she  shall  give  two  short  blasts  of  the  steam 
whistle  as  a signal  of  such  desire,  and  if  the  vessel  ahead  answers 
with  two  blasts,  shall  put  her  helm  to  starboard;  or  if  the  vessel 


122 


ahead  does  not  think  it  safe  for  the  vessel  astern  to  attempt  to 
pass  at  that  point,  she  shall  immediately  signify  the  same  by 
giving  several  short  and  rapid  blasts  of  the  steam  whistle,  not 
less  tlian  four,  and  under  no  circumstances  shall  the  vessel  astern 
attempt  to  j)ass  the  vessel  aliead  until  such  time  as  they  have 
reached  a point  where  it  can  be  safely  done,  when  said  vessel 
ahead  shall  signify  her  willingness  by  blowing  the  proper  signals. 
The  vessel  ahead  shall  in  no  case  attempt  to  cross  the  bow  or 
crowd  upon  the  course  of  the  passing  vessel. 

Every  vessel  coming  up  with  another  vessel  from  any  direction 
more  than  two  points  abaft  her  beam,  that  is,  in  such  a position, 
with  reference  to  the  vessel  which  she  is  overtaking  that  at  night 
she  would  be  unaijle  to  see  either  of  that  vessel’s  side-lights,  shall 
be  deemed  to  be  an  overtaking  vessel;  and  no  subsequent  altera- 
tion of  the  bearing  between  the  two  vessels  shall  make  the  over- 
taking vessel  a crossing  vessel  within  the  meaning  of  these  rules, 
or  relieve  her  of  the  duty  of  keeping  clear  of  the  overtaken  vessel 
until  she  is  finally  past  and  clear. 

As  by  day  the  overtaking  vessel  can  not  always  know  with  cer- 
tainty whether  she  is  forward  of  or  abaft  this  direction  from  the 
other  vessel  she  should,  if  in  doubt,  assume  that  she  is  an  over- 
taking vessel  and  keep  out  of  the  way. 

Rule  VII.  When  two  steam  vessels  are  approaching  each 

OTHER  AT  RIGHT  ANGLES  OR  OBLIQUELY  SO  AS  TO  INVOLVE  RISK  OF 
COLLISION,  other  than  when  one  steam  vessel  is  overtaking  another, 
the  steam  vessel  which  has  the  other  on  her  own  port  side  shall 
liold  her  course  and  speed ; and  the  steam  vessel  which  has  the 
other  on  her  own  starboard  side  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the 
other  by  directing  her  course  to  starboard  so  as  to  cross  the  stern 
of  the  other  steam  vessel,  or,  if  necessary  to  do  so,  slacken  her 
S])eed  or  stop  or  reverse. 

If  from  any  cause  the  conditions  covered  by  this  situation  are 
such  as  to  prevent  immediate  compliance  with  each  other's  sigmals. 
the  misunderstanding  or  objection  shall  be  at  once  made  apparent 
by  blowing  the  danger  signal,  and  both  steam  vessels  shall  bo 


123 


stopped  and  backed  if  necessary,  until  signals  for  passing  witli 
safety  are  made  and  understood. 

Eule  VIII.  When  a .STEA.\r  ves.sel  and  a sailing  vessel  arc 
])roceeding  in  such  directions  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  the 
steam  vessel  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  sailing  vessel. 

Rule  IX.  Every  steam  vessel  which  is  directed  hy  these  rules  to 
KEEP  OUT  OF  THE  WAY  of  another  vessel  shall,  if  the  circumstances 
of  the  ease  admit,  avoid  crossing  ahead  of  the  other. 

Rule  X.  In  narrow  channels  every  steam  vessel  shall,  when 
it  is  safe  and  practicable,  keep  to  that  side  of  the  fairway  or  mid- 
channel which  lies  on  the  starboard  side  of  such  vessel. 

Rule  XI.  In  obeying  and  construing  these  rules  due  regard 
shall  be  had  to  all  dangers  of  navigation  and  collision,  and  to 
any  special  circumstances  which  may  render  a departure  from 
the  above  rules  necessary  in  order  to  avoid  immediate  danger. 

SOUND  signals  FOR  FOG,  AND  SO  FORTH. 

Rule  XII.  In  fog.  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rainstorms, 
whether  by  day  or  night,  signals  shall  be  given  as  follows: 

A steam  vessel  under  u'ay,  except  iclien  towing  other  vessels  or 
being  towed,  shall  sound,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one 
minute,  on  the  whistle  or  siren,  a prolonged  blast. 

A steam  vessel  when  towing  other  vessels  shall  sound,  at  inter- 
vals of  not  more  than  one  minute,  on  the  whistle  or  siren,  three 
blasts  in  succession,  namely,  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  two 
short  blasts. 

A vessel  towed  may  give,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one 
minute,  on  the  fog  horn,  a signal  of  three  blasts  in  succession, 
namely,  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  two  short  blasts,  and  she 
shall  not  give  any  other. 

A vessel  when  at  anchor  shall,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than 
one  minute,  ring  the  bell  rapidly  for  about  five  seconds. 


124 


SPEED  TO  BE  MODERATE  IN  FOG,  AND  SO  FOETH. 

Rttle  XIII.  Every  steam  vessel  shall,  in  a fog,  mist,  falling 
snow,  or  heavy  rainstorms,  go  at  a moderate  speed,  having  careful 
regard  to  the  existing  circumstances  and  conditions. 

A steam  vessel  hearing,  apparently  forward  of  her  beam,  the 
fog  signal  of  a vessel  the  position  of  which  is  not  ascertained 
shall,  so  far  as  the  circumstances  of  the  case  admit,  stop  her 
engines,  and  then  navigate  with  caution  until  danger  of  collision 
is  over. 


POSTING  OF  PILOT  RULES. 

On  steam  and  other  motor  vessels  of  over  100  gross  tons,  two 
copies  of  the  placard  form  of  these  rules  (Form  803)  shall  be 
kept  posted  up  in  conspicuous  places  in  the  vessel,  one  copy  of 
which  shall  be  kept  posted  up  in  the  pilot  house.  On  steam  and 
other  motor  vessels  of  over  25  gross  tons  and  not  over  100  gross 
tons,  two  copies  of  the  placard  form  of  the  pilot  rules  shall  be 
kept  on  board,  one  copy  of  wliich  shall  be  kept  posted  up  in  the 
pilot  house.  On  steam  and  other  motor  vessels  of  25  gross  tons 
and  under,  and  of  more  than  10  gross  tons,  two  copies  of  the 
placard  form  of  the  pilot  rules  shall  be  kept  on  board,  and,  where 
practicable,  one  copy  thereof  shall  be  kept  conspicuously  posted 
up  in  the  vessel.  On  steam  and  other  motor  vessels  of  not  more 
than  10  gross  tons,  two  copies  of  the  pamphlet  form  of  the  pilot 
rules  shall  be  kept  on  board,  and,  where  practicable,  one  copy 
thereof  shall  be  kept  conspicuously  posted  up  in  the  vessel. 
(Authority:  Sec.  2,  act  of  Congress  approved  June  7,  1897.) 

DIAGRAMS. 

Tlie  following  diagrams  are  intended  to  illustrate  the  working 
of  the  system  of  colored  lights  and  pilot  rules: 


125 


FIRST  SITUATION. 


Here  the  two  colored  lights  visible  to  each  will  indicate  their 
direct  approach  “head  and  head”  toward  each  other.  In  this 
situation  it  is  a standing  rule  that  both  shall  put  their  helms  to 
port  and  pass  on  the  port  side  of  each  other,  each  having 
previously  given  one  blast  of  the  whistle. 


SECONn  SITUATION. 


In  this  situation  the  red  light  only  will  be  visible  to  each,  the 
screens  preventing  the  green  lights  from  being  seen.  Both  vessels 
are  evidently  passing  to  port  of  each  other,  which  is  rulable  in 
this  situation,  each  pilot  having  previously  signified  his  intention 
by  one  blast  of  the  whistle. 


126 


THIRD  S1TUAT10^^ 


In  this  situation  the  green  light  only  will  be  visible  to  each,  the 
screens  preventing  the  red  light  from  being  seen.  They  are  there- 
fore passing  to  starboard  of  each  other,  which  is  rulable  in  this 
situation,  each  pilot  having  previously  signified  his  intention  by 
two  blasts  of  the  whistle. 


FOURTH  SITUATION. 


In  this  situation  one  steam  vessel  is  overtaking  another  steam 
vessel  from  some  point  within  the  angle  of  two  points  abaft  the 
beams  of  the  overtaken  steam  vessel.  The  overtaking  steam  vessel 
may  pass  on  the  starboard  or  port  side  of  the  steam  vessel  ahead 
after  the  necessary  signals  for  passing  have  been  given,  with 
assent  of  the  overtaken  steam  vessel,  as  prescribed  in  Eule  VI. 


FIFTH  SITUATION. 


In  this  situation  two  steam  vessels  are  approaching  each  other 
at  right  angles  or  obliquely  in  such  manner  as  to  involve  risk  of 
collision,  other  than  where  one  steam  vessel  is  overtaking  another. 
The  steam  vessel  which  has  the  other  on  her  own  port  side  shall 
hold  course  and  speed,  and  the  other  shall  keep  clear  by  crossing 
astern  of  the  steam  vessel  that  is  holding  course  and  speed,  or, 
if  necessary  to  do  so,  shall  slacken  her  speed  or  stop  or  reverse. 


128 


RULES  FOR  LIGHTS  FOR  CERTAIN  CLASSES  OF  VESSELS 
NAVIGATING  THE  HARBORS,  RIVERS,  AND  INLAND 
WATERS  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES,  EXCEPT  THE  GREAT 
LAKES  AND  THEIR  CONNECTING  AND  TRIBUTARY 
WATERS  AS  FAR  EAST  AS  MONTREAL  AND  THE  RED 
RIVER  OF  THE  NORTH  AND  RIVERS  EMPTYING  INTO 
THE  GULF  OF  MEXICO  AND  THEIR  TRIBUTARIES. 


The  following  rules  for  lights  to  be  carried  by  ferryboats,  rules 
for  lights  for  barges  and  canal  boats  in  tow  of  steam  vessels,  rules 
for  lights  for  rafts  and  other  water  craft  navigating  by  hand 
power,  horsepower,  or  by  the  current  of  the  river,  rule  relating 
to  use  of  searchlights,  rule  prohibiting  unnecessary  sounding  of 
the  steam  whistle,  rule  prohibiting  the  carrying  of  unauthorized 
lights  on  steam  vessels,  and  rule  relating  to  drawbridges  over 
navigable  waters  of  the  United  States  were  adopted  by  the  Board 
of  Supervising  Inspectors,  Steamboat-Inspection  Service,  and 
approved  by  the  Secretary  of  Commerce. 

These  rules  concerning  lights  shall  be  complied  with  in  all 
weathers  from  sunset  to  sunrise. 

RULES  FOR  LIGHTS  TO  BE  CARRIED  BY  FERRYBOATS  XAVIGATING  THE 
HARBORS,  RIVERS,  AXD  INLAND  WATERS  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 
EXCEPT  THE  GREAT  LAKES  AND  THEIR  CONNECTING  AND  TRIBUTARY 
WATERS  AS  FAR  EAST  AS  MONTRE.iL  AND  THE  RED  Rli  ER  OF  THE 
NORTH  AND  RIVERS  EJtPTYING  INTO  THE  GULF  OF  MEXICO  AND 
THEIR  TRIBUTARIES.' 

[Authority:  Sec.  2,  act  of  Congress  approved  June  7,  1897.] 


'See  act  of  Congress  approved  June  g,  igio,  effective  on  and  after 
July  9,  igio,  prescribing  lights  that  shall  be  carried  by  certain  classes  of 
vessels  of  not  more  than  65  feet  in  length,  amendatory  of  these  rules,  p.  30. 


12!J 


Ferryboats  propelled  by  machinery  and  navigating  the  harbors, 
rivers,  and  other  inland  waters  of  the  United  States,  except  the 
Great  Lakes  and  their  connecting  and  tributary  waters  as  far  east 
as  Montreal  and  the  Red  River  of  the  North  and  rivers  emptying 
into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  their  tributaries,  shall  carry  the  range 
lights  and  the  colored  side  lights  required  by  law  to  be  carried  on 
steam  vessels  navigating  those  waters,  except  that  douhle-end 
ferryboats  shall  carry  a central  range  of  clear,  bright,  white 
lights,  showing  all  around  the  horizon,  placed  at  equal  altitudes 
forward  and  aft,  also  on  the  starboard  side  a green  light,  and  on 
the  port  side  a red  light,  of  such  a character  as  to  be  visible  on 
a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere  at  a distance  of  at  least  2 
miles,  and  so  constructed  as  to  show  a uniform  and  unbroken 
light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  10  points  of  the  compass,  and 
so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to  2 points  abaft 
the  beam  on  their  respective  sides. 

The  green  and  red  lights  shall  be  fitted  with  inboard  screens 
projecting  at  least  3 feet  forward  from  tlie  lights,  so  as  to  prevent 
them  from  being  seen  across  the  bow. 

Local  inspectors  in  districts  having  ferryboats  shall,  whenever 
the  safety  of  navigation  may  require,  designate  for  each  line  of 
such  boats  a certain  light,  white  or  colored,  which  shall  show  all 
around  the  horizon,  to  designate  and  distinguish  such  lines  from 
each  other,  which  light  shall  be  carried  on  a flagstaff  amidships, 
15  feet  above  the  white  range  lights. 

RULES  FOR  LIGHTS  FOR  BARGES  AND  CANAL  BOATS  IN 
TOW  OF  STEAM  VESSELS  AND  FOR  LIGHTS  AND  DAY 
SIGNALS  FOR  DREDGES,  VESSELS  WORKING  ON 
WRECKS,  ETC.,  NAVIGATING  THE  HARBORS,  RIVERS, 
AND  OTHER  INLAND  WATERS  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES, 
EXCEPT  THE  GREAT  LAKES  AND  THEIR  CONNECTING 
AND  TRIBUTARY  WATERS  AS  FAR  EAST  AS  MONTREAL 
AND  THE  RED  RIVER  OF  THE  NORTH  AND  RIVERS 
EMPTYING  INTO  THE  GULF  OF  MEXICO  AND  THEIR 
TRIBUTARIES. 


130 


[Authority:  Sec.  2,  act  of  Congress  approved  June  7,  1897.] 

These  rules  concerning  lights  shall  he  complied  with  in  all 
weathers  from  sunset  to  sunrise  and  shall  be  effective  on  and  after 
September  1,  1914. 

LIGHTS  FOB  BARGES  AND  CANAL  BOATS  IN  TOAV  OF  STEAM  I'ESSELS  ON 

CERTAIN  INLAND  WATERS  ON  THE  SEABOARD,  EXCEPT  THE  HLTDSON 

RIVER  AND  ADJACENT  WATERS  AND  LAKE  CHAMPLAIN. 

On  the  harbors,  rivers,  and  other  inland  waters  of  the  United 
States,  except  the  Great  Lakes  and  their  connecting  and  tributary 
waters  as  far  east  as  Montreal  and  the  Red  River  of  the  Xorth 
and  rivers  emptying  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  their  tributaries, 
and  except  on  the  waters  of  the  Hudson  River  and  its  tributaries 
from  Troy  to  the  boundary  lines  of  Xeiv  York  Harbor  off  Sandy 
Hook,  as  defined  pursuant  to  section  2 of  the  act  of  Congress  of 
Feliruary  19.  1S9.5,  the  East  River,  and  Long  Island  Sound  (and 
the  waters  entering  thereon,  and  to  the  Atlantic  Ocean),  to  and 
including  Narragansett  Bay,  R.  I.,  and  tributaries,  and  Lake 
Champlain,  barges  (exce])t  scows)  and  canal  boats  in  tow  of 
steam  vessels  shall  carry  lights  as  follows: 

Barges  and  canal  boats  towing  astern  of  steam  vessels,  when 
towing  singly,  or  what  is  known  as  tandem  towing,  shall  each 
carry  a green  light  on  the  starboard  side  and  a red  light  on  the 
port  side,  and  a white  light  on  the  stern,  except  that  the  last 
vessel  of  such  tow  shall  carry  two  white  lights  on  her  stern, 
athwartsliip,  horizontal  to  each  other,  not  less  than  5 feet  apart, 
and  not  less  than  4 feet  above  the  deck  house,  and  so  placed  as 
to  show  all  around  the  horizon. 

When  two  or  more  boats  are  abreast,  the  colored  lights  shall  be 
carried  at  the  outer  sides  of  the  bows  of  the  outside  boats.  Each 
of  the  outside  boats  in  last  tier  of  a hawser  tow  shall  carry  a 
white  light  on  her  stern. 

The  white  light  required  to  be  carried  on  stern  of  a barge  or 
canal  boat  carrying  red  and  green  side  lights  shall  be  carried  in 


131 


a lantern  so  constructed  that  it  sliall  show  an  unbroken  light 
over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  12  points  of  the  compass,  namely, 
for  6 points  from  right  aft  on  each  side  of  the  vessel,  and  shall 
be  of  such  a character  as  to  be  visible  on  a dark  night  with  a 
clear  atmosphere  at  a distance  of  at  least  2 miles. 

Barges  or  canal  boats  towing  alongside  a steam  vessel  sliall,  if 
the  deck,  deck  houses,  or  cargo  of  the  barge  or  canal  boat  be  so 
liigh  above  water  as  to  obscure  the  side  lights  of  the  towing 
steamer  when  being  towed  on  tlie  starboard  side  of  the  steamer, 
carry  a green  light  upon  tlie  starboard  side ; and  wlien  towed  on 
the  port  side  of  the  steamer,  a red  light  on  the  port  side  of  the 
barge  or  canal  boat;  and  if  there  is  more  than  one  barge  or  canal 
boat  abreast,  the  colored  lights  shall  be  displayed  from  the  outer 
side  of  the  outside  barges  or  canal  boats. 

The  colored  side  ligiits  referred  to  in  these  rules  for  barges  and 
canal  boats  in  tow  shall  be  fitted  with  inboard  screens,  so  as  to 
prevent  them  from  being  seen  across  the  bow,  and  of  such  a 
cliaracter  as  to  be  visible  on  a dark  night,  with  a clear  atmos- 
phere, at  a distance  of  at  least  2 miles,  and  so  constructed  as  to 
show  a uniform  and  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon 
of  10  points  of  the  compass,  and  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light 
from  right  ahead  to  2 points  abaft  the  beam  on  either  side.  Tlie 
minimum  size  of  glass  globes  shall  not  be  less  than  6 inches  in 
diameter  and  5 inches  high  in  the  clear. 

Hcows  when  being  towed  by  steam  vessels  on  the  waters  covered 
by  the  first  paragraph  of  these  rules  shall  carry  a wliite  light  at 
each  end  of  the  scow,  except  that  when  such  scows  are  massed  in 
tiers,  two  or  more  abreast,  each  of  the  outside  scows  shall  carry 
a wliite  light  on  its  outer  bow,  and  the  outside  scows  in  the  last 
tier  shall  each  carry,  in  addition,  a white  light  on  the  outer  part 
of  the  stern.  The  white  light  shall  be  carried  not  less  than  8 
feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  shall  be  so  placed  as  to 
show  an  unbroken  light  all  around  the  horizon,  and  shall  be  of 
such  a character  as  to  be  visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear 
atmosphere  at  a distance  of  at  least  5 miles. 


132 


LIGHTS  FOR  BARGES  AND  CANAL  BOATS  IN  TOW  OF  STEAM  VESSELS 

ON  THE  HUDSON  RIVER  AND  ADJACENT  WATERS  AND  LAKE 

CHAMPLAIN. 

All  nondescript  vessels  known  as  scows,  car  floats,  lighters,  and 
vessels  of  similar  type,  navigating  the  waters  referred  to  in  the 
following  rules,  shall  carry  the  lights  required  to  be  carried  by 
barges  and  canal  boats  in  tow  of  steam  vessels,  as  prescribed  in 
such  rules. 

Barges  and  canal  boats,  when  being  towed  by  steam  vessels  on 
the  waters  of  the  Hudson  River  and  its  tributaries  from  Troy  to 
the  boundary  lines  of  New  York  Harbor  off  Sandy  Hook;  as 
defined  pursuant  to  section  2 of  the  act  of  Congress  of  February 
19,  1895,  the  East  River,  and  Long  Island  Sound  (and  the  waters 
entering  thereon,  and  to  the  Atlantic  Ocean),  to  and  including 
Narragansett  Bay,  R.  L,  and  tributaries,  and  Lake  Champlain, 
shall  carry  lights  as  follows: 

Barges  and  canal  boats  being  towed  astern  of  steam  vessels, 
when  towing  singly  or  what  is  known  as  tandem  towing,  shall  each 
carry  a white  light  on  the  bow  and  a white  light  on  the  stern, 
except  that  the  last  vessel  of  such  tow  shall  carry  two  white 
lights  on  her  stern,  athwartship,  horizontal  to  each  other,  not 
less  than  5 feet  apart,  and  not  less  than  4 feet  above  the  deck 
house,  and  so  placed  as  to  show  all  around  the  horizon : Provided. 
That  seagoing  barges  shall  not  be  required  to  make  any  change 
in  their  seagoing  lights  (red  and  green)  on  waters  coming  within 
the  scope  of  these  rules,  except  that  the  last  vessel  of  the  tow 
shall  carry  two  white  lights  on  her  stern,  atliwartship.  horizontal 
to  each  other,  not  less  than  5 feet  apart,  and  not  less  than  4 feet 
above  the  deck  house,  and  so  placed  as  to  show  all  around  the 
horizon. 

Barges  and  canal  boats,  when  towed  at  a hawser  two  or  more 
abreast,  when  in  one  tier,  shall  carry  a white  light  on  the  bow 
and  a white  light  on  the  stern  of  each  of  the  outside  boats:  when 
in  more  than  one  tier,  each  of  the  outside  boats  shall  carry  a 
white  light  on  its  bow ; and  the  outside  boats  in  the  last  tier  shall 


133 


each  carry,  in  addition,  a white  light  on  the  outer  afterpart  of 
the  stern. 

Barges  or  canal  boats  towed  alongside  a steam  vessel,  if  on  the 
starboard  side  of  said  steam  vessel,  shall  display  a white  light  on 
her  own  starboard  l)ow ; and  if  on  the  port  side  of  said  steam 
vessel  shall  display  a white  light  on  her  own  port  bow ; and  if 
there  is  more  than  one  barge  or  canal  boat  alongside,  the  white 
lights  shall  be  displayed  from  the  outboard  side  of  the  outside 
barge  or  canal  boat:  Provided,  That  barges  known  as  ear  floats 
when  towed  alongside  shall  have  a white  light  at  each  outboard 
corner  of  said  barge. 

When  barges  or  canal  boats  are  massed  in  tiers  and  towed  at  a 
hawser,  as  is  usual  on  the  Hudson  River,  there  shall  be  carried  on 
the  forward  port  side  of  the  port  boat  of  each  tier  a white  light, 
and  on  the  forward  starboard  side  of  the  starboard  boat  in  each 
tier  a white  light,  and  on  the  after  port  side  of  the  port  boat  in 
the  stern  tier  a wliite  light,  and  on  the  after  starboard  side  of  the 
starboard  boat  in  the  stern  tier  a white  light. 

The  white  bow  lights  for  barges  and  canal  boats  referred  to  in 
the  preceding  rules  shall  be  carried  at  least  10  feet  and  not  more 
than  30  feet  abaft  the  stem  or  extreme  forward  end  of  tlie  vessel. 
On  barges  and  canal  boats  required  to  carry  a white  bow  light, 
the  white  light  on  bow  and  the  white  light  on  stern  shall  each  be 
so  placed  above  the  hull  or  deck  house  as  to  show  an  unbroken 
light  all  around  the  horizon,  and  of  such  a character  as  to  be 
visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere  at  a distance  of 
at  least  ^5  miles. 

Provided,  That  nothing  in  these  rules  shall  be  construed  as  com- 
pelling barges  or  canal  boats  in  tow  of  steam  vessels,  passing 
through  any  waters  coming  within  the  scope  of  these  rules  where 
lights  for  barges  or  canal  boats  are  different  from  those  of  the 
waters  whereon  such  vessels  are  usually  employed,  to  change  their 
lights  from  those  required  on  the  waters  from  which  their  trip 
begins  or  terminates;  but  should  such  vessels  engage  in  local 
employment  on  waters  requiring  different  lights  from  those  where 


134 


tliey  are  customarily  employed,  they  shall  comply  with  the  local 
rules  where  employed. 

RULEH  EUR  LIGHTS  ANH  DAY  SIGNALS  TO  BE  CARRIED 
BY  VESSELS,  DREDGES  OF  ALL  TYPES,  AND  VESSELS 
WORKING  ON  WRECKS  OR  OTHER  OBSTRUCTIONS  TO 
NAVIGATION,  OR  MOORED  FOR  SUBIMARINE  OPERA- 
TIONS OR  MADE  FAST  TO  A SUNKEN  OBJECT  WHICH 
MAY  DRIFT  WITH  THE  TIDE  OR  BE  TOWED.* 

[Authority:  Section  2.  act  of  Congress  aj)proved  June  7,  1897,  as 
amended  hy  act  of  Congress  approved  May  25,  1914.] 

liUI.E  1.  RULE  FOR  SIGNALS  TO  BE  DISPLAYED  BY  A TOWING  VESSEL 
'WHEN  TOWING  A SUBMERGED  OR  PARTLY  SUBilERGED  OBJECT  UPON 
A HAWSER  WHEN  NO  SIGNALS  ARE  DISPLAYED  UPON  THE  OBJECT 
WHICH  IS  TO\VED. 

The  vessel  having  the  submerged  object  in  tow  shall  display  by 
day,  where  they  can  best  be  seen,  two  shapes,  one  above  the  other, 
not  less  than  0 feet  part,  the  lower  shape  to  be  carried  not  less 
than  10  feet  above  the  deck  houses.  The  shapes  shall  be  in  the 
form  of  a double  frustum  of  a cone,  base  to  base,  not  less  than  2 
feet  in  diameter  at  the  center  nor  less  than  8 inches  at  the  ends 
of  the  cones,  and  to  be  not  less  than  4 feet  lengthwise  from  end 
to  end,  the  upper  shape  to  be  painted  in  alternate  horizontal 
stripes  of  black  and  white,  8 inches  in  width,  and  the  lower  shape 
to  be  painted  a solid  bright  red. 

By  night  the  towing  vessel  shall  display  the  regular  side  lights, 
but  in  lieu  of  the  regular  white  towing  lights  shall  display  four 
lights  in  a vertical  position  not  less  than  3 feet  nor  more  than  6 
feet  apart,  the  upper  and  lower  of  such  lights  to  be  white,  and 


'Adopted  by  executive  committee  of  Board  of  Supervising  Inspectors  on 
July  22,  1914,  and  approved  by  Secretary  of  Commerce  on  July  28,  1914. 
Adopted  by  Board  of  Supervising  Inspectors  on  January  20,  1915,  and 
approved  by  the  Secretary  of  Commerce  on  April  12,  I9>5- 


135 


the  two  middle  lights  to  be  red,  all  of  such  lights  to  he  of  the 
same  character  as  is  now  prescribed  for  the  regular  towing  lights. 

RULE  2.  rule  for  STEAMERS,  DERRICK  BOATS,  LIGHTERS,  OR  OTHER 
TYPES  OF  VESSELS  MADE  FAST  ALONGSIDE  A WRECK,  OR  MOORED 
OVER  A WRECK  WHICH  IS  ON  THE  BOTTOM  OR  PARTLY  SUBMERGED, 
OR  WHICH  MAY  BE  DRIFTING. 

Steamers,  derrick  boats,  lighters,  or  other  types  of  vessels  made 
fast  alongside  a wreck,  or  moored  over  a wreck  which  is  on  the 
bottom  or  partly  submerged,  or  which  may  be  drifting,  shall  dis- 
play by  day  two  shapes  of  the  same  character  and  dimensions  and 
displayed  in  the  same  manner  as  required  by  the  foregoing  rule, 
except  that  both  the  shapes  shall  he  painted  a solid  bright  red, 
but  where  more  than  one  vessel  is  working  under  the  above  con- 
ditions, the  shapes  need  l>e  displayed  only  from  one  vessel  on  each 
side  of  the  wreck  from  which  it  can  best  he  seen  from  all  direc- 
tions. 

By  night  this  situation  shall  he  indicated  by  the  display  of  a 
white  light  from  the  bow  and  stern  of  each  outside  vessel  or 
lighter  not  less  than  6 feet  above  the  deck,  and  in  addition  thereto 
there  shall  be  displayed  in  a position  where  they  may  best  be  seen 
from  all  directions  two  red  lights  carried  in  a vertical  line  not 
less  than  3 feet  nor  more  than  6 feet  apart,  and  not  less  than  15 
feet  above  the  deck. 

RULE  3.  RULE  FOR  DREDGES  WHICH  ARE  HELD  IN  STATIONARY 
POSITION  BY  MOORINGS  OR  SPUDS. 

Dredges  which  are  held  in  stationary  position  by  moorings  or 
spuds  shall  display  by  day  two  red  balls  not  less  than  2 feet  in 
diameter  and  carried  in  a vertical  line  not  less  than  3 feet  nor 
more  than  6 feet  apart,  and  at  least  15  feet  above  the  deck  house 
and  in  such  a position  where  they  can  best  be  seen  from  all  direc- 
tions. By  night  they  shall  display  a white  light  at  each  corner, 
not  less  than  6 feet  above  the  deck,  and  in  addition  thereto  there 


13G 


shall  be  displayed  in  a position  where  they  may  best  be  seen  from 
all  directions  two  red  lights  carried  in  a vertical  line  not  less 
than  3 feet  nor  more  than  6 feet  apart,  and  not  less  than  15  feet 
above  the  deck.  When  scows  are  moored  alongside  a dredge  in 
the  foregooing  situation  they  shall  display  a white  light  on  each 
outboard  corner,  not  less  than  6 feet  above  the  deck. 

RULE  4.  RULE  FOR  SELF-PROPELLING  SUCTION  DREDGES  UNDER  WAY 
WITH  THEIR  SUCTIONS  ON  THE  BOTTOM. 

Self-propelling  suction  dredges  under  way  with  their  suction  on 
the  bottom  shall  display  by  day  the  same  signals  as  are  used  to 
designate  any  steamer  not  under  control ; that  is  to  say,  two  black 
balls  not  less  than  2 feet  in  diameter  and  carried  not  less  than 
15  feet  above  the  deck  house,  and  where  they  may  best  be  seen 
from  all  directions. 

By  night  they  shall  carry,  in  addition  to  the  regular  running 
lights,  two  red  lights  of  the  same  character  as  the  masthead 
light,  in  the  same  vertical  plane  and  underneath  the  masthead 
light,  the  red  lights  to  be  not  less  than  3 feet  nor  more  than  6 
feet  apart  and  the  upper  red  light  to  be  not  less  than  4 feet  and 
not  more  than  6 feet  below  the  white  masthead  light,  and  on  or 
near  the  stern  two  red  lights  in  the  same  vertical  plane  not  less 
than  4 feet  nor  more  than  C feet  apart,  to  show  through  4 points 
of  the  compass;  that  is,  from  right  astern  to  2 points  on  each 
quarter. 

RULE  5.  RULE  FOR  VES.SELS  WHICH  ARE  MOORED  OK  ANCHORED  AND 

ENGAGED  IN  LAYING  PIPE  OR  OPERATING  ON  SUBMARINE  CONSTRUC- 
TION OR  EXCAVATION. 

Vessels  which  are  moored  or  anchored,  and  engaged  in  laying 
pipe  or  operating  on  submarine  construction  or  excavation  shall 
display  by  day,  not  less  than  15  feet  above  the  deck,  where  they 
can  best  be  seen  from  all  directions,  two  balls  not  less  than  2 feet 
in  diameter,  in  a vertical  line  not  less  than  3 feet  and  not  more 


137 


than  f)  feet  apart,  the  upper  hall  to  be  painted  in  alternate  black 
and  white  vertical  stripes  (i  inches  wide,  and  the  lower  ball  to  be 
painted  a solid  In  ight  red.  By  night  they  shall  display  three  red 
lights,  carried  in  a vertical  line  not  less  than  3 feet  nor  more  than 
()  feet  apart  and  not  less  than  15  feet  above  the  deck,  and  in  such 
position  as  may  best  be  seen  from  all  directions. 

All  the  lights  required  by  these  special  rules  for  dredges,  wreck- 
ing boats,  lighters,  etc.,  shall  be  of  such  size  and  character  as  to  be 
visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere  for  a distance  of 
at  least  2 miles. 

These  rules  shall  be  in  full  force  and  effect  on  and  after  Sep- 
tember 1,  1914. 

RULES  FOR  LIGHTS  FOR  RAFTS  AND  OTHER  WATER 
CRAFT  NAVIGATING  BY  HAND  POWER.  HORSEPOWER. 
OR  BY  THE  CURRENT  OF  THE  RIVER,  ON  THE  HARBORS, 
RIVERS,  AND  OTHER  INLAND  WATERS  OF  THE  UNITED 
STATES,  EXCEPT  THE  GREAT  LAKES  AND  THEIR  CON- 
NECTING AND  TRIBUTARY  WATERS  AS  FAR  EAST  AS 
MONTREAL  AND  THE  RED  RIVER  OF  THE  NORTH  AND 
RIVERS  E:\IPTYING  into  the  gulf  of  MEXICO  AND 
THEIR  TRIBUTARIES. 

[Authority:  Art.  9 (cl),  act  of  Congress  approved  June  7,  1897.] 

Any  vessel,  except  rafts  and  rowing  boats  under  oars,  navigating 
by  hand  potcer,  horsepower,  or  hy  the  current  of  the  river,  shall 
carry  one  white  light  forward,  not  less  than  8 feet  above  the 
surface  of  the  water. 

Rafts  propelled  by  hand  power  or  by  the  current  of  the  river,  or 
w'hich  shall  be  anchored  or  moored  in  or  near  a channel  or  fair- 
way, shall  carry  white  lights,  as  follows : 

Rafts  of  one  crib  and  not  more  than  two  in  length  shall  carry 
one  white  light.  Rafts  of  three  or  more  cribs  in  length  and  one 
crib  in  width  shall  carry  one  white  light  at  each  end  of  the  raft. 


138 


Rafts  of  more  than  one  crib  abreast  shall  carry  one  white  light 
on  each  outside  corner  of  the  raft,  making  four  lights  in  all. 

Tlie  white  light  required  by  these  rules  for  rafts  and  other 
water  craft  shall  be  carried,  from  sunset  to  sunrise,  in  a lantern 
so  fixed  and  constructed  as  to  show  a clear,  uniform,  and  uii- 
liroken  light,  visil)le  all  around  the  horizon,  and  of  such  intensity 
as  to  be  visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere  at  a 
distance  of  at  least  1 mile.  Tlie  lights  for  rafts  sliall  be  suspended 
from  p(des  of  such  height  tliat  the  lights  shall  not  he  less  than 
8 feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water. 


RULE  RELATIXG  TO  THE  USE  OF  SE.VRCHLIGHTS. 

The  Board  of  Supervising  Inspectors,  at  their  annual  meeting  of 
January,  1905,  adopted  the  following  rule  relating  to  the  use  of 
searchlights : 

Any  master  or  pilot  of  any  steam  vessel  who  shall  flash  or  cause 
to  he  flashed  the  rays  of  the  searchlight  into  the  pilot  liouse  of  a 
I)assing  vessel  shall  he  deemed  guilty  of  misconduct  and  shall  he 
liable  to  have  his  license  suspended  or  revoked. 


RULE  PROHIBITING  UNNECE.SSARY  SOUNDING  OF  THE  STE.AM  WHISTLE. 

[Authority;  Act  of  Congress  approved  February  8,  1907.] 

The  Board  of  Supervising  Inspectors,  at  their  annual  meeting  of 
January,  1907,  adopted  the  following  rule: 

Unnecessary  sounding  of  the  steam  whistle  is  prohibited  within 
any  harbor  limits  of  the  United  States.  Whenever  any  licensed 
officer  in  charge  of  any  steamer  authorizes  or  permits  such  un- 
necessary whistling,  upon  conviction  thereof  before  any  hoard  of 
inspectors  having  jurisdiction,  such  officer  shall  be  suspended  from 
acting  under  his  license  as  the  inspectors  trying  the  case  may 
deem  proper. 


130 


RULE  PROHIBITING  THE  CARRYING  OF  UNAUTHORIZED  LIGHTS  ON 
STEAM  VESSELS. 

[Adopted  by  the  Board  of  Supervising  Insjieetors  on  February  l(i, 
1010,  and  approved  by  the  Secretary  of  Commerce  on  March  0, 
1010.  Authority:  Section  4450,  Revised  Statutes.] 

Any  master  or  pilot  of  any  steam  vessel  who  shall  authorize  or 
permit  the  carrying  of  any  light,  electric  or  otherwise,  not 
required  by  law,  on  the  outside  structure  of  the  cabin  or  hull 
of  the  vessel  that  in  any  way  will  interfere  with  distinguishing 
tlie  signal  lights  shall,  upon  conviction  thereof  liefore  any  board 
of  inspectors  having  jurisdiction,  be  deemed  guilty  of  misconduct 
and  shall  be  liable  to  have  his  license  suspended  or  revoked. 

RULES  GOVERNING  THE  OPERATION  OF  DRAWBRIDGES  OVER  NAVIGABLE 
WATERS  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

It  is  suggested  that  pilots  of  all  steamers  navigating  waters 
which  are  spanned  by  drawbridges  under  the  jurisdiction  of  the 
War  Department  should  provide  themselves  with  the  War  De- 
partment rules  governing  the  operation  of  these  drawbridges,  and 
observe  the  rules. 

A^i  ACT  TO  AMEND  LAWS  FOR  PREVENTING  COLLISIONS 
OF  VESSELS  AND  TO  REGULATE  EQUIPMENT  OF  CER- 
TAIN MOTOR  BOATS  ON  THE  NAVIGABLE  WATERS  OF 
THE  UNITED  STATES. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives  of  the 
United  States  of  America  in  Congress  assembled.  That  the  words 
“motor  boat”  where  used  in  this  act  shall  include  every  vessel  pro- 
pelled by  machinery  and  not  more  than  sixty-five  feet  in  length 
except  tug  boats  and  tow  boats  propelled  by  steam.  The  length 
shall  be  measured  from  end  to  end  over  the  deck,  excluding  sheer: 
Provided,  That  the  engine,  boiler,  or  other  operating  machinery 


140 


shall  be  subject  to  inspection  bv  the  local  inspectors  of  steam 
vessels,  and  to  their  approval  of  the  desif^n  thereof,  on  all  said 
motor  boats,  which  are  more  than  forty  feet  in  length,  and  which 
are  propelled  by  machinery  driven  by  steam. 

iSec.  2.  That  motor  boats  subject  to  the  provisions  of  this  Act 
shall  he  divided  into  classes  as  follows: 

Class  one.  Less  than  twenty-six  feet  in  length. 

Class  two.  Twenty-six  feet  or  over  and  less  than  forty  feet  in 
length. 

Cdass  tliree.  Forty  feet  or  over  and  not  more  than  si.vty-five  feet 
in  length. 

Sec.  3.  That  every  motor  boat  in  all  weathers  from  sunset  to 
sunrise  shall  carry  the  following  lights,  and  during  such  time  no 
other  lights  which  may  be  mistaken  for  those  prescribed  shall  he 
exhibited. 

(a)  Every  motor  boat  of  class  one  shall  carry  the  following 
lights : 

First.  A white  light  aft  to  show  all  around  the  horizon. 

Second.  A combined  lantern  in  the  fore  part  of  the  vessel  and 
lower  than  the  white  light  aft  showing  green  to  starboard  and  red 
to  port,  so  fi.xed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to  two 
points  abaft  the  beam  on  their  respective  sides. 

(h)  Every  motor  boat  of  classes  two  and  three  shall  carry  the 
following  lights: 

First.  A bright  white  light  in  the  fore  part  of  the  vessel  as 
near  the  stem  as  practicable,  so  constructed  as  to  show  an  un- 
broken light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  twenty  points  of  the 
compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  ten  points  on  each  side 
of  the  vessel,  namely,  from  right  ahead  to  two  points  abaft  the 
beam  on  either  side.  The  glass  or  lens  shall  he  of  not  less  than 
the  following  dimensions: 

Class  two.  Nineteen  square  inches. 

Class  three.  Thirty-one  square  inches. 

Second.  A white  light  aft  to  show  all  around  the  horizon. 

Third.  On  the  starboard  side  a green  light  so  constructed  as  to 


GROVER  C.  BERGDOLL 

141 

show  a,n  unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points  of 
the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to 
two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  starboard  side.  On  the  port 
side  a red  light  so  constructed  as  to  show  an  unbroken  light  over 
an  are  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points  of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to 
throw  the  light  from  right  aliead  to  two  points  abaft  the  beam 
on  the  port  side.  The  glasses  or  lenses  in  the  said  side  lights 
shall  be  of  not  less  than  the  following  dimensions  on  motors  of — 

Class  two.  Sixteen  square  inches. 

Class  three.  Twenty-five  square  inches. 

On  and  after  July  first,  nineteen  hundred  and  eleven,  all  glasses 
or  lenses  prescribed  by  paragraph  (b)  of  section  three  shall  be 
fresnel  or  fluted.  The  said  lights  shall  be  fitted  with  inboard 
screens  of  sufficient  height  and  so  set  as  to  prevent  these  lights 
from  being  seen  across  the  bow  and  shall  be  of  not  less  than  the 
following  dimensions  on  motor  boats  of — 

Class  two.  Eighteen  inches  long. 

Class  three.  Twenty-four  inches  long:  Provided.  That  motor 

boats  as  defined  in  this  Act,  when  propelled  by  sail  and  machinery 
or  under  sail  alone,  shall  carry  the  colored  lights  suitably  screened 
but  not  the  white  lights  prescribed  by  this  section. 

Sec.  4.  (a)  Every  motor  boat  under  the  provisions  of  this  Act 
shall  he  provided  with  a whistle  or  other  sound-producing  mechan- 
ical appliance  capable  of  producing  a blast  of  two  seconds  or 
more  in  duration,  and  in  the  case  of  such  boats  so  provided  a 
blast  of  at  least  two  seconds  shall  be  deemed  a prolonged  blast 
within  the  meaning  of  the  law. 

(b)  Every  motor  boat  of  class  two  or  three  shall  carry  an 
efficient  fog  horn. 

(c)  Every  motor  boat  of  class  two  or  three  shall  be  provided 
with  an  efficient  bell,  which  shall  be  not  less  than  eight  inches 
across  the  mouth  on  hoard  of  vessels  of  class  three. 

Sec.  5.  That  every  motor  boat  subject  to  any  of  the  provisions 
of  this  Act.  and  also  all  vessels  propelled  by  machinery  other  than 
by  steam  more  than  si.xty-five  feet  in  length,  shall  carry  either 


142 


life-preservers  or  life  belts,  or  buoyant  cushions,  or  ring  buoys  or 
otlier  device,  to  be  prescribed  by  tlie  Secretary  of  Commerce,  suffi- 
cient to  sustain  afloat  every  person  on  Ijoard  and  so  placed  as  to 
l)e  readily  accessible.  All  motor  boats  carrying  passengers  for 
hire  shall  carry  one  life-preserver  of  the  sort  ])rescribed  by  the 
regulations  of  the  board  of  supervising  inspectors  for  every  pas- 
senger carried,  and  no  such  boat  while  so  carrying  passengers  for 
hire  shall  be  operated  or  navigated  except  in  charge  of  a person 
duly  licensed  for  such  service  by  the  local  board  of  inspectors. 
No  examination  shall  be  required  as  the  condition  of  obtaining 
such  a license,  and  any  such  license  shall  be  revoked  or  suspended 
by  the  local  board  of  inspectors  for  misconduct,  gross  negligence, 
recklessness  in  navigation,  intemperance,  or  violation  of  law  on 
the  part  of  the  holder,  and  if  revoked  the  person  holding  such 
license  shall  be  incapable  of  obtaining  another  such  license  for 
one  year  from  the  date  of  revocation : Provided,  That  motor  boats 
shall  not  be  required  to  carry  licensed  officers,  except  as  required 
in  this  Act. 

8ec.  6.  flliat  every  motor  boat  and  also  every  vessel  propelled 
by  machinery  other  than  by  steam,  more  than  sixty-five  feet  in 
length,  shall  carry  ready  for  immediate  use  the  means  of  promptly 
and  efl'ectually  extinguishing  burning  gasoline. 

Sec.  7.  That  a fine  not  exceeding  one  hundred  dollars  may  be 
imposed  for  any  violation  of  this  Act.  The  motor  boat  shall  be 
liable  for  the  said  penalty  and  may  be  seized  and  proceeded 
against,  by  way  of  libel,  in  the  district  court  of  the  United  States 
for  any  distriet  within  which  such  vessel  may  be  found. 

Sec.  8.  That  the  Secretary  of  Commerce  shall  make  such  regula 
tions  as  may  be  necessary  to  secure  the  proper  execution  of  this 
Act  by  collectors  of  customs  and  other  officers  of  the  Government. 
And  the  Secretary  of  the  Department  of  Commerce  may.  upon 
application  therefor,  remit  or  mitigate  any  fine,  penalty,  or  for- 
feiture relating  to  motor  boats  except  for  failure  to  observe  the 
provisions  of  section  six  of  this  Act. 


143 


Sec.  0.  That  all  laws  and  parts  of  laws  only  in  so  far  as  they 
are  in  conflict  herewith  are  liereby  repealed:  Provided,  That 

nothing  in  tliis  Act  shall  be  deemed  to  alter  or  amend  Acts  of 
Congress  embodying  or  revising  international  rules  for  preventing 
collisions  at  sea. 

Sec.  10.  That  this  Act  shall  take  effect  on  and  after  thirty  days 
after  its  approval. 

Approved,  June  9,  1910. 

ACT  OF  SEPTEMBER  4,  1890,  IN  REGARD  TO  COLLISION  AT 
SEA,  THAT  WENT  INTO  EFFECT  DECEMBER  15,  1890. 

By  the  President  of  the  United  States  of  America. 

A proclamation. 

Whereas  an  act  of  Congress  in  regard  to  collisions  at  sea  was 
aj)proved  September  4,  1890,  the  said  act  being  in  the  following 
words : 

"Be  it  enacted  hy  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives  of 
the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  assemhled,  That  in  every 
case  of  collision  between  two  vessels  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  tlie 
master  or  person  in  charge  of  each  vessel,  if  and  so  far  as  he  can 
do  so  witliout  serious  danger  to  his  own  vessel,  crew,  and  pas 
sengers  (if  any),  to  stay  by  the  other  vessel  until  he  has  ascer 
tained  tliat  slie  has  no  need  of  furtlier  assistance,  and  to  render 
to  the  other  vessel,  her  master,  crew,  and  passengers  (if  any) 
such  assistance  as  may  be  practicable  and  as  may  be  necessary  in 
order  to  save  them  from  any  danger  caused  by  the  collision,  and 
also  to  give  to  the  master  or  person  in  charge  of  the  other  vessel 
the  name  of  his  own  vessel  and  lier  port  of  registry,  or  the  port 
or  place  to  wliicli  she  belongs,  and  also  the  name  of  the  ports  and 
places  from  which  and  to  which  she  is  bound.  If  he  fails  8o  to  do, 
and  no  reasonable  cause  for  such  failure  is  shown,  tlie  collision 
shall,  in  the  absence  of  proof  to  the  contrary,  be  deemed  to  have 
been  caused  by  his  wrongful  act,  neglect,  or  defaiilt. 


144 


“Sec.  2.  Tliat  every  master  or  person  in  charge  of  a United 
States  vessel  who  fails,  without  reasonable  cause,  to  render  such 
assistance  or  give  such  information  as  aforesaid  shall  be  deemed 
guilty  of  a misdemeanor,  and  shall  be  liable  to  a penalty  of  one 
thousand  dollars,  or  imprisonment  for  a term  not  exceeding  two 
years;  and  for  the  above  sum  the  vessel  shall  be  liable  and  may 
be  seized  and  proceeded  against  by  process  in  any  district  court 
of  the  United  States  by  any  person;  one-half  of  such  sum  to  be 
payable  to  the  informer  and  the  other  half  to  the  United  States. 

“Sec.  3.  That  this  act  shall  take  effect  at  a time  to  be  fixed  by 
the  President  by  Proclamation  issued  for  that  purpose.” 

And  whereas  it  is  provided  by  section  3 of  the  said  act  that  it 
shall  take  effect  at  a time  to  be  fixed  by  the  President  by  procla- 
mation issued  for  that  purpose: 

Now,  therefore,  1,  Benjamin  Harrison.  President  of  the  United 
States  of  America,  do  hereby,  in  virtue  of  the  authority  vested  in 
me  by  section  3 of  the  said  act,  proclaim  the  fifteenth  day  of 
December,  1890,  as  the  day  on  which  the  said  act  shall  take  effect. 

In  testimony  whereof  I have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and  caused 
the  seal  of  the  P^nited  States  of  America  to  be  affixed. 

Done  at  the  city  of  Washington  this  eighteenth  day  of  Novem- 
ber, in  the  year  of  our  Lord  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and 
ninety  and  of  the  Independence  of  the  United  States  the  one  hun- 
dred and  fifteenth. 

[SEAL.]  BEX.J.  HaRKISOX. 

By  the  President : 

J.\]«Es  G.  Blaixe,  Secretary  of  State. 

REGULATIONS  FOR  TOWS  OF  SEAGOI.XG  BARGES  WITHIN  INLAND 

WATERS. 

The  following  regulations  limit  the  length  of  hawsers  between 
towing  vessels  and  seagoing  barges  in  tow  and  the  length  of  such 
tows  within  inland  waters  of  the  Lhiited  States,  designated  and 
defined  from  time  to  time  pursuant  to  section  2 of  the  act 
approved  February  19,  1895.  These  regulations  have  been  pre- 


145 


pared  and  are  approved  by  the  Secretary  of  Commerce  pursuant 
to  section  14  of  the  act  approved  May  28,  1908,  entitled  “An  act 
to  amend  the  laws  relating  to  navigation,  and  for  other  pur- 
poses.” 

These  regulations  shall  take  effect  on  and  after  February  1, 
1909. 

REGULATIONS. 

1.  Tows  of  seagoing  barges  navigating  the  inland  waters  of  the 
United  States  are  limited  in  length  to  four  vessels,  including  the 
towing  vessel  or  vessels. 

2.  Hawsers  are  limited  in  length  to  75  fathoms,  measured  from 
the  stern  of  one  vessel  to  the  bow  of  the  following  v'essel ; and 
should  in  all  cases  be  as  much  shorter  as  the  weather  or  sea  will 
permit. 

3.  In  cases  where  the  prescribed  length  of  hawser  is,  in  the 
opinion  of  the  master  of  the  towing  vessel,  dangerous  on  account 
of  the  state  of  weather  or  sea,  hawsers  need  not  be  shortened  to 
that  length  until  reaching  the  localities  named  below : 

(a)  Tows  bound  for  Hampton  Roads  or  beyond,  before  passing 
Thimble  Light. 

(h)  Tows  bound  up  the  Chesapeake,  to  the  northward  of  Balti- 
more Light. 

(c)  Tows  l)ound  up  the  Delaware,  between  Fourteen  Foot  Bank 
and  Cross  Ledge  lighthouses. 

Hawsers  may  also  be  lengthened  in  the  same  places,  under  the 
same  circumstances,  when  tows  are  bound  out. 

4.  In  case  of  necessity,  on  account  of  wind  or  weather,  hawsers 
of  vessels  navigating  between  Race  Rock  and  Gay  Head  may  be 
lengthened  out  in  the  discretion  of  the  master  of  the  towing  ves- 
sel; but  this  paragraph  shall  not  apply  to  Xarragansett  Bay 
north  of  Beavertail  Light. 

5.  In  all  eases  where  tows  can  be  bunched  it  should  be  done. 

(a)  Tows  navigating  in  the  North  and  East  Rivers  of  New 


140 


York  must  be  bunclied  above  a line  drawn  betAveen  the  Statue  of 
Liberty  and  the  entrance  to  Erie  Basin.  Wlien  tows  are  enterin'.' 
Long  Island  Sound  from  the  Avestward,  the  lines  may  be  length- 
ened out  to  the  prescribed  length  after  passing  Fort  Schuyler; 
and  Avhen  bound  for  NeAv  York  from  Long  Island  Sound  toAvs 
must  be  bunched  before  passing  Whitestone  Point. 

( b ) Toavs  must  be  bunched  above  the  mouth  of  the  Schuylkill 
River,  Pa. 

6.  Section  L5  of  the  act  approved  May  28,  1908,  provides; 

That  the  master  of  the  toAving  vessel  shall  be  liable  to  the 

suspension  or  revocation  of  his  license  for  any  Avillful  violation  of 
regulations  issued  pursuant  to  section  14  in  the  manner  uoav  pre- 
scribed for  incompetency,  misconduct,  or  unskillfulness. 

7.  Any  violation  of  these  regulations  sliall  be  reported  in 
Avriting  as  soon  as  practicable  to  the  board  of  local  inspectors  of 
steam  A’essels  most  convenient  to  the  officer  or  other  person  Avho 
may  Avitness  the  violation. 


147 


TIDES. 

Lunitidal  intervals. 


Locality. 

Point  Judith 
Montauk  Point 
Stonington 
Gardiners  Bay 
Little  Peconic  Bay 
Great  Peconic  Bay 
Mew  London 

Connecticut  River  entrance 

Falkner  Island 

Mew  Haven 

Port  Jefferson 

Bridgeport 

Morwalk  Islands 

Huntington  Bay 

Oyster  Bay 

Captain  Harbor 

Hempstead  Harbor 

Mew  Rochelle 

Manhasset  Bay 

Willets  Point 

Hell  Gate 

Governor's  Island 

Tire  Marrows 

Sandy  Hook 

Great  Beds  Light.  Raritan  Bay 
Bergen  Point  Light,  Mewark  Bay 


Hi 

gh 

Low 

Mean 

water. 

water. 

range. 

li. 

m. 

h. 

m. 

Feet. 

7 

45 

1 

10 

3.1 

8 

20 

2 

03 

2.0 

8 

59 

2 

52 

2.7 

9 

50 

3 

35 

2.7 

11 

25 

5 

16 

2.3 

12 

11 

C 

10 

2.4 

9 

26 

3 

30 

2.5 

10 

29 

4 

11 

3.6 

10 

57 

4 

40 

5.4 

11 

08 

4 

54 

6.0 

11 

41 

5 

46 

6.6 

11 

09 

5 

04 

7.2 

11 

06 

5 

00 

7.2 

11 

06 

4 

59 

7 . 6 

11 

07  ■ 

5 

06 

7.3 

11 

07 

5 

02 

7.3 

11 

09 

5 

06 

7.2 

11 

1.3 

5 

10 

7.6 

11 

09 

5 

14 

7.2 

11 

09 

5 

22 

7.2 

10 

10 

3 

46 

5.1 

8 

04 

2 

05 

4.4 

7 

43 

1 

40 

4.6 

7 

35 

1 

27 

4.7 

7 

41 

1 

39 

5.3 

8 

15 

2 

22 

4.6 

148 


FOR  FOLLOWING  POINTS  ON  HUDSON  RIVER  ADD  TO 
GOVERNOR’S  ISLAND  TIDE: 


Weehawken 

20m. 

Spuyten  Duyvil 

41m. 

Yonkers 

57m. 

Sing  Sing 

Ih. 

49m. 

Ver  Planks 

2h. 

19m. 

West  Point  Point 

2h. 

50m. 

Newburgh 

3h. 

15m. 

Poughkeepsie 

3h. 

54m. 

Rondout 

4h. 

39m. 

Tivoli 

5h. 

24m. 

Catskill 

«h. 

2.‘>m. 

Stuyvesant 

7h. 

33m. 

Castleton 

8h. 

33m. 

Albany 

9h. 

33m. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  TIDAL  CURRENTS  IN  EAST  RIVER. 

The  currents  at  different  points  along  the  East  River  are 
greatly  modified  by  local  conditions. 

Off  Old  Ferry  Point  the  slack  before  ebl)  lasts  about  20  minutes 
and  tlie  slack  before  flood  about  18  minutes.  The  currents  are 
quite  irregular  in  this  region. 

Between  Lawrence  Point  and  ^Middle  Ground  slack  water 
usually  lasts  less  than  10  minutes.  The  currents  flows  directly 
along  the  channel. 

Off  Polhemus  Dock  slack  water  usually  lasts  from  5 to  10 
minutes.  Tlie  currents  follow  the  channel.  Close  to  Polhemus 
Dock,  within  200  feet,  eddy  currents  are  often  found. 

Between  Hallets  Point  and  Hogs  Back  8 miles  have  been 
measured  on  the  flood ; but  elsewhere  between  Lawrence  Point  and 
Blackwell’s  Island  3 and  4 miles  at  strength  of  ebb  and  flood  are 
characteristic. 


149 


Off  Hallets  Point  both  ebb  and  flood  set  directly  toward  the 
Frying  Pan  Shoal.  The  flood  current  (setting  eastward)  sweeps 
close  around  Hallets  Point  and  makes  less  eddy  in  the  cove  east- 
ward of  it  than  is  found  there  on  the  ebb. 

Between  Great  Mill  Rock  and  Wards  Island  the  flood  current 
has  numerous  though  not  violent  eddies.  The  slack  water  is  of 
only  a few  minutes’  duration.  The  main  stream  passes  to  the 
southward  of  Flood  Rock. 

Between  Hallets  Point  and  Flood  Rock  the  most  rapid  current 
on  the  ebb  is  very  close  to  Flood  Rock ; the  currents  are  direct 
and  strong,  with  comparatively  few  eddies. 

There  are  strong  eddies  off  Blackwell's  Island  Lighthouse  and 
off  Hatters  Dock  (the  northern  point  of  entrance  to  Hallets 
Cove) . 

In  Blackwell’s  Island  Western  Channel  slack  water  usually 
lasts  less  than  10  minutes.  The  currents  follow  the  channel,  and 
turn  at  nearly  the  same  time  throughout  its  length. 

In  Blackwell’s  Island  Eastern  Channel  slack  water  usually 
lasts  less  than  5 minutes.  Tire  current  generally  begins  to  follow 
the  channel  within  30  minutes  of  its  slack.  It  has  at  no  time 
any  considerable  velocity  crosswise  the  channel.  On  the  Black- 
well’s Island  side  the  current  is  about  the  same  as  in  the  channel, 
even  to  within  a few  feet  of  the  sea  wall.  Both  on  the  ebb  and 
flood  there  is  little  cxirrent  in  the  vicinity  of  the  sea  wall  on  the 
Long  Island  side.  Tlie  currents  turn  at  nearly  the  same  time 
throughout  the  length  of  this  channel. 

Off  East  Twenty-third  Street  slack  water  lasts  from  4 to  8 
minutes.  The  strength  of  the  ebb  is  nearly  3 miles. 


150 


ANCHORAGES,  PORT  OF  NEW  YORK. 


Department  of  Commerce  and  L.\bor, 

Office  of  the  Secretary, 
Washington,  June  15,  1911 

The  following-described  anchorage  grounds  for  vessels  in  the  bay 
and  harbor  of  NeM'  York  and  in  the  Hudson  and  East  Rivers, 
respectively,  are  hereby  defined  and  established,  and  the  following 
revised  rules  and  regulations  governing  the  same  are  published  for 
the  government  of  the  owner,  master,  pilot,  or  other  persons 
having  charge  of  a steam  vessel  towing  or  otherwise  conducting 
a vessel  to  an  anchorage  in  the  port  of  New  York,  pursuant  to  the 
act  of  Congress  approved  3la_y  16.  18S8: 

(a)  Vessels  shall  anchor  only  within  the  following  specified 
limits,  and  a vessel  anchoring  within  any  of  the  below-described 
boundaries  must  anchor  entirely  within  said  boundaries,  so  that 
no  portion  of  the  hull  shall  extend  beyond  said  boundary  after 
veering  chain  or  when  riding  to  a tideway. 

(b)  No  vessel  shall  anchor  in  any  of  the  channels  except  in 
cases  of  great  emergency,  and  then  as  near  the  edge  of  the  channel 
as  possible,  so  as  not  to  impede  or  interfere  with  the  free  naviga- 
tion of  the  same,  and  only  until  such  time  as  they  can  procure 
assistance ; and  no  vessel  shall  anchor  so  as  to  obstruct  the 
approach  to  any  ])ier  or  impede  the  movement  of  any  ferryboat. 

(c)  All  stake  boats  used  for  assembling  barges,  canal  boats, 
and  other  vessels  preparatory  to  being  made  up  in  tows,  and  ves- 
sels used  for  storing  explosives  and  moored  only  in  the  anchorage 
for  explosives,  as  described  in  paragraph  2.  No.  27,  may  be  moored 
under  permits  granted  by  the  supervisor  of  anchorages  and  moored 
only  in  such  places  as  he  may  designate. 

{d)  A vessel  upon  being  notified  to  move  into  the  anchorage 
limits  must  at  once  get  under  way  or  make  a signal  for  a tug. 


151 


(e)  Permits  may  be  granted  by  the  supervisor  of  anchorages  to 
wrecking  plants  to  anclior  in  the  channel  for  the  purpose  of 
recovering  sunken  property,  subject  to  his  supervision.  Such 
wrecking  plants  must  comply  with  all  the  navigation  laws  in 
regard  to  lights,  fog  signals,  etc.,  and  in  granting  such  permit  the 
Government  assumes  no  responsibility. 

(g)  All  ash  scows  the  property  of  the  municipalities  bordering 
on  the  waters  of  the  port  may  be  anchored  in  such  places  as  the 
supervisor  of  anchorages  may  designate. 

(h)  The  creation  of  any  obstruction,  not  affirmatively  author- 
ized by  law,  to  the  navigable  capacity  of  any  waters  in  respect  of 
which  the  United  States  has  jurisdiction  is  hereby  prohibited. 

(t)  No  vessel  shall  occupy  permanent  berths  in  the  anchorages 
except  as  provided  for  in  these  anchorage  rules  and  regulations. 

(i)  The  supervisor  of  anchorages  shall  assign  berths  in  the 
respective  anchorages  to  all  vessels  applying  for  them. 

(k)  All  officers  of  revenue  vessels  at  the  port  of  New  York  are 
charged  with  the  enforcement  of  these  rules  and  regulations,  and 
are  empowered  to  remove  from  her  anchorage  any  vessel  not 
anchoring  within  the  prescribed  limits. 


EAST  KIVER  ANCHORAGES. 

1.  To  the  northward  of  a line  from  the  south  point  of  Hart 
Island  to  Wrights  Point. 

2.  To  the  westward  of  a line  from  Wrights  Point  to  Throgs 
Neck. 

3.  To  the  southward  of  a line  from  buoy  off  Sands  Point  to 
buoy  off  Gangway  Rock. 

4.  To  the  southward  of  a line  from  buoy  off  Gangway  Rock  to 
center  of  Stepping  Stones  lighthouse. 

5.  To  the  eastward  of  a line  from  the  center  of  Stepping  Stones 
lighthouse  to  Willets  Point. 

6.  On  Hammond  Flats  to  the  northward  of  a line  from  Old 
Ferry  Point  to  the  head  of  Engineers  Wharf,  Throgs  Neck,  the 


152 


said  line  running  about  magnetic  east  and  west  between  said 
points. 

7.  To  the  southward  of  a line  from  Willets  Point  to  Whitestone 
Point. 

8.  On  the  north  side  of  the  channel,  north  of  a line  between 
Old  Ferry  Point  and  Hunts  Point. 

9.  On  the  south  side  of  the  channel,  south  of  a line  between 
Whitestone  Point  and  buoy  (No.  1)  off  College  Point,  and  to  the 
eastward  of  a line  running  from  said  buoy  to  College  Point. 

10.  In  Flushing  Bay,  to  the  southward  of  a line  from  College 
Point  to  the  north  end  of  Bikers  Island. 

11.  To  the  southward  of  a line  from  the  north  end  of  Bikers 
Island  to  the  north  end  of  South  Brother  Island,  thence  to  Law- 
rence Point. 

12.  To  the  westward  of  a line  from  Stony  Point  to  northeast 
end  of  Wards  Island;  and  between  Wards  Island  and  Bandalls 
Island,  and  between  Bandalls  Island  and  Port  Morris. 

13.  To  the  westward  of  a line  from  the  foot  of  One  hundred  and 
sixteenth  Street,  New  York,  to  the  north  end  of  Avenue  B,  New 
York,  but  no  vessels  shall  anchor  on  this  anchorage  within  150 
feet  of  any  wharf  or  pier,  or  so  as  to  impede  the  movements  of  a 
ferry,  or  so  as  to  prevent  ready  access  to  or  from  the  piers. 

14.  To  the  eastward  of  a line  from  Hatters  Dock  to  Gibbs  Point 
(Hallets  Cove,  Astoria). 

15.  To  the  southward  of  Thirty-second  Street  Pier  and  the 
northward  of  'Twenty-fourth  Street  Pier,  and  to  the  westward 
of  a line  passing  through  the  horizontal  striped  buoy  off  Nine- 
teenth Street,  running  thence  N.  by  E.  % E.  (cor.  mag.).  Vessels 
may  anchor  anywhere  within  these  limits,  provided  they  do  not 
obstruct  the  approach  to  any  pier  or  impede  the  movements  of 
any  ferryboat ; and  the  officer  in  charge  of  anchorage  grounds  may, 
whenever  he  deems  it  advisable,  move  or  cause  to  move  any  vessel 
not,  in  his  opinion,  complying  with  this  proviso. 

Bange  for  outer  boundary  of  this  anchorage:  When  steering  on 
this  range  (bl.  by  E.  i/g  E.,  cor.  mag.)  you  should  look  squarely 


153 


into  the  new  Forty-second  Street  Ferry  Slip,  on  the  center  of  the 
axis  of  which  is  a prominent  dark  chimney. 


SOUTH  ANCHORAGE,  HUDSON  RU’ER. 

16.  Vessels  may  anchor  in  the  Hudson  River  to  the  westward 
of  a line  100  yards  west  of  the  center  line  of  said  river ; that  the 
northeast  boundary  of  this  anchorage  shall  be  a line  drawn  from 
just  below  the  tVeehawken  terminal  of  the  West  Shore  ferries 
S.  % E.  to  the  end  of  the  Thirty-fourth  Street  Pier.  Xew  York ; 
tliat  the  southern  limit  of  this  anchorage  be  a line  from  tbe  end 
of  the  Erie  Railroad  Co.’s  coal  pier,  Hoboken,  to  tbe  end  of  the 
Twenty-fifth  Street  Pier,  Xew  Yoik,  about  SE  % E. 


MIDDLE  ANCHORAGE,  HUDSON  RIVER. 

17.  ^'essels  may  anchor  in  the  Hudson  River  within  the  limits 
of  the  port  of  New  York  to  the  westward  of  the  center  line  of 
said  river  running  about  NE  % N (cor.  mag.)  from  Castle  Point, 
Hoboken,  through  the  white  anchorage  buoy  off  Sixtieth  Street 
to  the  northward  of  a line  running  from  the  southeast  corner  of 
West  Shore  Pier  No.  3,  Weehawken.  to  the  center  of  the  Fifty- 
fourth  Street  Pier,  New  York,  about  SE  y,  E (cor.  mag.)  and 
to  the  southward  of  a line  running  from  the  outer  end  of  the 
Guttenburg  Pier  to  the  outer  end  of  the  West  Seventieth  Street 
Pier,  New  York. 

In  no  case  shall  a vessel  anchor  within  200  yards  of  the  shore 
in  either  of  these  Hudson  River  anchorages. 


UPPER  ANCHORAGE,  HUDSON  RIVER. 

18.  To  the  northward  of  a line  drawn  from  the  pier  on  the 
Guttenburg  side  directly  across  the  river  to  Eightieth  Street. 
New  York,  to  the  westward  of  a line  parallel  to  and  125  yards  to 
the  westward  of  the  center  line  of  the  river. 


134 


Note. — Small  vessels  may  anchor  inside  the  pierhead  lines  as 
established  by  the  Board  of  Engineers,  United  States  Army,  along 
the  east  bank  of  the  Hudson  River  between  Eighty-first  Street  and 
One  hundred  and  twenty-first  Street,  and  between  One  hundred 
and  thirty-second  Street  and  One  hundred  and  fifty-eighth  Street, 
in  the  discretion  of  the  supervisor  of  ancliorages.  but  the  officer  in 
charge  of  anchorage  grounds  may,  whenever  he  deems  it  advisable, 
move  or  cause  to  move  any  vessel  not,  in  his  opinion,  complying 
with  this  proviso. 

NAVAL  ANCHORAGE,  HUDSON  RIVER. 

19.  An  anchorage  is  set  aside  for  naval  vessels  to  moor  in  a 
single  line  on  the  east  side  of  Hudson  River  north  of  Seventy-ninth 
Street,  and  thence  to  Fort  Washington  Point,  and  above  that 
point  if  necessary.  Its  southernmost  limit  shall  be  north  of  the 
northernmost  cable  crossing  the  river  at  Seventy -ninth  Street,  and 
extending  northeastwardly  on  the  east  side  of  the  river.  Anchors 
shall  be  let  go  to  the  eastward  of  a line  drawn  250  yards  from 
the  end  of  the  pier  at  Seventy-ninth  Street  to  250  yards  from  the 
end  of  the  pier  at  the  foot  of  One  Imndrcd  and  twenty-ninth 
Street ; tlience  to  a point  3.30  yards  from  the  pier  at  the  foot  of 
One  hundred  and  fifty-eighth  Street;  and  thence  northeasterly, 
following  the  general  line  of  the  24-foot  curve  on  the  east  side  of 
the  river  and  250  yards  distant  from  the  salient  point  of  this 
curve.  No  ships  shall  anchor  within  a limit  of  .300  yards  of  the 
prolongation  of  One  hundred  and  thirtieth  Street,  in  order  to 
give  free  passage  for  the  Fort  Lee  ferryboats.  The  destroyers 
and  other  light-draft  naval  vessels  may  anchor  on  the  west  side 
of  the  river  west  of  the  18-foot  curve  as  shown  on  Coast  Survey 
chart  No.  369*. 


W'ESTERN  ANCHORAGE,  UPPER  BAT. 

20.  To  the  southward  of  a range  passing  through  ^Montague 
Street,  Brooklyn,  and  the  white  buoy  to  the  north  and  east  of  Ellis 
Island;  to  the  westward  of  a line  running  SW  by  S (nearly)  from 


GROVER  C.  BERGDOLL 

155 

the  said  white  buoy  to  a point  one-third  of  a mile  ESE  % E from 
the  red  bell  buoy  at  the  entrance  of  Greenville  Channel.  In  order 
to  prevent  vessels  fouling  the  Ellis  Island  cable,  the  buoy  marking 
tlie  nortliern  limit  of  the  cluinnel  to  Ellis  Island  and  the  buoy 
marking  the  southern  entrance  to  said  eliannel  have  been  moved 
so  as  to  leave  a space  of  800  yards  clear  water  between  the 
anchorage  grounds  north  of  the  Ellis  Island  Channel  and  the 
anchorage  grounds  south  of  said  channel,  but  the  ranges  other- 
wise retain  their  same  magnetic  bearings. 

No  vessel  shall  anchor  between  Ellis  Island  and  the  piers  of  the 
Central  Railroad  of  New  Jersey,  or  in  the  dredged  channel  ap- 
proaches to  this  space. 

No  vessel  shall  anchor  in  the  Black  Tom  or  Greenville  dredged 
channels  nor  near  the  entrances  to  said  channels  so  as  to  obstruct 
the  approaches  or  interfere  in  any  way  with  the  free  navigation 
of  the  same. 

Note. — Vessels  are  especially  cautioned  not  to  anchor  in  Ellis 
Island  Channel,  thereby  endangering  the  cable  in  said  channel.  In 
addition  to  the  penalty  for  illegal  anchorage,  the  owners  of  vessels 
which  foul  the  above-mentioned  cable  will  be  liable  for  the  damage 
resulting  therefrom,  including  the  cost  of  clearing,  which  should 
be  done,  in  order  to  reduce  the  injury  to  a minimum,  by  signaling 
for  the  Western  Union  Co.’s  tug. 

20.  To  the  northward  of  a line  from  Constables  Point  to  Rob- 
bins Reef  bell  buoy ; to  the  westward  of  a line  from  Robbins  Reef 
bell  buoy  to  the  bell  buoy  at  entrance  to  Greenville  Channel,  and 
south  of  said  channel. 

EASTERN  ANCHORAGE,  UPPER  BAY. 

21.  To  the  southward  of  a line  passing  through  the  Statue  of 
Liberty  on  Bedloes  Island,  the  two  white  buoys  marking  the 
north  limit  of  anchorage  ground  and  the  southern  point  of  the 
north  entrance  to  the  Erie  Basin ; to  the  eastward  of  a range 
passing  through  Produce  Exchange  tower  and  buoy  No.  14  and 
bell  buoy  off  Owls  Head,  and  thence  marked  on  the  eastern  and 


150 


southeastern  limits  by  four  white  anchorage  buoys  along  the 
western  edge  of  the  widened  Bay  Ridge  and  Red  Hook  Channels. 
These  buoys  will  eventually  be  replaced  by  proper  channel  buoys 
marking  the  edge  of  the  dredged  channel.  On  and  after  July  1, 
1001,  vessels  will  not  be  allowed  to  anchor  to  the  eastward  and 
southward  of  said  line  of  buoys.  Small  vessels  may,  in  the 
discretion  of  the  supervisor  of  anchorages,  anchor  to  the  south- 
ward and  eastward  of  the  Bay  Ridge  Channel,  provided  they  are 
inside  of  the  pierhead  lines  as  established  by  the  Board  of  En- 
gineers, United  States  Army.  Small  vessels  may,  in  the  discre- 
tion of  the  supervisor  of  anchorages,  anchor  at  the  mouth  of 
Gowanus  Bay,  to  the  eastward  of  a line  tangent  to  the  south- 
western edge  of  Erie  Basin  bulkhead,  and  running  thence  S by  E 
(cor.  mag.),  but  so  as  to  leave  a clear  channel  of  150  yards 
along  the  northern  shore,  Tlie  supervisor  of  anchorages  may,  in 
liis  discretion,  remove  any  vessel  not  complying  with  the  pro- 
visions hereof. 


EASTERN  ANCHORAGE,  I.OU'ER  BAT. 

22.  To  the  eastward  of  a line  drawn  through  Fort  Lafayette  in 
a S by  E (mag.)  direction,  and  to  the  northward  of  a line  drawn 
from  Coney  Island  lighthouse,  on  Norton  Point,  to  Hoffman 
Island,  approximately  WNW  % W (mag.). 


STATEN  ISLAND  ANCHOR.AGE. 

23.  To  the  southward  of  a line  from  St.  George  Ferry  flagstaff 
to  the  white  buoy  off  St.  George  Landing,  and  to  the  westward 
of  a line  running  S % W (nearly)  from  the  white  buoy  off  St. 
George  Landing,  through  the  white  buoy  off  Tompkinsville,  and  as 
far  south  as  a point  off  Clifton,  Staten  Island.  To  the  westward 
of  a line  running  SSE  14  E (nearly)  from  Fort  Tompkins  to  the 
buoy  on  Craven  Shoal:  thence  to  buoys  Nos.  11,  9,  and  7;  thence 
to  Conovers  beacon. 


157 


The  part  of  anchorafie  23  lying  between  the  northern  boundary 
and  the  white  buoy  800  yards  south  of  said  boundary  is  reserved 
for  ships  of  war  of  all  nations  and  vessels  of  the  United  States 
Government. 

QUABA^"TI^•E  ANCHORAGE. 

24.  To  the  southward  of  a line  passing  through  Clifton.  Staten 
Island,  and  a point  off  same,  and  to  the  westward  of  a line  from 
the  point  off  Clifton,  Staten  Island,  to  the  bell  at  Fort  Wads- 
worth. 

Vessels  arriving  at  quarantine  and  awaiting  inspection  may 
anchor  temporarily  to  the  westward  of  a range  passing  through 
Craven  Shoal  buoy  and  Robbins  Reef  lighthouse,  but  as  soon  as 
cleared  by  the  quarantine  officer  must  vacate  this  temporary 
anchorage,  and  if  detained  in  quarantine  must  at  once  move  into 
the  quarantine  anchorage. 

SANDY  HOOK  ANCHORAGE. 

25.  To  the  southward  of  a line  extending  from  Xorth  Hook 
Beacon  liglithouse  to  Point  Comfort  Beacon  lighthouse. 

26.  Vessels  may  anchor  on  Dry  Romer  Shoal  and  Flynns  Knoll. 
Care  must  be  observed  not  to  fonl  the  United  States  Signal  Corps 
cable,  which  crosses  Flynns  Knoll. 

ANCHORAGE  FOR  EXPLOSiraS. 

27.  Vessels  carrying  gunpowder  or  other  explosives  may  anchor 
only  as  follows : 

First.  On  the  shoal  ground  to  the  eastward  of  Rikers  Island, 
East  River,  from  one-fourth  to  five-eighths  of  a mile  from  this 
island. 

Second.  On  tlie  New  Jersey  Flats  between  a line  drawn  parallel 
to  and  1,500  feet  to  the  south  of  the  Black  Tom  dredged  channel 
and  a line  drawn  parallel  to  and  1,500  feet  north  of  the  Green- 


158 


ville  dredged  channel,  and  to  tlie  westward  of  a line  from  Bedloes 
Island  to  Robbins  Reef,  providf'd  that  they  do  not  anchor  within 
1,000  yards  of  Bedloes  Island,  or  within  500  yards  of  any  pier. 

Third.  Vessels  (carrying  explosives)  of  too  great  draft  to  use 
the  above  anchorages  may  anchor  only  in  Gravesend  Bay,  on  a 
line  drawn  from  Fort  Hamilton  to  the  western  tip  of  Mortons 
Point,  Coney  Island,  hut  not  within  1,000  yards  of  the  shore. 
All  vessels  laden  with  explosives  while  within  the  port  will  dis- 
play at  all  times  a red  flag  of  at  least  16  square  feet  surface 
at  the  masthead.  Vessels  so  laden  and  without  masts  will  dis- 
play the  flag  at  least  10  feet  above  the  uppermost  deck.  All  such 
vessels  must  he  at  all  times  in  charge  of  competent  persons  and 
must  comply  with  the  navigation  laws  in  regard  to  lights  and 
fog  signals. 


SHEEPSHEAD  BAY. 

28.  No  vessel  shall  anchor  or  moor  so  that  under  any  conditions 
of  wind  and  tide  it  will  he  within  100  feet  of  the  wliarves  or  floats 
along  the  north  shore  of  Sheepshead  Bay,  or  within  100  feet  of  the 
bulkhead  or  beach  at  low  tide  along  the  south  shore  of  the  hay. 
or  within  200  feet  east  of  the  footbridge  crossing  the  hay  from 
the  foot  of  Ocean  Avenue  to  the  Manhattan  Beach  property.  Tliis 
shall  not  prevent  small  vessels  from  mooring,  not  more  than  two 
abreast,  to  the  outside  of  floats  and  wharves  along  the  north 
shore,  or  the  mooring  of  such  vessels  as  may  have  the  consent  of 
the  property  owners  to  the  bulkhead  on  the  south  side  of  the  bay. 
hut  in  no  case  shall  vessels  so  moored  extend  more  than  30  feet 
from  said  bulkhead,  if  moored  thereto,  or  from  the  beach  line  at 
low  tide  if  not  moored  to  bulkhead. 

ANCHORAGE  LHMITS,  KILL  VAN  KULL.  NEWARK  BAY. 

ARTHUR  KILL,  AND  RARITAN  BAY. 

The  following-described  anchorage  grounds  for  vessels  in  the 
waters  of  Kill  van  Kull,  Newark  Bay,  Arthur  Kill,  and  Raritan 


159 


Bay  are  hereby  defined  and  established  for  the  information  of  the 
owners,  masters,  pilots,  or  other  persons  anchoring  vessels  or 
having  charge  of  steam  vessels  towing  or  otherwise  conducting 
vessels  to  an  anchorage,  pursuant  to  the  act  of  Congress  approved 
March  3,  1899,  extending  the  act  of  May  16,  1888,  relating  to  the 
anchorage  of  vessels  in  the  port  of  New  York. 

No  vessel  shall  anchor  in  any  of  the  channels,  except  in  cases  of 
great  emergency,  and  then  as  near  the  edge  of  the  channel  as  pos- 
sible, so  as  not  to  impede  or  interfere  with  the  free  navigation  of 
the  same,  and  no  vessel  shall  anchor  so  as  to  obstruct  the  approach 
to  any  pier  or  impede  the  movement  of  any  ferryboat. 

Any  violation  of  these  rules  and  regulations  will  subject  the 
owner,  master,  or  person  in  charge  of  the  vessel  so  offending  to  a 
penalty  of  $100. 


KILL  VAN  KULL  ANCHORAGE. 

1.  To  the  northward  of  a line  running  through  red  buoy  No.  2 
from  Newark  Bay  lighthouse  to  south  end  of  city  wharf,  Bergen 
Point,  and  thence  running  east  by  north  through  chimney  of 
Pacific  Coast  Borax  Works. 

2.  To  the  southward  of  a line  running  E ]/g  N from  north  end 
of  Starins  Dock,  foot  of  North  Street,  Port  Richmond,  to  the 
north  end  of  McWilliams  Dock,  West  Brighton,  and  thence  to 
Livingston  Point. 

3.  To  the  southward  of  a line  running  W % N from  Standard 
Varnish  Works,  Port  Richmond,  to  north  end  of  Milling  Dock. 

4.  To  the  westward  of  a line  running  N by  W % W from  north 
end  of  long  dock,  Mariners  Harbor,  to  Corner  Stake,  and  to  the 
southward  of  a line  running  W % S from  Corner  Stake  to  the 
east  end  of  Government  dike. 


100 


NEWABK  BAY  ANCHORAGE. 

1.  To  the  westward  of  a line  running  NE  y,  X from  east  end  of 
Shooters  Island  to  black  buoy  No.  1. 

2.  To  the  eastward  of  a line  running  NE  by  N N from  New- 
ark Bay  lighthouse  to  a point  500  feet  east  of  east  end  of  draw  of 
Central  Railroad  bridge. 

3.  To  the  westward  of  a line  running  SW  by  S % S from 
Passaic  lighthouse  to  a point  500  feet  west  of  west  end  of  draw 
of  Central  Railroad  bridge. 

4.  To  the  eastward  of  a line  running  nearly  NE  by  N from  point 
500  feet  east  of  east  end  of  draw  of  Central  Railroad  bridge  to  a 
point  500  feet  east  of  east  end  of  draw  of  the  Lehigh  Valley  Rail- 
road bridge,  and  thence  to  point  of  land  at  intersection  of  the 
Passaic  and  Hackensack  Rivers,  said  line  running  N Vg  E. 


ARTHUR  KILL  ANCHORAGE. 

1.  To  southeast  of  a line  from  huoy  No.  4 to  west  end  of  Central 
Railroad  bridge  and  north  of  a line  from  buoy  No.  4 to  buoy 
No.  2. 

2.  To  the  westward  of  a line  running  nearly  N by  E from  wharf 
of  Extracting  Works  through  Buckwheat  Island  to  Clarks  Wire 
Works. 

3.  Tlie  passage  lietween  Trails  Island  and  Staten  Island  in- 
cluded between  a line  running  NE  y,  N from  extreme  west  point 
of  Trails  Island  to  a point  on  Staten  Island,  and  a line  from 
southern  point  of  Trails  Island  to  old  wharf  off  Linoleumville. 

4.  To  the  southward  of  a line  from  anchorage  buoy  placed  250 
yards  NW  of  Smoking  Point,  to  anchorage  buoy,  bearing  W by  S 
% S,  and  thence  to  buoy  No.  4,  oft'  Sewaren,  hearing  SW  by  W 
% W. 

5.  To  the  eastward  of  a line  from  Krieschersville  Wharf  to  buoy 
No.  4. 


161 


TOTTENVILLE  ANCHORAGE. 

1.  To  the  eastward  of  a line  running  NE  by  E from  buoy  No.  2 
to  point  on  Staten  Island. 

PERTH  AMBOY  ANCHORAGE. 

1.  To  the  northward  and  westward  of  a line  running  from  red 
and  black  buoy  to  south  end  of  Lehigh  Valley  coal  docks. 

2.  To  the  westward  of  a line  running  from  Great  Beds  light- 
house to  the  red  and  black  buoy  on  the  north  end  of  middle 
ground  off  Perth  Amboy. 

SOUTH  AMBOY  ANCHORAGE. 

1.  To  the  southw'ard  of  a line  from  buoy  No.  9 to  eastern  pier 
(Wyoming)  of  coal  docks. 

2.  To  the  northward  of  a line  running  SE  14  ® from  center  of 
pier  of  Raritan  River  drawbridge,  through  anchorage  buoy  off 
coal  docks,  to  anchorage  buoy  placed  NE  by  N,  175  yards  from 
buoy  No.  9. 

RARITAN  BAY  ANCHORAGE. 

1.  To  the  eastward  of  red  buoy  and  westward  of  black  buoy  of 
the  dredged  channel. 

2.  To  tlie  southward  of  a line  from  buoy  No.  3 to  buoy  No.  5. 

3.  To  the  eastward  of  a line  running  SW  by  W i/g  W from  buoy 
No.  5 to  anchorage  buoy,  and  to  the  southward  of  a line  from 
said  anchorage  buoy  to  buoy  No.  7 and  thence  to  buoy  No.  9. 

4.  To  the  northward  of  a line  running  from  factory  on  Seguine 
Point  to  Princess  Bay  lighthouse. 

5.  To  the  westward  of  a line  running  from  Princess  Bay  light- 
liouse  to  buoy  No.  6. 

6.  To  the  westward  of  a line  running  from  buoy  No.  0 to  buoy 
No.  10. 


162 

7.  To  the  eastward  of  a line  running  due  north  from  buoy 
No.  10. 

KEYPORT  HARBOR  ANCHORAGE. 

To  the  eastward  of  eastern  boundary  and  to  the  westward  of 
western  boundary  of  dredged  channel  extending  from  old  railroad 
dock  to  wharves  of  tlie  New  York  & Keyport  Steamboat  Co. 


VARIATION  OF  THE  COMPASS. 


The  magnetic  variations  for 
mentioned  are  as  follows: 

Locality. 

Point  .ludith 

Montauk  Point 

Gardiners  Bay 

New  London  Harbor 

Connecticut  River  entrance 

New  Haven  Harbor 

Bridgeport  Harbor 

Greens  Ledge  Lighthouse 

Huntington  Bay 

Great  Captain  Island 

Throgs  Neck 

Shinnecock  Liglithousc 

Fire  Island  Light  Vessel 

New  York  Bay  entrance 

New  York  LTpper  Bay 

Haverstraw 

Kingston 

Hudson 

Albany 


and  annual  increase  at  points 

Annual 
Variation,  increase. 


0 

/ 

12 

4o  W. 

G 

12 

00 

0 

11 

30 

G 

12 

00 

G 

11 

45 

6 

11 

30 

G 

11 

00 

5 

10 

45 

5 

10 

30 

5 

10 

30 

3 

10 

15 

3 

11 

15 

6 

10 

15 

5 

9 

45 

0 

10 

00 

5 

10 

30 

5 

11 

00 

5 

11 

30 

5 

12 

00 

5 

19L5 


163 


BUOYAGE. 

LOXG  ISLAND  SOUND. 

Tlie  sequence  of  Sound  buoy  numbers  commences  at  Buoy  No.  1 
off  Little  Gull  Island,  and  No.  2 off  Race  Point,  Fishers  Island, 
and  thence  west  to  a line  drawn  tangent  to  the  west  side  of  Fort 
Schuyler,  Throgs  Neck,  and  running  southeasterly  to  Willets 
Point. 


EAST  RIVER  FROM  LONG  ISLAND  SOUND. 

The  sequence  of  buoy  numbers  in  East  River,  from  the  east, 
commences  at  the  line  of  demarcation  at  Fort  Schuyler,  Throgs 
Neck,  and  extends  to  the  westward  to  a line  drawn  from  the 
Borough  of  Manhattan  to  the  Borough  of  Brooklyn  across  the 
East  River  at  Tenth  Street,  Borough  of  ^Manhattan,  except  the 
channel  on  the  westerly  side  of  the  island,  leading  into  Harlem 
River. 


EAST  RIVER  FROM  NEW  YORK  LTPER  BAY. 

The  sequence  of  buoy  numbers  in  East  River,  from  the  south, 
commences  at  a line  drawn  tangent  to  the  pierhead  line.  New 
York  City,  and  running  south-south-westerly  to  Bay  Ridge,  and 
extends  to  the  line  drawn  across  the  East  River  at  Tenth  Street, 
Borough  of  Manhattan,  and,  through  the  westerly  channel,  to 
Harlem. 


HUDSON  RIVER. 

The  sequence  of  buoy  numbers  in  Hudson  River  commences  at 
a line  drawn  tangent  to  the  Battery,  New  \*ork  City,  and  running 
northwesterly  to  New  Jersey,  The  sequence  extends  northerly  to 
Troy. 


164 


NEW  YORK  LO^\^;R  AND  UPPER  BAY. 

The  sequence  of  buoy  numbers  in  New  York  Lower  and  Upper 
Bays  and  approaches  thereto  commences  at  the  Atlantic  Ocean 
and  extends  northerly  to  a line  drawn  tangent  to  the  Battery, 
New  York  City,  and  extending  northwesterly  to  New  Jersey,  and 
southeasterly  to  Brooklyn. 

ARTHUR  KILL,  TOTTENVILLE  TO  ELIZABETHPORT. 

The  sequence  of  buoy  numbers  commences  at  Tottenville,  Staten 
Island,  and  extends  to  Elizabethport,  N.  J. 


Starting,  stopping,  and  backing  signals  for  steam  vessels 

NAVIGATING  THE  WATERS  OF  THE  EIGHTH  AND  NINTH  SUPERVISING 

INSPECTION  DISTRICTS,  AND  SO  MUCH  OF  LAKE  SUPERIOR  AS  IS 

INCLUDED  IN  THE  FIFTH  DISTRICT. 

Tlie  eighth  district  embraces  all  the  waters  of  the  lakes  north 
and  west  of  Lake  Erie,  with  their  tributaries,  except  the  portion 
of  Lake  Superior  which  is  bounded  by  the  states  of  Minnesota  and 
Wisconsin,  and  also  includes  the  upper  portion  of  the  Illinois 
River  down  to  and  including  Peoria,  111. 

The  ninth  district  embraces  all  the  waters  of  Lakes  Erie, 
Ontario,  Champlain,  Memphremagog,  and  the  river  St.  Law- 
rence, and  their  tributaries. 

There  shall  be  used  between  the  master  or  pilot  and  engineer 
the  following  code  of  signals,  to  be  made  by  bell  or  whistle, 


namely : 

1 whistle  or  1 bell  Go  ahead. 

1 whistle  or  1 bell  Stop. 

2 whistles  or  2 bells  Back. 

3 whistles  or  3 bells  Check. 

4 whistles  or  4 bells  Strong. 

4 whistles  or  4 bells  All  right. 


105 


Two  whistles  or  two  bells  shall  always  mean  back,  irrespective 
of  other  signals  previously  given. 


The  signals  between  the  pilot  house  and  engine  room  on 
Alaskan  rivers  shall  be  as  follows: 


When  at  rest,  1 jingle 

Stand  by. 

1 stroke  of  gong 

Ahead  full  speed. 

2 strokes  of  gong 

Astern  full  speed. 

1 stroke  of  gong 

Stop  when  going 

ahead  or  astern. 

1 stroke  of  gong  and  1 

jingle 

Ahead  half  speed. 

2 strokes  of  gong  and 

1 jingle 

Astern  half  speed. 

When  going  astern 

or  ahead 

half 

speed, 

1 jingle 

Full  speed. 

When  going  astern 

or  ahead 

full 

speed, 

1 jingle 

Half  speed. 

When  going  ahead 

or  astern, 

any 

speed, 

2 jingles 

Very  slow. 

166 


INTERXATIONAL  RULES. 

I. ENACTING  CLAUSE.  SCOPE,  AND  PENALTY. 

Be  it  enacted  hy  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives  of 
the  United  States  of  America  iji  Congress  assembled,  Tliat  the 
following-  I’egulatioiis  for  preventing  collisions  at  sea  shall  be 
followed  hy  all  public  and  private  vessels  of  the  United  States 
upon  the  high  seas  and  in  all  waters  connected  therewith,  naviga- 
ble by  seagoing  vessels. 

Art.  30.  Nothing  in  these  rules  shall  interfere  with  the  opera- 
tion of  a special  rule,  duly  made  by  local  authority,  relative  to 
the  navigation  of  any  harbor,  river,  or  inland  waters. 

PRELIMINARY  DEFINITIONS. 

In  the  following  rules  every  steam  vessel  which  is  under  sail 
and  not  under  steam  is  to  be  considered  a sailing  vessel,  and 
every  vessel  under  steam,  whether  under  sail  or  not,  is  to  be 
considered  a steam  vessel. 

The  words  “steam  vessel’’  shall  include  any  vessel  propelled  by 
machinery. 

A vessel  is  “under  way,”  within  the  meaning  of  these  rules, 
when  she  is  not  at  anchor,  or  made  fast  to  the  shore,  or  aground. 

II LIGHTS,  AND  SO  FORTH. 

The  word  “visible”  in  these  rules  when  applied  to  lights  shall 
mean  visible  on  a dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere. 

Article  1.  The  rules  concerning  lights  shall  be  complied  with 
in  all  weathers  from  sunset  to  sunrise,  and  during  such  time  no 
other  lights  which  may  he  mistaken  for  the  prescribed  lights 
shall  be  exhibited. 


167 


STEAit  VESSELS — MASTHEAD  LKiHT. 

Aut.  2.  A steam  vessel  when  under  way  shall  carry — (a)  On 
or  ill  front  of  the  foremast,  or  if  a vessel  without  a foremast, 
then  in  the  fore  part  of  the  vessel,  at  a lieight  above  the  hull  of 
not  less  than  twenty  feet,  and  if  the  breadth  of  the  vessel  ex- 
ceeds twenty  feet,  then  at  a height  above  the  hull  not  less  than 
such  breadth,  so,  however,  that  the  light  need  not  be  carried  at 
a greater  height  above  the  hull  than  forty  feet,  a bright  white 
light,  so  constructed  as  to  show  an  unbroken  light  over  an  arc 
of  the  horizon  of  twenty  points  of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to 
throw  the  light  ten  points  on  each  side  of  the  vessel,  namely, 
from  right  ahead  to  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  either  side, 
and  of  such  a character  as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least 
five  miles. 

STEAM  VESSELS — SIDE  LIGHTS. 

(b)  On  the  starboard  side  a green  light  so  constructed  as  to 
show  an  unbroken  light  over  an  are  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points 
of  the  compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead 
to  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  starboard  side,  and  of  such 
a character  as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  two  miles. 

(c)  On  the  port  side  a red  light  so  constructed  as  to  show  an 
unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  ten  points  of  the 
compass,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right  ahead  to  two 
points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  port  side,  and  of  such  a character 
as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  two  miles. 

(d)  The  said  green  and  red  side  lights  shall  be  fitted  with  in- 
board screens  projecting  at  least  three  feet  forward  from  the 
light,  so  as  to  prevent  these  lights  from  being  seen  across  the 
bow. 


STEAM  VESSELS — RANGE  LIGHTS. 

(e)  A steam  vessel  when  under  way  may  carry  an  additional 
white  light  similar  in  construction  to  the  light  mentioned  in  sub- 


168 


division  (a).  These  two  lights  shall  be  so  placed  in  line  with  the 
keel  that  one  shall  be  at  least  fifteen  feet  higher  than  the  other, 
and  in  such  a position  with  reference  to  each  other  that  the  lower 
light  shall  he  forward  of  the  upper  one.  Tlie  vertical  distance 
between  these  lights  shall  be  less  than  the  horizoptal  distance. 

STEAM  VESSELS  WHEN  TOWING. 

Akt.  3.  A steam  vessel  when  towing  another  vessel  shall,  in 
addition  to  lier  side  lights,  carry  two  bright  white  lights  in  a 
vertical  line  one  over  the  otlier,  not  less  than  six  feet  apart,  and 
wlien  towing  more  than  one  vessel  shall  carry  an  additional 
bright  white  light  six  feet  above  or  below  such  lights,  if  the 
lengtli  of  tlie  tow  measuring  from  the  stern  of  the  towing  vessel 
to  the  stern  of  tlie  last  vessel  towed  exceeds  six  hundred  feet. 
Each  of  these  lights  shall  he  of  the  same  construction  and 
character,  and  shall  be  carried  in  the  same  position  as  the  white 
light  mentioned  in  article  two  (a),  excepting  the  additional 
light,  which  may  be  carried  at  a height  of  not  less  than  fourteen 
feet  above  the  hull. 

Such  steam  vessel  may  carry  a small  white  light  abaft  the 
funnel  or  aftermast  for  the  vessel  towed  to  steer  by,  hut  such 
light  shall  not  he  visible  foi’ward  of  the  beam. 

SPECIAL  LIGHTS. 

Art.  4.  (a)  A vessel  which  from  any  accident  is  not  under 
command  shall  carry  at  the  same  height  as  a white  light  men- 
tioned in  article  two  (a),  where  they  can  best  be  seen,  and  if  a 
steam  vessel  in  lieu  of  that  light,  two  red  lights,  in  a vertical 
line  one  over  the  other,  not  less  than  six  feet  apart,  and  of  such 
a character  as  to  be  visible  all  around  the  horizon  at  a distance 
of  at  least  two  miles;  and  shall  by  day  carry  in  a vertical  line, 
one  over  the  other,  not  less  than  six  feet  apart,  where  they  can 
best  be  seen,  two  black  balls  or  shapes,  each  two  feet  in  diameter. 

(b)  A vessel  employed  in  lajdng  or  in  picking  up  a telegraph 
cable  shall  carry  in  the  same  position  as  the  white  light  men- 


169 


tioned  in  article  two  (a),  and  if  a steam  vessel  in  lieu  of  that 
light,  three  lights  in  a vertical  line,  one  over  the  other,  not  less 
than  six  feet  apart.  The  highest  and  lowest  of  these  lights  shall 
be  red,  and  the  middle  light  shall  be  white,  and  they  shall  be  of 
such  a character  as  to  be  visible  all  around  the  horizon,  at  a 
distance  of  at  least  two  miles.  By  day  she  shall  carry  in  a 
vertical  line,  one  over  the  other,  not  less  than  six  feet  apart, 
where  they  can  best  be  seen,  three  shapes  not  less  than  two  feet 
in  diameter,  of  which  the  highest  and  lowest  shall  be  globular 
in  shape  and  red  in  color,  and  the  middle  one  diamond  in  shape 
and  white. 

(c)  The  vessels  referred  to  in  this  article,  when  not  making 
way  through  the  water,  shall  not  carry  the  side  lights,  but  when 
making  way  shall  carry  them. 

(d)  The  lights  and  shapes  required  to  be  shown  by  this  article 
are  to  be  taken  by  other  vessels  as  signals  that  the  vessel  show- 
ing them  is  not  under  command  and  can  not  therefore  get  out  of 
the  way. 

Tliese  signals  are  not  signals  of  vessels  in  distress  and  re- 
quiring assistance.  Such  signals  are  contained  in  article  thirty- 
one. 

LIGHTS  FOR  SAILING  VESSELS  AND  VESSELS  IN  TOW. 

Art.  5.  A sailing  vessel  under  way  and  any  vessel  being  towed 
shall  carry  the  same  lights  as  are  prescribed  by  article  two  for 
a steam  vessel  under  way,  with  the  exception  of  the  white  lights 
mentioned  therein,  which  they  shall  never  carry. 

LIGHTS  FOE  SMALL  VESSELS. 

Art.  6.  Whenever,  as  in  the  case  of  small  vessels  under  way 
during  bad  weather,  the  green  and  red  side  lights  can  not  be 
fixed,  these  lights  shall  be  kept  at  hand,  lighted  and  ready  for 
use;  and  shall,  on  the  approach  of  or  to  other  vessels,  be  ex- 
hibited on  their  respective  sides  in  sufficient  time  to  prevent 
collision,  in  such  manner  as  to  make  them  most  visible,  and  so 
that  the  green  light  shall  not  be  seen  on  the  port  side  nor  the 


170 


red  light  on  the  starboard  side,  nor,  if  practicable,  more  than 
two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  their  respective  sides.  To  make 
the  use  of  these  portable  lights  more  certain  and  easy  the 
lanterns  containing  them  shall  each  be  painted  outside  with  the 
color  of  the  light  they  respectively  contain,  and  shall  be  pro- 
vided with  proper  screens. 

LIGHTS  FOR  SMALL  STEAM  AND  S.VIL  VESSELS  AND  OPEN  BOATS. 

Art.  7.  Steam  vessels  of  less  than  forty,  and  A’essels  under 
oars  or  sails  of  less  than  twenty  tons  gross  tonnage,  respectively, 
and  rowing  l)oats,  when  under  way,  shall  not  be  required  to 
carry  the  lights  mentioned  in  article  two  (a),  (b),  and  (c),  but 
if  they  do  not  carry  them  tliey  shall  be  provided  with  the  fol- 
lowing lights: 

First.  Steam  vessels  of  less  than  forty  tons  shall  carry — 

(a)  In  the  fore  part  of  the  vessels,  or  on  or  in  front  of  the 
funnel,  where  it  can  best  be  seen,  and  at  a height  above  the 
gunwale  of  not  less  than  nine  feet,  a bright  white  light  con- 
structed and  fixed  as  prescribed  in  article  two  (a),  and  of  such 
a character  as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  two  miles. 

(b)  Green  and  red  side  lights  constructed  and  fixed  as  pre- 
scrilied  in  article  two  ( b ) and  ( c ) , and  of  such  a character  as 
to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  one  mile,  or  a combined 
lantern  showing  a green  light  and  a red  light  from  right  ahead 
to  two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  their  respective  sides.  Such 
lanterns  shall  be  carried  not  less  than  three  feet  below  the  white 
light. 

Second.  Small  steamboats,  such  as  are  carried  by  seagoing 
vessels,  may  carry  the  white  light  at  a less  height  than  nine  feet 
above  the  gunwale,  but  it  shall  be  carried  above  the  combined 
lantern  mentioned  in  subdivision  one  (b). 

Third.  Vessels  under  oars  or  sails  of  less  than  twenty  tons 
shall  have  ready  at  hand  a lantern  with  a green  glass  on  one  side 
and  a red  glass  on  the  other,  which,  on  the  approach  of  or  to 
other  vessels,  shall  be  exhibited  in  sufficient  time  to  prevent  col- 
lision, so  that  the  green  light  shall  not  be  seen  on  the  port  side 
nor  the  red  light  on  the  starboard  side. 


171 


Fourth.  Rowing  boats,  whether  under  oars  or  sail,  shall  have 
ready  at  hand  a lantern  showing  a white  light  which  shall  he 
temporarily  e.xhibited  in  sufficient  time  to  prevent  collision. 

The  vessels  referred  to  in  this  article  shall  not  be  obliged  to 
carry  the  lights  prescribed  bj’  article  four  (a)  and  article  eleven, 
last  paragraph. 


LIGHTS  FOE  PILOT  VESSELS. 

Art.  8.  Pilot  vessels  when  engaged  on  their  station' on  pilotage 
duty  shall  not  show  the  lights  required  for  other  vessels,  but 
shall  carry  a white  light  at  the  masthead,  visible  all  around  the 
horizon,  and  shall  also  exhibit  a flare-up  light  or  flare-up  lights 
at  short  intervals,  which  shall  never  exceed  fifteen  minutes. 

On  the  near  approach  of  or  to  other  vessels  they  shall  have 
their  side  lights  lighted,  ready  for  use,  and  shall  flash  or  show 
them  at  short  intervals,  to  indicate  the  direction  in  which  they 
are  heading,  but  the  green  light  shall  not  be  shown  on  the  port 
side,  nor  the  red  light  on  the  starboard  side. 

A pilot  vessel  of  such  a class  as  to  be  obliged  to  go  alongside  of 
a vessel  to  put  a pilot  on  board  may  show  the  white  light  instead 
of  carrying  it  at  the  masthead,  and  may,  instead  of  the  colored 
lights  above  mentioned,  have  at  hand,  ready  for  use,  a lantern 
with  a green  glassi  on  the  one  side  and  a red  glass  on  the  other, 
to  be  used  as  prescribed  above. 

Pilot  vessels,  when  not  engaged  on  their  station  on  pilotage 
duty,  shall  carry  lights  similar  to  those  of  other  vessels  of  their 
tonnage. 

A steam  pilot  vessel,  when  engaged  on  her  station  on  pilotage 
duty  and  in  waters  of  the  United  States,  and  not  at  anchor,  shall, 
in  addition  to  the  lights  required  for  all  pilot  boats,  carry,  at  a 
distance  of  eight  feet  below  her  white  masthead  light,  a red  light, 
visible  all  around  the  horizon  and  of  such  a character  as  to  he 
visible  on  aj  dark  night  with  a clear  atmosphere  at  a distance  of 
at  least  two  miles,  and  also  the  colored  side  lights  required  to  be 
carried  by  vessels  when  under  way. 


172 


When  engaged  on  her  station  on  pilotage  duty  and  in  waters 
of  the  United  States,  and  at  anchor,  she  shall  carry,  in  addition 
to  tlie  lights  required  for  all  pilot  boats,  the  red  light  above 
mentioned,  but  not  the  colored  side  lights.  When  not  engaged  on 
her  station  on  pilotage  duty,  she  shall  carry  the  same  lights  as 
other  steam  vessels. 

LIGHT.S,  ETC.,  OF  FI.SHIXG  VESSELS. 

Art.  0.  Fishing  vessels  and  fishing  boats,  when  under  way 
and  when  not  required  by  this  article  to  carry  or  show  the  lights 
hereinafter  specified,  shall  carry  or  show  the  lights  prescribed 
for  vessels  of  their  tonnage  under  way. 

(a)  Open  boats,  by  which  is  to  be  understood  boats  not  pro- 
tected from  the  entry  of  sea  water  by  means  of  a continuous  deck, 
when  engaged  in  any  fishing  at  night,  with  outlying  tackle  ex- 
tending not  more  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  horizontally 
from  the  boat  into  the  seaway,  shall  carry  one  all-round  white 
light. 

Open  boats,  when  fishing  at  night,  with  outlying  tackle  ex- 
tending more  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  horizontally  from 
the  boat  into  the  seaway,  shall  carry  one  all-round  white  light, 
and  in  addition,  on  approaching  or  being  approached  by  other 
vessels,  shall  show  a,  second  white  light  at  least  three  feet  below 
the  first  light  and  at  a horizontal  distance  of  at  least  five  feet 
away  from  it  in  the  direction  in  which  the  outlying  tackle  is 
attached. 

(b)  Vessels  and  boats,  exce2>t  open  boats  as  defined  in  sub- 
division (a),  when  fishing  with  drift  nets,  shall,  so  long  as  the 
nets  are  wholly  or  jjartly  in  the  water,  carry  two  white  lights 
where  they  can  best  be  seen.  Such  lights  shall  be  placed  so  that 
the  vertical  distance  between  them  shall  be  not  less  than  six  feet 
and  not  more  than  fifteen  feet,  and  so  that  the  horizontal 
distance  between  them,  measured  in  a line  with  the  keel,  shall  be 
not  less  than  five  feet  and  not  more  than  ten  feet.  The  lower 
of  these  two  lights  shall  be  in  the  direction  of  the  nets,  and  both 


173 


of  them  shall  be  of  such  a character  as  to  show  all  around  the 
horizon,  and  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  not  less  than  three 
miles. 

Within  the  Mediterranean  Sea  and  in  the  seas  bordering  the 
coasts  of  Japan  and  Korea  sailing  fishing  vessels  of  less  than 
twenty  tons  gross  tonnage  shall  not  be  obliged  to  carry  the  lower 
of  these  two  lights.  Should  they,  however,  not  carry  it,  they 
shall  show  in  the  same  position  ( in  the  direction  of  the  net  or 
gear)  a white  light,  visible  at  a distance  of  not  less  than  one 
sea  mile,  on  the  approach  of  or  to  other  vessels. 

(c)  Vessels  and  boats,  except  open  boats  as  defined  in  sub- 
division (a),  when  line  fishing  with  their  lines  out  and  attached 
to  or  hauling  their  lines,  and  when  not  at  anchor  or  stationary 
within  the  meaning  of  subdivision  (h),  shall  carry  the  same 
lights  as  vessels  fishing  with  drift  nets.  When  shooting  lines,  or 
Ashing  with  towing  lines,  they  shall  carry  the  lights  prescribed 
for  a steam  or  sailing  vessel  under  way,  respectively. 

Within  the  Mediterranean  Sea  and  in  tlie  seas  bordering  the 
coasts  of  Japan  and  Korea  sailing  Ashing  vessels  of  less  than 
twenty  tons  gross  tonnage  shall  not  be  obliged  to  carr}’  the  lower 
of  these  two  lights.  Should  they,  however,  not  carry  it,  they 
shall  show  in  the  same  position  (in  the  direction  of  the  lines) 
a white  light,  visible  at  a distance  of  not  less  than  one  sea  mile 
on  the  approach  of  or  to  other  vessels. 

(d)  Vessels  when  engaged  in  trawling,  by  which  is  meant  the 
dragging  of  an  apparatus  along  the  bottom  of  the  sea — 

First.  If  steam  vessels,  shall  carry  in  the  same  position  as 
the  white  light  mentioned  in  article  two  (a)  a tri-colored  lantern 
so  constructed  and  Axed  as  to  show  a white  light  from  right 
ahead  to  two  points  on  each  bow,  and  a green  light  and  a rod 
light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  from  two  points  on  each  bow  to 
two  points  abaft  the  beam  on  the  starboard  and  port  sides,  re- 
spectively; and  not  less  than  six  nor  more  than  twelve  feet  be- 
low the  tri-colored  lantern  a white  light  in  a lantern,  so  con- 
structed as  to  show  a clear,  uniform,  and  unbroken  light  all 
around  the  horizon. 


174 


Second.  If  sailing  vessels,  shall  carry  a white  light  in  a 
lantern,  so  constructed  as  to  show  a clear,  uniform,  and  uii- 
Ijroken  light  all  around  the  horizon,  and  shall  also,  on  the  ap- 
proach of  or  to  other  vessels,  show  where  it  can  best  be  seen  a 
white  flare-up  light  or  torch  in  sufficient  time  to  prevent  col- 
lision. 

All  lights  mentioned  in  subdivision  (d)  first  and  second  shall 
be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  two  miles. 

(e)  Oyster  dredgers  and  other  vessels  fishing  with  dredge  nets 
shall  carry  and  show  the  same  lights  as  trawlers. 

(f)  Fishing  vessels  and  fishing  boats  may  at  any  time  use  a 
flare-uj)  light  in  addition  to  the  lights  which  they  are  by  this 
article  required  to  carry  and  show,  and  they  may  also  use  work- 
ing liglits. 

(g)  Every  fishing  vessel  and  every  fishing  boat  under  one 
hundred  and  fifty  feet  in  length,  when  at  anchor,  shall  exhibit  a 
white  light  visible  all  around  the  horizon  at  a distance  of  at  least 
one  mile. 

Every  fishing  vessel  of  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  in  lengtli  or 
upward,  when  at  anchor,  shall  exhiliit  a white  light  visible  all 
around  the  horizon  at  a distance  of  at  least  one  mile,  and  sliall 
exhibit  a second  light  as  provided  for  vessels  of  such  length  by 
article  eleven. 

Should  any  such  vessel,  whether  under  one  hundred  and  fifty 
feet  in  length  of  of  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  in  length  or  up- 
ward, be  attached  to  a net  or  other  fishing  gear,  she  shall  on 
the  aiiproach  of  other  vessels  show  an  additional  white  light  at 
least  three  feet  below  the  anchor  light,  and  at  a horizontal 
distance  of  at  least  five  feet  away  from  it  in  the  direction  of 
the  net  or  gear. 

(h)  If  a vessel  or  boat  when  fishing  becomes  stationary  in 
consequence  of  her  gear  getting  fast  to  a rock  or  other  obstruc- 
tion, she  shall  in  daytime  haul  down  the  day  signal  required  by 
subdivision  (k)  ; at  niglit  show  the  light  or  lights  prescribed  for 
a vessel  at  anchor ; and  during  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy 
rainstorius  make  the  signal  prescribed  for  a vessel  at  anchor. 


GROVER  C.  JERGDOLL 

(See  subdivision  (d)  and  tlie  last  paragraph  of  article  fifteen.) 

( i ) In  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rain  storms  drift-net 
vessels  attached  to  their  nets,  and  vessels  when  trawling, 
dredging,  or  fishing  with  any  kind  of  drag  net,  and  vessels  line 
fishing  with  their  lines  out,  shall,  if  of  twenty  tons  gross  tonnage 
or  upward,  respectively,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one 
minute  make  a blast ; if  steam  vessels,  with  the  whistle  or  siren, 
and  if  sailing  vessels,  with  the  fog-horn,  each  blast  to  be  fol- 
lowed by  ringing  the  bell.  Fishing  vessels  and  boats  of  less 
than  twenty  tons  gross  tonnage  shall  not  be  obliged  to  give  the 
above-mentioned  signals;  but  if  they  do  not,  they  shall  make 
some  other  efficient  sound  signal  at  intervals  of  not  more  than 
one  minute. 

(k)  All  vessels  or  boats  fishing  with  nets  or  lines  or  trawls, 
when  under  way,  shall  in  daytime  indicate  their  occupation  to 
an  approaching  vessel  by  displaying  a basket  or  other  efficient 
signal  where  it  can  best  be  seen.  If  vessels  or  boats  at  anchor 
have  their  gear  out,  they  shall,  on  the  approach  of  other  vessels, 
show  the  same  signal  on  the  side  on  which  those  vessels  can 
pass. 

The  vessels  required  by  this  article  to  carry  or  show  the  lights 
hereinbefore  specified  shall  not  be  obliged  to  carry  the  lights 
prescribed  by  article  four  (a)  and  the  last  paragraph  of  article 
eleven. 


LIGHTS  FOlt  AN  OVEIJTAKEN  VESSEL. 

Akt.  10.  A vessel  which  is  being  overtaken  by  another  shall 
show  from  her  stern  to  such  last-mentioned  vessel  a white  light 
or  a flare-up  light. 

The  white  light  required  to  be  shown  by  this  article  may  be 
fixed  and  carried  in  a lantern,  but  in  such  case  the  lantern  shall 
be  so  constructed,  fitted,  and  screened  that  it  shall  throw  an 
unbroken  light  over  an  arc  of  the  horizon  of  twelve  points  of 
the  compass,  namely,  for  six  points  from  right  aft  on  each  side 
of  the  vessel,  so  as  to  be  visible  at  a distance  of  at  least  one 


176 


mile.  Such  light  shall  be  carried  as  nearly  as  practicable  on 
the  same  level  as  the  side  lights. 

ANCHOK  LIGHTS. 

Aut.  11.  A vessel  under  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  in  length 
when  at  anchor  shall  carry  forward,  where  it  can  best  be  seen, 
but  at  a height  not  exceeding  twenty  feet  above  the  hull,  a 
white  light,  in  a lantern  so  constructed  as  to  show  a clear,  uni- 
form, and  unbroken  light  visible  all  around  the  horizon  at  a 
distance  of  at  least  one  mile. 

A vessel  of  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  or  upwards  in  length 
when  at  anchor  shall  carry  in  the  forward  part  of  the  vessel, 
at  a height  of  not  less  than  twenty  and  not  exceeding  forty  feet 
above  the  hull,  one  such  light,  and  at  or  near  the  stern  of  the 
vessel,  and  at  such  a height  that  it  shall  be  not  less  than 
fifteen  feet  lower  than  the  forward  light,  another  such  light. 

The  length  of  a vessel  shall  be  deemed  to  be  the  length  ap- 
jjearing  in  her  certificate  of  registry. 

A vessel  aground  in  or  near  a fairway  shall  carry  the  above 
light  or  lights  and  the  two  red  lights  prescribed  by  article  four 
(a). 

SPECIAL  SIGNALS. 

Art.  T2.  Every  vessel  may,  if  necessary  in  order  to  attract 
attention,  in  addition  to  the  lights  which  she  is  by  these  rules 
recpiired  to  carry,  show  a flare-up  light  or  use  any  detonating 
signal  that  can  not  be  mistaken  for  a distress  signal. 

NAVAL  LIGHTS  AND  RECOGNITION  SIGNALS. 

Art.  13.  Nothing  in  these  rules  shall  interfere  with  the  opera- 
tion of  any  special  rules  made  by  the  Government  of  any  nation 
with  respect  to  additional  station  and  signal  lights  for  two  or 
more  shijis  of  war  or  for  vessels  sailing  under  convoy,  or  with 
the  exhihition  of  recognition  signals  adopted  by  ship-owners, 
which  have  been  authorized  by  their  respective  Governments, 
and  duly  registered  and  published. 


177 


STEAM  \'ESSEL  UNDER  SAIL  BY  DAY. 

Art.  14.  A steam  vessel  proceeding  under  sail  only,  but  hav- 
ing her  funnel  up,  shall  carry  in  daytime,  forward,  where  it  can 
best  be  seen,  one  black  ball  or  shape  two  feet  in  diameter. 

Ill, — SOUND  SIGNALS  FOR  FOG,  AND  SO  FORTH. 

PRELIMINARY. 

Art.  15.  All  signals  prescribed  by  this  article  for  vessels  under 
way  shall  be  given: 

First.  By  “steam  vessels”  on  the  whistle  or  siren. 

Second.  By  “sailing  vessels”  and  “vessels  towed”  on  the  fog 
horn. 

The  words  “prolonged  blast”  used  in  this  article  shall  mean  a 
blast  of  from  four  to  six  seconds  duration. 

A steam  vessel  shall  be  provided  with  an  efficient  whistle  or 
siren,  sounded  by  steam  or  by  some  substitute  for  steam,  so  placed 
that  the  sound  may  not  be  intercepted  by  any  obstruction,  and 
with  an  efficient  fog  horn,  to  be  sounded  by  mechanical  means, 
and  also  with  an  efficient  bell.  In  all  cases  where  the  rules  re- 
quire a bell  to  be  used  a drum  may  be  substituted  on  board 
Turkish  vessels,  or  a gong  where  such  articles  are  used  on  board 
small  seagoing  vessels.  A sailing  vessel  of  twenty  tons  gross 
tonnage  or  upward  shall  be  provided  with  a similar  fog-horn 
and  bell. 

In  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rain  storms,  whether  by 
day  or  night,  the  signals  described  in  this  article  shall  be  used 
as  follows,  namely: 

STEAM  VESSEL  UNDER  WAY. 

(a)  A steam  vessel  having  way  upon  her  shall  sound,  at  in- 
tervals of  not  more  than  two  minutes,  a prolonged  blast. 

(b)  A steam  vessel  under  way,  but  stopped,  and  having  no 
way  upon  her,  shall  sound,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  two 
minutes,  two  prolonged  blasts,  with  an  interval  of  about  one 
second  between, 


178 


SAIL  VESSEL  UA'DEU  WAY. 

(c)  A sailing  vessel  under  way  shall  sound,  at  intervals  of 
not  more  than  one  minute,  when  on  the  starboard  tack,  one 
blast;  when  on  the  port  tack,  two  blasts  in  succession,  and 
when  with  the  wind  abaft  the  beam,  three  blasts  in  succession. 

VESSELS  AT  AACIIOK  OR  XOT  UNDER  WAY. 

(d)  A vessel  when  at  anchor  shall,  at  intervals  of  not  more 
tlian  one  minute,  ring  the  bell  rapidly  for  about  five  seconds. 

VESSELS  TOWING  OR  TO^VED. 

(e)  A vessel  when  towing,  a vessel  employed  in  laying  or  in 
picking  up  a telegraph  cable,  and  a vessel  under  way,  which  is 
unable  to  get  out  of  the  way  of  an  approaching  vessel  through 
being  not  under  command,  or  unable  to  maneuver  as  required  by 
the  rules,  shall,  instead  of  the  signals  prescribed  in  subdivisions 
(a)  and  (c)  of  this  article,  at  intervals  of  not  more  than  two 
minutes,  sound  three  blasts  in  succession,  namely:  One  pro- 
longed blast  followed  by  two  short  blasts.  A vessel  towed  may 
give  this  signal  and  she  shall  not  give  any  other. 

SMALL  SAILING  VESSELS  AND  BOATS. 

Sailing  vessels  and  boats  of  less  than  twenty  tons  gross  ton- 
nage shall  not  be  obliged  to  give  the  above-mentioned  signals,  but, 
if  they  do  not,  they  shall  make  some  other  efficient  soimd  signal 
at  intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute. 

SPEED  IN  FOG. 

Art.  16.  Every  vessel  shall  in  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heaiw 
rain  storms,  go  at  a moderate  speed,  having  careful  regard  to 
the  existing  circumstances  and  conditions. 

A steam  vessel,  hearing,  apparently  forward  of  her  beam,  the 
fog  signal  of  a vessel  the  position  of  which  is  not  ascertained 
shall,  so  far  as  the  circumstances  of  the  case  admit,  stop  her 


179 


engines,  and  then  navigate  with  caution  until  danger  of  col- 
lision is  over. 


IV. — STEERING  AND  SAILING  RULES. 

PRELIMINARY. 

Risk  of  collision  can,  wlien  circumstances  permit,  be  ascer- 
tained by  carefully  watching  the  compass  bearing  of  an  ap- 
proaching vessel.  If  the  bearing  does  not  appreciably  change, 
such  risk  should  be  deemed  to  exist. 

SAILING  VESSELS. 

Art.  17.  When  two  sailing  vessels  are  approaching  one 
another,  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  one  of  them  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  other,  as  follows,  namely: 

(a)  A vessel  which  is  running  free  shall  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  a vessel  which  is  closehauled. 

(b)  A vessel  which  is  closehauled  on  the  port  tack  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  a vessel  which  is  closehauled  on  the  starboard 
tack. 

(c)  When  both  are  running  free,  with  the  wind  on  different 
sides,  the  vessel  which  has  the  wind  on  the  port  side  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

(d)  When  both  are  running  free,  with  the  wind  on  the  same 
side,  the  vessel  which  is  to  the  windward  shall  keep  out  of  the 
way  of  the  vessel  which  isi  to  the  leeward. 

(e)  A vessel  which  has  the  wind  aft  shall  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  the  other  vessel. 


STEAM  VESSELS. 

Art.  18.  When  two  steam  vessels  are  meeting  end  on,  or 
nearly  end  on,  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  each  shall  alter 
her  course  to  starboard,  so  that  each  may  pass  on  the  port  side 
of  the  other. 

This  article  only  applies  to  cases  where  vessels  are  meeting 
end  on,  or  nearly  end  on,  in  such  a manner  as  to  involve  risk  of 


180 


collision,  and  does  not  apply  to  two  vessels  which  must,  if  both 
keep  on  their  respective  courses,  pass  clear  of  each  other. 

The  only  cases  to  which  it  does  apply  are  when  each  of  the 
two  vessels  is  end  on,  or  nearly  end  on  to  the  other ; in  other 
words,  to  cases  in  which,  by  day,  each  vessel  sees  the  masts  of 
the  other  in  a line,  or  nearly  in  a line,  with  her  own ; and  by 
night,  to  cases  in  which  each  vessel  is  in  such  a position  as  to 
see  both  the  side-lights  of  the  other. 

It  does  not  apply  by  day  to  cases  in  which  a vessel  secs  another 
ahead  crossing  her  own  course;  or  by  night,  to  cases  where  the 
red  light  of  one  vessel  is  opposed  to  the  red  light  of  the  other, 
or  where  tlie  green  light  of  one  vessel  is  opposed  tc  the  green 
light  of  the  other,  or  where  a red  light  without  a green  light, 
or  a green  light  without  a red  light,  is  seen  ahead,  or  where  both 
green  and  red  lights  are  seen  anywhere  but  ahead. 

TWO  STEAM  VESSELS  CROSSIXG. 

Art.  19.  When  two  steam  vessels  are  crossing,  so  as  to  in- 
volve risk  of  collision,  the  vessel  which  has  the  other  on  her 
own  starboard  side  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 

STEAM  VESSEL  SHALL  KEEP  OUT  OF  THE  WAY  OF  SAILING  VESSEL. 

Art.  20.  When  a steam  vessel  and  a sailing  vessel  are  pro- 
ceeding in  such  directions  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  the 
steam  vessel  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  sailing  vessel. 

COURSE  AND  SPEED. 

Art.  21.  Where,  by  any  of  these  rules,  one  of  two  vessels  is  to 
keep  out  of  the  way,  the  other  shall  keep  her  course  and  speed. 

Note — When,  in  consequence  of  thick  weather  or  other  causes, 
such  vessel  finds  herself  so  close  that  collision  can  not  be  avoided 
by  the  action  of  the  giving-way  vessel  alone,  she  also  shall  take 
such  actions  as  will  best  aid  to  avert  collision.  [See  articles 
twenty-seven  and  twenty-nine.] 


181 


CROSSING  AHEAD. 

Art.  22.  Every  vessel  which  is  directed  by  these  rules  to  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  another  vessel  shall,  if  the  circumstances  of  the 
case  admit,  avoid  crossing  ahead  of  the  other. 

STEAM  VESSEL  SHALL  SLACKEN  SPEED  OR  STOP. 

Art.  23.  Every  steam  vessel  which  is  directed  by  these  rules 
to  keep  out  of  the  way  of  another  vessel  shall,  on  approaching 
her.  if  necessary,  slacken  her  speed  or  stop  or  reverse. 

OVERTAKING  VESSELS. 

Art.  24.  Notwithstanding  anything  contained  in  these  rules, 
every  vessel,  overtaking  any  other,  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of 
the  overtaken  vessel. 

Every  vessel  coming  up  with  another  vessel  from  any  direction 
more  than  two  points  abaft  her  beam,  that  is,  in  such  a position, 
with  reference  to  the  vessel  which  she  is  overtaking  that  at  night 
she  would  be  unable  to  see  either  of  that  vessel’s  side  lights, 
shall  be  deemed  to  be  an  overtaking  vessel;  and  no  subsequent 
alteration  of  the  bearing  between  the  two  vessels  shall  make  the 
overtaking  vessel  a crossing  vessel  within  the  meaning  of  these 
rules,  or  relieve  her  of  the  duty  of  keeping  clear  of  the  over- 
taken vessel  until  she  is  finally  past  and  clear. 

As  by  day  the  overtaking  vessel  can  not  always  know  with 
certainty  whether  she  is  forward  of  or  abaft  this  direction  from 
the  other  vessel,  she  should,  if  in  doubt,  assume  that  she  is  an 
overtaking  vessel  and  keep  out  of  the  way. 

NARROW  CHANNELS. 

Art.  25.  In  narrow  channels  every  steam  vessel  shall,  when 
it  is  safe  and  practicable,  keep  to  that  side  of  the  fairway  or 
mid-channel  which  lies  on  the  starboard  side  of  such  vessel. 

RIGHT  OF  WAY  OF  FISHING  VESSELS. 

Art.  26.  Sailing  vessels  under  way  shall  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  sailing  vessels  or  boats  fishing  with  nets  or  lines  or  trawls. 


182 


This,  rule  shall  not  give  to  any  vessel  or  boat  engaged  in  fishing 
the  right  of  obstructing  a fairway  used  by  vessels  other  than 
fishing  vessels  or  boats. 

GENEUAL  PRUDENTIAL  RULE. 

Art.  27.  In  obeying  and  construing  these  rules  due  regard 
shall  be  had  to  all  dangers  of  navigation  and  collision,  and  to 
any  special  circumstances  which  may  render  a departure  from 
the  above  rules  necessary  in  order  to  avoid  immediate  danger. 

SOUND  SIGNALS  FOR  PASSING  STEAMERS. 

Art.  28.  The  words  “short  blast”  used  in  this  article  shall 
mean  a blast  of  about  one  second’s  duration. 

When  vessels  are  in  sight  of  one  another,  a steam  vessel 
under  way,  in  taking  any  course  authorized  or  required  by  these 
rules,  shall  indicate  that  course  by  the  following  signals  on  her 
whistle  or  siren,  namely: 

One  short  blast  to  mean,  “I  am  directing  my  course  to  star- 
board.” 

Two  short  blasts  to  mean,  “I  am  directing  my  course  to 
port.” 

Three  short  blasts  to  mean,  “My  engines  are  going  at  full 
speed  astern.” 

PRECAUTION. 

Art.  29.  Nothing  in  these  rules  shall  exonerate  any  vessel,  or 
the  owner  or  master  or  crew  thereof,  from  the  consequences  of 
any  neglect  to  carry  lights  or  signals,  or  of  any  neglect  to  keep 
a proper  lookout,  or  of  the  neglect  of  any  precaution  which  may 
be  required  by  the  ordinary  practice  of  seamen,  or  by  the  special 
circumstances  of  the  case. 

Art.  30.  [See  page  ICC.] 

DISTRESS  SIGNALS. 

Art.  31.  When  a vessel  is  in  distress  and  requires  assistance 
from  other  vessels  or  from  the  shore,  the  following  shall  be  the 


183 


signals  to  be  used  or  displayed  by  her,  either  together  or 
separately,  namely: 

In  the  daytime — • 

First.  A gun  or  other  explosive  signal  fired  at  intervals  of 
about  a minute. 

Second.  The  international  code  signal  of  distress  indicated 
by  N C. 

Third.  Tlie  distance  signal,  consisting  of  a square  flag,  having 
either  above  or  below  it  a ball  or  anything  resembling  a ball. 

Fourth.  A continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus. 

At  night — 

First.  A gun  or  other  explosive  signal  fired  at  intervals  of 
about  a minute. 

Second.  Flames  on  the  vessel  (as  from  a burning  tar  barrel, 
oil  barrel,  and  so  forth). 

Third.  Rockets  or  shells  throwing  stars  of  anj'  color  or  de- 
scription, fired  one  at  a time,  at  short  intervals. 

Fourth.  A continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus. 


GROVER  C.  BERGDOLL 


184 


FOE  CON'VERTING  NAUTICAL  MILES  INTO  STATUTE 
MILES. 


Nautical 

miles. 

Statute 

miles. 

Nautical 

miles. 

Statute 

miles. 

Nautical 

miles. 

Statute 

miles. 

1.00 

1.151 

8.75 

10.075 

16.50 

18.999 

1.25 

1.439 

9.00 

10.363 

16.75 

19.287 

1.50 

1.727 

9.25 

10.651 

17.00 

19.575 

1.75 

2.015 

9.50 

10.939 

17.25 

19.863 

2.00 

2.303 

9.75 

11.227 

17.50 

20.151 

2.25 

2.590 

10.00 

11.515 

17.75 

20.439 

2.50 

2.878 

10.25 

11.803 

18.00 

20.727 

2.75 

3.166 

10.50 

12.090 

18.25 

21.015 

3.00 

3.454 

10.75 

12.378 

18.50 

21.303 

3.25 

3.742 

11.00 

12.666 

18.75 

21.590 

3.50 

4.030 

11.25 

12.954 

19.00 

21.878 

3.75 

4.318 

11.50 

13.242 

19.25 

22.166 

4.00 

4.606 

11.75 

13.530 

19.50 

22.454 

4.25 

4.893 

12.00 

13.818 

19.75 

22.742 

4.50 

5.181 

12.25 

14.106 

20.00 

23.030 

4.75 

5.469 

12.50 

14.393 

20.25 

23.318 

5.00 

5.757 

12.75 

14.681 

20.50 

23.606 

5.25 

6.045 

13.00 

14.969 

20.75 

23.893 

5.50 

6.333 

13.25 

15.257 

21.00 

24.181 

5.75 

6.621 

13.50 

15.545 

21.25 

24.469 

6.00 

6.909 

13.75 

15.833 

21.50 

24.757 

6.25 

7.196 

14.00 

16.121 

21.75 

25.045 

6.50 

7.484 

14.25 

16.409 

22.00 

25.333 

6.75 

7.772 

14.50 

16.696 

22.25 

25.621 

7.00 

8.060 

14.75 

16.984 

22.50 

25.90& 

7.25 

8.348 

15.00 

17.272 

22.75 

26.196 

7.50 

8.636 

15.25 

17.560 

23.00 

26.484 

7.75 

8.924 

15.50 

17.848 

23.50 

27.060 

8.00 

9.212 

15.75 

18.136 

24.00 

27.636 

8.25 

9.500 

16.00 

18.424 

24.50 

28.212 

8.50 

9.787 

16.25 

18.712 

25.00 

28.787 

One  nautical  niile=6080  feet. 


185 


FOR  CONVERTING  STATUTE  MILES  INTO  NAUTICAL 
MILES. 


Statute 

miles. 

Nautical 

miles. 

Statute 

miles 

Nautical 

miles. 

Statute 

miles. 

Nautical 

miles. 

1.00 

0.868 

9.00 

7.815 

17.00 

14.763 

1.25 

1.085 

9.25 

8.032 

17.25 

14.980 

1.50 

1.302 

9.50 

8.249 

17.50 

15.197 

1.75 

1.519 

9.75 

8.467 

17.75 

15.414 

2.00 

1.736 

10.00 

8.684 

18.00 

15.632 

2.25 

1.953 

10.25 

8.901 

18.25 

15.849 

2.50 

2.170 

10.50 

9.118 

18.50 

16.066 

2.75 

2.387 

10.75 

9.335 

18.75 

16.283 

3.00 

2.604 

11.00 

9.552 

19.00 

16.500 

3.25 

2.821 

11.25 

9.769 

19.25 

16.717 

3.50 

3.038 

11.50 

9.986 

19.50 

16.934 

3.75 

3.256 

11.75 

10.203 

19.75 

17.151 

4.00 

3.473 

12.00 

10.420 

20.00 

17.369 

4.25 

3.690 

12.25 

10.638 

20.25 

17.586 

4.50 

3.907 

12.50 

10.855 

20.50 

17.803 

4.75 

4.124 

12.75 

11.072 

20.75 

18.020 

5.00 

4.341 

13.00 

11.289 

21.00 

18.237 

5.25 

4.559 

13.25 

11.507 

21.25 

18.454 

5.50 

4.776 

13.50 

11.724 

21.50 

18.671 

5.75 

4.994 

13.75 

11.941 

21.75 

18.888 

6.00 

5.211 

14.00 

12.158 

22.00 

19.105 

6.25 

5.428 

14.25 

12.376 

22.25 

19.322 

6.50 

5.645 

14.50 

12.593 

22.50 

19.539 

6.75 

5.862 

14.75 

12.810 

22.75 

19.756 

7.00 

6.079 

15.00 

13.027 

23.00 

19.973 

7.25 

6.296 

15.25 

13.244 

23.25 

20.191 

7.50 

6.513 

15..50 

13.461 

23.50 

20.408 

7.75 

6.730 

15.75 

13.678 

23.75 

20.625 

8.00 

6.947 

16.00 

13.895 

24.00 

20.842 

8.25 

7.164 

16.25 

14.112 

24.25 

21.060 

8..50 

7.381 

16.50 

14.329 

24.50 

21.277 

8.75 

7.598 

16.75 

14.546 

25.00 

21.711 

One  statute  mile =5280  feet. 


ISO 


international  code. 

This  code  consists  of  27  flags,  as  follows  : 2 burgees,  5 pennants, 
19  square  flags  and  the  code  pennant,  making  27  in  all,  and  are 
described  as  follows  : 

Code  pennant,  red  and  white  in  5 alternate  stripes. 

Buhgees. 


A 

B 

G 

D 

E 

F 

G 


White — blue,  in  two  vertical  stripes. 
Red. 


Pennants. 

White  with  red  spot. 

Blue  with  white  spot. 

R^d  — white — blue,  in  three  vertical  stripes. 
Red,  with  white  right  cross. 

Yellow — blue,  in  two  vertical  stripes. 


Squake  Flags. 
n White — red,  in  two  vertical  stripes. 

I Yellow,  with  black  spot  in  centre. 

J Blue — white — blue,  in  three  horizontal  stripea 
K Yellow — blue,  in  two  vertical  stripes. 

L Blue  and  yellow  in  four  alternate  checks. 

M Blue,  with  white  diagonal  cross. 

W Blue  and  white  in  sixteen  alternate  checks. 

0 Yellow  and  red  in  two  diagonal  stripes. 

P Blue  with  white  centre. 

Q Yellow — Quarantine. 

II  Red  with  yellow  right  cross. 

8 White  with  blue  centre. 

T Red — white — blue  in  three  vertical  stripea 
U Red  and  white  in  four  alternate  checks. 

V White  with  red  diagonal  cross. 

IF  Blue — white — red  in  three  borders. 

X White,  with  blue  right  cross. 

T Yellow  and  red  in  ten  diagonal  stripes. 

Z Black — yellow — blue — red,  each  color  triangular  shaped. 

To  open  communication,  show  the  ensign  with  the  Code  Pi-nnant 
under  it. 

When  using  the  Code  Pennant  as  an  Answering  Pennant,  hoist  it 
by  itself  where  best  seen. 


187 


VO  iNiOT  (ATTEND  SCHOOL 

License  can  be  obtained  by  a little  study  of 

THE  NEW  YORK  PILOT 

AND 

GUIDE 

TO  THE 

I S.  LOGUL  lUGPECTOBG  EVUDTIOII 

OF 

MASTERS  AND  PILOTS 

FOR 

NEW  YORK  BAY  AND  HARBOR  TO  YONKERS 
AND  GREAT  CAPTAIN  ISLAND 

CONTAINING  ALL  USEFUL  INFORMATION 
BY 

CAPT.  R.  M.  PUGSLEY 

Contains  no  Misleading  Statements  to  Induce 
an  Applicant  to  Attend  School 


FOR  SALE  BY  ALL  DEALERS 

swatted  to  any  address  on  receipt  of  $2.00  by 

CAPT.  R.  M . PUGSLEY 


17  SOUTH  STREET 


NEW  YORK  CITY 


LighthovL9e 4^ 

Zi^hthouse  on  aocde  chart  • Ol3> light  tower v..® 

Beacon,  lighted, A Beacon,7totlighteci a 

Spindle  (orstaJte) I add  word  SpincCLe  if  space  oHo'wa 

Bightahip 

Anchorage ^ Wreck “*+^ 

Book  awccah  at  low  water ♦ Sunken,  rock ♦ 

Life  Saying  Station ♦ LSS.  (T) aigrdAes  connection  with 

teUgraphio  ay  stem. 



o 

Bohottom  at  20  fothoma “50  etc 

Red  huoy  9 or  add  word  'white  or  yellow  as  required 

Black  buoy.. -t 

horizontally  striped  buoy * 9 

PerpendicuXafly  striped  buoy ; t 

Buoys  with  perch  and  square. 

Buoys  with  perch  caxd  ball 

Lightedbuoy in  place  of  at.., 

2£ooring  buoy 

Landmark , aa  Cupola,  Standpipe , etCi 0 

Whirlpool 


Tide 


rip. . 


Current , not  tidal , drift  in  hnota  aa . 


” .flood.firat  qvoarter,  drift  in.  knots . as — 

* . **  , second.  " ” **  " **  ~ 

• ' .third.  - - » ~ 

" . eW> , . , othoryrise  like  flood. 


-2.0- 
-O.4.- 
-1.0- 
-0.3  - 


189 


GROVER  C.  BERGDOLL 


GALVANIZED  CAST -STEEL  YACHT  RIGGING. 


Composed  of  6 Strands  and  a Hemp  Center,  7 or  19  Wires  to  tBe  Strand. 


Approximate 

Diameter 

Approximate 

Circumference  in 

Circiimterence 

Weight  per  foot 

Breaking  Strain 

inches  of 

in  inches. 

in  pounds. 

in  ions  of  2000 

^Manila  Rope  of 

pounds. 

equal  strength. 

4 

2-54 

53 

13 

2.24 

47 

12 

3'A 

i'A 

1 .96 

41 

II 

1.69 

35 

10 

3 

I 

1.44 

30 

9 

A 

I . 20 

25 

8K 

2. 'A 

1 3 

0.98 

20 

8 

2'A 

A 

0 81 

17 

7 

2 

A 

0.62 

14 

6 

tV 

0.47 

10 

hA 

^‘A 

'A 

0-35 

8 

Y/i 

1 5 
3^ 

0.30 

6 

4/2 

'A 

7 

0.25 

5 

4X 

I }i 

0.20 

4-3 

3)4 

I 

5 

TT 

0. 16 

3-6 

3 

I'H) 

GALVANIZED  IRON  WIRE  ROPE. 


For  Ships’  Rigging  and  Derrick  Guys. 

Composed  of  6 Strands  and  a Hemp  Center,  7 or  12  Wires  to  the  Strand 


Circumference 
in  inches. 

Approximate 
Diameter 
in  inches. 

Weight  per  foot 
in  pounds. 

Approximate 
BreakingStrain 
in  tons  of  2000 
pounds. 

Circumference  in 
inches  of 
^^anjla  Rope  of 
equal  strength. 

5^ 

5^4: 

S 

434 

134 

T-'/z 

4-85 

4-54 
4. 10 
3.68 
3.28 

42 

39 

34 

32 

28 

II 

loK 

10 

9K 

9 

43< 

4 

334 

334 

iH 

134 

T 3 

2.91 
2-54 
2 . 24 
1.96 
1.69 

25 

23 

21 

17 

15 

834 

8 

V/z 

fy'/z 

3 

234 

2>4 

234 

2 

I 

13 

TS’ 

1.44 
1 . 20 
0.98 
0.81 
0.62 

13 
1 1 
8.5 

7-3 

5-8 

6 

5/4 

5 

434 

4 

134 

I’A 

134 

I 

rs- 

V2 

7 

T'S’ 

0.47 
0-35 
0.25 
0.21 
0. 16 

4-2 
3-2 
2 . 2 
i!8 
1 .6 

334 

3 

234 

234 

2 

rs 

34 

Vz 

A 

¥ 

3 

TIT 

0.  122 
0.090 
0.060 
0 . 0-:^8 

1 .08 
0.85 
0.72 
0..39 

i>4 
I '4 
134 

I'.U 


GALVANIZED  IRON  AND  CAST  STEEL  RUNNING  ROPE. 

Composed  of  6 Strands  and  a Hemp  Center,  each  Strand  consisting'  of 
12  Wires  and  a Hemp  Core. 


Approximate 

Approximate  Breaking  Strain  in 

Circumference 

Weight  per 

tons  of  2,000  pi^unds. 

ia  inches. 

inches. 

Foot  in  lbs. 

Iron. 

Cast  Steel. 

3)4 

I 13 

10 

23 

3 

I 

0.97 

8.6 

20 

2)4 

X 

0.81 

7-3 

16.5 

2'A 

13 

IB- 

0.66 

5-6 

13  2 

2% 

X 

0.54 

4.8 

II  .2 

2 

X 

0.42 

3-8 

9.0 

9 

0.32 

2.7 

6.6 

X 

0.24 

2.  I 

5-3 

iX 

7 

TB’ 

0. 17 

1.4 

3-3 

iX 

Y% 

0. 14 

1-25 

2-7 

I 

6 

T?T 

0.  II 

I . I 

2.2 

GALVANIZED  STEEL  HAWSERS. 

Composed  of  6 Strands  and  a Hemp  Center,  each  Strand  consisting  of 
12  Wires  and  a Hemp  Core. 


Circumference 
in  indies. 

Approximate 
Diameter  in 
inches. 

Weight  per 
foot  in  lbs. 

Approximate 
Breaking  Strain 
in  tons  of 
2,000  lbs. 

Circumference 
in  inches  of 
Manila  Hawser 
ofequalstrength. 

sX 

5 

4X 

4X 

iX 

iX- 

iX 

3-25 

3-04 

2-75 

2.46 

2.20 

61 

57 

52 

45 

42 

13X 

13 

12X 

12 

4X 

4 

3X 

3X 

3X 

iXs 

iX 

T S 

^Tir 

iX 

ItV 

1-95 

1.70 

1.50 

1-31 

1-13 

39 

34 

30 

27 

23 

II 

10 

9X 

8X 

8X 

3 

2X 

2X 

I 

X 

13 

TB- 

0.97 

0.81 

0.66 

20.0 

16.5 

13.2 

• 8 

6'.^ 

6 

Note. — Sizes  above  5^  circumference  should  be  made  with  18  wires  to 
the  strand,  instead  of  12  wires. 

The  safe  working  load  is  one-tenth  of  the  breaking  strain. 


102 


APPROXIMATE  WEIGHT  AND  STRENGTH  OF  ROPE. 

Manila,  Sisal  and  Jute  Ropes  weigh  (ahont)  alike. 

Tarred  Hemp  Cordage  wUl  weigh  (about)  one-fonrth  more. 


Circumference 
in  inches. 

Diameter 
in  inches. 

Weight  of 
1,000  feet, 
lbs. 

Weight 

per 

Fathom, 

lbs. 

Number  of 
feet  in  i lb. 

1 Strength 
of  New 
1 Manila 
Rope,  lbs. 

^ in.  6 thread 

A 

23 

1 

T 

43  feet 

450 

I “ 9 “ 

33 

i . 

30  “ 

750 

IJ4“I2  “ 

H 

42 

X 

24  “ 

950 

7 

TF 

52 

A 

19  “ 

1,200 

iK 

Vz 

74 

9 

i3X“ 

1,700 

A 

lOI 

3 

T 

10  “ 

2.300 

2 

A 

132 

4 

? 

7X“ 

3,000 

A 

167 

I 

6 “ 

3,900 

1 3 

207 

iX 

5 “ 

4.700 

2^ 

% 

250 

iX 

4 “ 

5,700 

3 

I 

297 

If 

3X  “ 

6,750 

349 

^A 

2A  “ 

7,900 

3,'A 

405 

2^ 

2 A “ 

9,200 

iX 

465 

2f 

oX  H 
-^6 

10,600 

4 

T S 

529 

3s 

T 9 u 

12,000 

iKs 

597 

06 

iH“ 

15^500 

669 

4 

iX“ 

15,250 

4^ 

^V2 

746 

4X 

iX“ 

16,900 

5 

I A 

826 

5 

18,750 

sA 

^A 

1,000 

6 

I “ 

22,700 

6 

lA 

1,190 

7t 

10  inches 

27,000 

6.54: 

2 

1,291 

7 A 

9A  “ 

29,300 

6K 

1.397 

m 

8i  “ 

31,600 

7 

^A 

1,620 

9A 

7t 

36,750 

7A 

2 A 

1,860 

iii 

6A  “ 

42,200 

8 

2,116 

TO  ^ 

^-TTT 

-2/  it 

5/3 

48,000 

81^ 

^A 

2,388 

14X 

5 “ 

54,200 

9 

2,678 

i6xV 

4X  “ 

60,700 

9;^ 

3 

2,983 

^7  A 

4 “ 

67,700 

10 

3tV 

3.306 

I9i 

3X  “ 1 

75,000 

The  relative  strength  of  Manila  to  Sisal  is  about  as  7 is  to  5. 


193 


TABLE  SHOWING  APPROXIMATE  DIMENSIONS,  WEIGHTS,  TESTS, 
BREAKING  STRAINS  AND  SAFE  WORKING  LOADS  OF  CHAINS. 


Size.  I 

Inches. 

Average 
Weight 
per  Foot 
in  lbs. 

Outside 

Length. 

Inches. 

Outside 

Width. 

Inches. 

Proof  Test 
in  lbs. 

Approxi- 
mate 
Breaking 
Strain 
in  lbs. 

Average 

Safe 

Working 
Load  in 
lbs. 

X 

X 

X 

2,500 

5,000 

1,665 

A 

I 

iX 

3^500 

7,000 

2,340 

iX 

IX 

iX 

5,000 

10,000 

3-335 

2 

2 1 

iX 

7,000 

14,000 

4-670 

X 

2'A 

2X 

9.000 

18,000 

6,000 

IF 

3X 

2X 

iX 

11,000 

22,000 

7-335 

4 

3 

14,000 

27,000 

9,333 

1 6 

5 

3X 

2X 

17.000 

32,500 

11,335 

X 

6X 

3X 

2X 

20,000 

40,000 

13-333 

i-3. 

16 

7 

3X 

ol  1 

23,000 

42,000 

15,335 

8 

4 

2X 

26,000 

48,000 

17-333 

It 

16 

9 

4X 

3tV 

29,000 

54,000 

19,335 

I 

10 

4X 

3X 

32,000 

61,000 

21,333 

^tV 

12 

4X 

3A 

35-000 

69,000 

23.335 

13 

5X 

3X 

40,000 

78,000 

26,665 

14X 

5fV 

3X 

46,000 

88,000 

30,666 

IX 

16 

5X 

4X 

51,000 

95-000 

34,000 

17X 

6X 

4X 

54,000 

104,000 

36,000 

iX 

19 

6tV 

4A 

58,000 

114,000 

38,665 

I* 

21^ 

6H 

4X 

62,000 

122,000 

41,335 

IX 

23 

7 

5 

67,000 

134,000 

44,665 

25 

7X 

5^ 

70.500 

142,000 

47,000 

iX 

28 

7X 

5X 

77,000 

154,000 

51,335 

^ie 

30 

8X 

5Ti‘ 

79,000 

158,000 

52,666 

iX 

31 

8X 

5X 

83,000 

166,000 

55,333 

33 

8X 

6tV 

89,000 

178,000 

59,335 

iX 

35 

9X 

6X 

95,000 

190,000 

63,333 

T 1 6 

38 

9X 

101,000 

202,000 

67,333 

2 

40 

10 

6X 

0 

00 

0 

8 

216,000 

72,000 

o 1 

43 

loX 

6H 

115,000 

230,000 

76,666 

2X 

47 

1034 

7X 

122,000 

244,000 

00 

2-iV 

50 

iiX 

7tV 

129,000 

258,000 

86,000 

2X 

53 

iiX 

7X 

136,500 

27^,000 

91,000 

2X 

58X 

iiX 

8 

152,000 

^04,000 

101,333 

2X 

65 

I2X 

8X 

168,500 

337,000 

112,333 

2X 

70 

I2X 

8X 

181,000 

362,000 

120,666 

2X 

73 

13 

9X 

193-500 

387-000 

129,000 

2X 

76 

I3X 

9X 

206,000 

412,000 

137,333 

3 1 

86  1 

14 

9X 

218,000 

436,000 

145,333 

194 


“NEW  JERSEY”  COPPER  PAINTS 


R E M A RK  A"B  LE  FACT 

“^HIS  cut  IS  a copy  of  a photograph  of  a board  having  one  end  painted  with 
* NEW  JERSEY  COPfER  PAINT,  manufactured  by  Harry  Louderbough, 
proprietor  of  New  Tersry  Paint  Works,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  and  placed  in  the 
water  at  Port  Royal,  S.  C.,  for  five  months.  Upon  the  uiipainted  end  you  can 
note  the  ravages  of  the  salt  water  worm,  so  destructive  to  wood,  and  also  the  large 
number  of  barnacles  that  have  fastened  upon  it.  Observe  the  painted  end,  where 
New  Jersey  Copper  Paint  was  applied — its  splendid  condition. 


The  board  here  represented  was  placed  in  the  water  at  Port  Royal,  S.  C.,  by 
me,  and  left  in  the  water  five  months.  The  painted  end  was  as  good  as  when  it 
was  placed  in  the  water. 

MILLS  EDWARD,  Master  Schooner  “ Florence  Shay,** 


National  Export  Exposition  and  the  American  Institute  Fair  of  New  York 
have  awarded  us  the  highest  attainable  Medal  for  our  New  Jersey 
Copper  Paint,  Seam  Paint,  and  Pile  Preservative  Paint. 


195 


New  Jersey’’ 

Anti=Corrosive 

and 

Anti=FouIing 

Pain  ts 

FOR  IRON  VESSELS 

Note  what  our  testimonials  say: 

East  Boston,  Mass.,  Nov.  14,  1901. 

Mr.  H.  Londerbough. 

Dear  Sir  : — As  a ship  {painter,  I have  for  several  years  applied  and  sold  your 
“New  Jersey”  Marine  Paints  and  Yacht  Specialties,  and  found  that  they  were 
exceptionally  well  ground,  producing  a smooth  surface,  which,  with  their  well- 
known  Anti-fouling  qualities,  have  given  them  a popularity  that  no  other  Marine 
Paint  has.  Yours  truly, 

E.  B.  NICKERSON, 

63  Summer  St.  East  Boston,  Mass. 


New  Bedford,  Mass.,  Dec.  1,  1894. 

Mr.  E.  Louderbough. 

Dear  Sir  In  the  season  of  1893  and  1894  we  applied  at  our  Marine  Railway 
your  “ New  Jersey  ” Anti-Corrosive  Paint  and  Anti-Foulinv  Composition  on 
several  Iron  bottoms,  and  the  results  after  a thorough  trial  were  both  very 
satisfactory  to  ourselves  and  to  our  customers. 

Y'om-s  truly, 

ABRAM  CEACE  & CO., 

12  Merrill's  IVharf,  New  Bedford,  Mass. 


Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  Nov.  1,  1901. 

Mr.  E.  Louderbough. 

Dear  Sir  Our  acquaintance  with  marine  paints  has  rnn  over  a number  of 
years,  and  it  is  with  great  pleasure  we  endorse  yonr  “New  Jersey”  Copper 
Paint,  Anti-Corrosive  and  Anti-Fouling  Paints.  Also,  your  production  of  Iron 
Crown  Paint  for  Iron  Vessels  and  your  IVetterstedt  Copper  Paint. 

Yours  truly, 

BEET  & 3ETCEELL  CO. 

Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  Nov.  12, 1901. 

Barry  Louderbough. 

Dear  Sir  ; — Your  “New  Jersey  ” Copper  Paint  and  your  Anti-Corrosive  and 
Anti-Fouling  Paints  have  for  many  years  been  used  very  freely  at  our  Dry 
Docks,  and  we  can  cbeerfully  give  them  the  hearty  endorsement  they  deser\’e, 
for  they  have  both  satisfied  our  patrons  as  well  as  ourselves. 

Yours  truly, 

TEE  BROWN  DRY  DOCK  COMPANY. 


196 


^^New  Jersey’^ 

Copper  Paint 

LEADS  THEM  ALL 


so  OUR  TESTIMONIALS  SAY 


Xew  York,  Jane  10,  1895. 

Mr.  Harry  Londerboiigh. 

Hear  Sir  I liave  just  painted  at  Tietjen  & Lang’s  Dry  Dock,  at  Hoboken, 
N.  .T  , the  Pilot  Boat  “ .James  Gordon  Benneit,”  and  it  affords  me  great  pleasure 
to  give  your  “ New  Jersey  ” Copper  Paint  iny  endorsement.  Some  years  ago  I 
was  induced  to  give  your  Yacht  Red  Copper  a trial,  and  it  has  always  proven 
itself  to  be  the  best  production  for  the  bottom  of  a vessel  that  I have  ever  used, 
and  it  is  now  generally  used  by  our  Pilot  Boats  in  New  York  Harbor. 

JAMES  F.  BROJVN, 

Master  Pilot  Boat  “James  Gordon  Bennett.” 


Norfolk,  Ta.,  Oct.  10,  1901. 

Mr.  H.  Londerbongh. 

Dear  Sir  : — After  a ti  ial  of  many  years  at  our  Shipyard  and  Railways  at 
Norfolk,  Va.,  your  "New  Jersey’’  Copper  Paint  has  stood  the  test  of  many 
trials,  and  proven  itself  to  l>e  the  best  Anti-Fouling  Paint  ever  used  in  the  waters 
of  our  bay,  and  for  years  I have  only  carried  yonr  brand  in  stock,  and  many 
patrons  that  I have  induced  to  try  it,  all  express  themselves  as  being  well 
pleased  with  the  results  of  such  trials. 

CHAS.  J.  COLONNA. 


Galveston,  Texas,  Nov.  13,  1901. 

Mr.  H.  Louderbough. 

Dear  Sir  Our  Southern  waters  are  verj’  troublesome  to  our  vessels,  as  they 
promote  the  formation  of  barnacles  and  vegetation,  and  your  production  of 
“New  Jersey”  Copper  Paint  has  proven  itself  to  be  all  that  yon  claim  for  it, 
doing  its  work  as  an  Anti-Fouling  Paint  very  successfully.  Our  sales  of  your 
Perfect  Ship  Black,  in  connection  with  your  Copper  Paint,  meets  with  the  Very 
strong  endorsement  of  our  friends  and  ourselves.  A'ours  truly, 

T.  L.  CROSS  & CO. 


Brooklyn,  N.  Y.,  Nov.  9, 1901. 

Mr.  H.  Londerbongh. 

Dear  Sir : — At  our  three  Dry  Docks  we  have  for  several  years  used  your 
“New  Jersey  ” Copper  Paint,  and  it  is  with  a great  deal  of  pleasure  tha^'wegive 
it  our  endorsement  for  all  the  good  qualities  it  possesses ; it  being  smoothly 
ground,  it  is  easy  to  ajiply,  producing  a good  sailing  as  well  as  a good  Anti- 
Fouling  surface.  Yours  truly, 

WM.  GOKEY. 


197 

GR0V£R  c.  B£RGD0LL 

INDEX 

PAGE 

Abeam  44 

Abreast  44 

Acids,  how  stowed  83 

Amboy,  Perth,  from  sea  to  20 

Amboy,  South,  from  sea  to  22 

Ambrose  Channel  17 

Ambrose  Channel  Lightship  28 

Anchorages  150 

Anchorage,  Sandy  Hook  Bay  23 

Anchorages,  how  marked  46 

Ancliored  in  a fairway  95 

Anchored  near  a shoal  93 

Anchor,  fog  signals  for  vessels  at  53 

Anclior,  lights  for  vessels  at  63 

Aunt  Phebe  Rock  40 

Aunt  Phebe  Rock  light  33 

Automobiles,  how  carried  80 

Azimuth  tables  7 1 

Baileys  Rock  39 

Baileys  Rock  Gas  buoy  33 

Barratto  Point,  spot  off  42 

Barrels,  to  stow  76 

Bearings  and  distances  between  headlands  43 

Bearings,  examples  74 

Bergen  Point  light  32 

Bergen  Point  Reef  37 

Big  Tom  Rock  41 

Black  buoys  45 

Blackwell’s  Island  light  31 

Blackwell’s  Island  Reef  lights  31 

Blackwell’s  Island  Reef  39 

Blackwell’s  Island,  shoal  off  42 


198 


PAGE 

Blast,  prolonged  46 

Blast,  short  46 

Blauzes,  Tlie  41 

BluflF  light  (Fort  Wadsworth)  30 

Boat  drill  87 

Boundary  Beacon  31 

Boundary  lines  of  the  high  seas  111 

Buoyage  163 

Buoyage,  System  of  45 

Buoys,  black  45 

Buoys,  can  45 

Buoys,  even  numbers  45 

Buoys,  mid-channel  or  fairway  45 

Buoys,  nun  45 

Buoys,  obstruction  45 

Buoys,  odd  numbers  45 

Buoys,  red  45 

Buoys,  red  and  black  horizontal  stripes  45 

Buoys,  white  46 

Buoys,  white  and  black  perpendicular  stripes  45 

Buoys  with  balls,  cages,  etc.  45 

Buoys,  yellow  46 

Canal  boats  and  barges  from  other  districts,  not  to  change 

lights  60 

Canal  boats  and  barges,  lights  for  58 

Can  buoys  45 

Captain  Island  light,  Great  32 

Carboys  of  acids,  where  stowed  77 

Cargo,  heavy  in  river  steamer  76 

Cargo  liable  to  spontaneous  combustion  79 

Cargo  prohibited  79 

Casks,  to  stow  76 

Casks,  to  stow  second  tier  77 

Cask,  to  find  bung  side  in  dark  77 

Cask,  why  stowed  bung  up  77 


199 


PAGE 

Centerville  light  32 

Central  range,  inland  steamers,  description  of  55 

Central  range  lights  for  ferryboats  58 

Chains,  strength  of  193 

Chapel  Hill  Beacon  29 

Chapel  Hill  Cut  30 

Charlotte  Rock  38 

Chart,  compass  on  75 

Chart,  figures  on  75 

Chart,  Mercator  75 

Chart,  symbols  on  188 

Chart,  to  find  course  and  distance  on  76 

Chart,  what  is  74 

Chimney  Sweeps  41 

Code,  international  186 

Coenties  Reef  38 

College  Point  Reef  41 

Collision,  duty  in  case  of  92 

Collision,  duty  to  stand  by  143 

Command,  not  under,  signals  64 

Compass  8 

Compass  bearing  70 

Compass,  chief  essentials  69 

Compass  Course  70 

Compass  error  70 

Compass,  names  of  points  69 

Compass  points  and  degrees,  table  2 

Compass,  selecting  a place  for  69 

Compass,  when  out  of  use  70 

Coney  Island  light  30 

Conover  Beacon  29 

Corning  Rock  40 

Corning  Rock  light  33 

Craven  Shoal  36 

Cross-bearings  76 


200 


PAGE 

Cross-bearings,  chart  work  74 

Cross  Signals  47 

Cross  signals,  Rule  forbidding  use  48 

Cuban  Ledge  41 

Ranger  signal  47 

Dangerous  cargo,  penalty  for  unlawful  shipment  82 

Deviation  70 

ffeviation,  examples  73^  74 

Deviation,  causes  of  73 

Deviations,  how  corrected  73 

Deviation,  objects  on  shore  used  to  find  71 

Deviation,  to  find,  by  azimuth  tables  71 

Deviation,  to  find  extent  of  73 

Deviation,  to  find,  from  bearings  of  objects  on  shore  71 

Deviation  table,  to  construct  71,  72 

Deviation  table,  to  test  72 

Deviation,  to  name  east  or  west  72 

Deviation,  reciprocal  bearings  71 

Deviation,  when  change  72 

Digger,  passing  near  44 

Dimond  Reef  38 

Distress  signals  68 

Dock,  vessel  on,  report  84 

Dredges,  lights  for  65 

Dredges,  self-propelling  suction,  lights  for  66 

Dredges,  signals  for  65 

Dredging  vessels,  lights  for  62 

Dumping  grounds,  how  marked  46 

East  Bank  36 

East  Knolls  35 

East  River  to  Sunken  Meadow  21 

Eighteen  Foot  Spot  (Fifth  Street,  Long  Island  City)  38 

Eighteen  Foot  Spot  (Seventh  Street,  Long  Island  City)  39 

Elizabethport,  Perth  Ambo}’  to  24 

Elizabetbport,  Robbins  Reef  to  25 


201 


PAGE 

Elm  Tree  Beacon  30 

Emerald  Rock  39 

Equipment,  penalty  for  neglect  of  91 

Execution  Rocks  39 

Execution  Rocks  light  32 

Execution  Rocks  to  Sunken  Meadow  22 

False  Hook  Channel  19 

False  Hook  Shoal  35 

Ferryboat  distinguishing  signal  58 

Ferryboats,  central  range  lights  58 

Ferryboats,  lights  for  57 

Ferry  Reef  38 

Fire  alarm  87 

Fire  drill  87 

Fire,  duty  in  case  of  83 

Fire  extinguisher  for  motor  boats  142 

Fire  hose  87 

Fifteen-and-one-half-Foot  Rock  37 

Fishing  vessels,  lights  for  62 

Flood  Rock  42 

Flushing  Bay  Inner  Light  33 

Flushing  Bay  light  33 

Flynn  Knoll  35 

Fog  bell  for  motor  boats,  size  of  141 

Fog-bell,  size  of  84 

Fog,  Rule  regarding  speed  in  53 

Fog  signals  for  vessels  at  anchor  53 

Fog  signals,  inland  steamer  under  way  52 

Fog  signals,  inland  steamer  with  a tow  52 

Fog  signals,  ocean  steamer  under  way  53 

Fog  signals,  ocean  steamer  under  way,  but  stopped  53 

Fog  signals,  ocean  steamer  with  a tow  53 

Fog  signals,  sailing  vessel  under  way  67 

Fog  signals,  vessels  at  anchor  53 

Fog  signals,  vessels  being  towed  52 


202 


PAGE 

Port  Lafayette  Fog  Signal  Station  30 

Fort  Totten  lights  33 

Fort  Wadsworth  light  30 

Four  short  blasts,  not  less  than  47 

Frying  Pan  42 

Gangway  Rock  40 

Gedney  Channel  18 

Gedney  Channel,  example  44 

Glass  globes,  size  of  54 

Governor’s  Island  Extension  light  31 

Governor’s  Island  light  31 

Governor’s  Island  South  Shoal  38 

Governor’s  Island  West  End  Shoal  37 

Gowanus  Flats  37 

Grand  Street  to  Houston  Street,  shoal  38 

Gravesend  Bay  36 

Great  Beds  light  31 

Great  Captain  Island  light  32 

Great  Kills  light  31 

Gun,  line  carrying,  drill  87 

Hallets  Point  light,  spot  off  42 

Harbor  Rock  40 

Harbor  Rock  light  33 

Hart  Island  Reef  41 

Hawsers,  where  to  shorten  145 

Haw,  straw,  etc.,  how  stowed  83 

Head  light  (inland  steamer)  description  of  and  distance 

visible  54 

Heeling  error  70 

Heel  Tap  Rock  42 

Hell  Gate  light  34 

Hewletts  Point  Shoal  41 

Hicks  Ledge  39 

Highlands,  Navesink  light  28 

Hog  Back  42 


Holmes  Rock 

42 

Hudson  River  to  Yonkers 

20 

Hunt’s  Point,  shoal  off 

41 

Inland  pilot  rules 

96 

Inspection  of  steamer,  duty  of  officer 

95 

International  code 

186 

International  rules 

166 

Jackson  Slip  Shoal  (Corlears  Hook) 

38 

Jeffrey’s  Hook  lights 

31 

Jersey  Flats 

37 

Junction  light 

32 

Land,  making  in  bad  weatlier 

93 

Latitude,  what  is 

74 

Lawrence  Point  Ledge  light 

34 

Lead-line 

91 

Leeway 

70 

Length  of  a vessel,  how  determined 

63 

Letters,  proper  form 

7 

License,  how  to  obtain 

5 

Lifeboat,  equipment  of 

84 

Lifeboats,  how  carried  and  cared  for 

84 

Life-preserver  notices 

92 

Life-preservers,  number  required 

86 

Life-preservers,  location  of 

86 

Life-preserver,  test 

88 

Liferaft,  equipment  of 

86 

Light,  additional,  for  overtaken  vessel 

63 

Light,  distinguishing  signal  for  ferryboats 

58 

Light  for  rowing  boat 

61 

Light  for  vessel  towing  to  steer  by 

56,  57 

Light,  head  (inland  steamer)  description  of 

and  distance 

visible 

54 

Liglit,  masthead,  ocean,  steamer,  height  of,  distance  visible, 
etc. 

Light  screens,  inboard,  length  of 


56 
54,  56 


204 


PAGE 

Light  screens,  side,  length  of  167 

Liglits.  description  of  28 

Lights  for  canal  boats  and  barges  58 

Lights  for  canal  boats  and  barges,  not  to  change  00 

Lights  for  dredges  65 

Lights  for  ferryboats  57 

Lights  for  motor  boats  140,  141 

Lights  for  motor  boats,  size  of  140,  141 

Lights  for  pilot  boats  61 

Liglits  for  rafts,  etc.  67 

Lights  for  sailing  vessel  57 

Lights  for  sailing  vessel  under  way  or  being  towed  57 

Lights  for  scows  being  towed  60 

Lights  for  self-propelling  suction  dredges  66 

Lights  for  vessels  at  anchor  63 

Lights  for  vessels  fishing,  trawling  or  dredging  62 

Lights  for  vessels  laying  pipe,  etc.  66 

Lights,  inland  steamer  under  way  54 

Lights,  inland  steamer  with  a tow  55 

Lights,  ocean  steamer  under  way  with  and  without  a tow  56 

Lights,  ocean  steamer  with  a tow  57 

Lights,  side,  described  and  distance  visible  54,  50 

Lights,  when  to  e.xhibit  54 

List  of  questions  9 

Loading  a ship,  precautions  79 

Longitude,  what  is  74 

Lump  (near  Ambrose  Channel  Lightship)  35 

Lump  (near  South  Channel)  35 

Lunitidal  intervals  147 

Machaux  Rock  40 

Magnetic  bearing  70 

Magnets,  effect  of  like  and  unlike  poles  of  72 

Main  Channel  18 

Master,  duties  of  94 

Masthead  light,  ocean  steamer,  height  of.  distance  visible, etc.  56 


205 


PAGE 

Matches,  how  carried  80 

Matclies,  how  stowed  83 

Mercator  chart  described  75 

Mercator  chart,  measure  distance  75 

Mercator  chart,  measure  latitude  75 

Mercator  chart,  measure  longitude  75 

Meridian,  what  is  74 

Mid-channel  Rock  37 

Middle  Ground  37 

Middle  Ground  42 

Middle  Reef  40 

Middle  Shoal  ' 39 

Miles,  statute  into  nautical  94 

Mill  Rock  42 

Mill  Rock  North  light  34 

Mill  Rock  South  light  34 

Motor  boat  regulations  139 

Narrow  channels,  Rule  for  52 

Narrow  channel,  steamers  meeting  95 

Narrow  Shoal  (between  Dimond  Reef  and  Atlantic  Ave., 

Brooklyn ) 38 

Nautical  miles  into  statute  miles,  table  184 

Navesink  (Highlands)  light  28 

Navigating  unlawfully,  penalty  for  93 

Negro  Point  light  34 

Nes  Rock  38 

New  Dorp  Beacon  30 

New  York,  New  Haven  and  Hartford  R,  R,  piers,  rock  off  42 

North  Brother  Island  light  33 

North  Brother  Island,  shoal  off  42 

Nun  buoys  45 

Oak  Bluff  lights  33 

Oak  Bluff  Rock  42 

Ocean  steamer,  after  range  light  5G 

Ocean  steamer  under  way,  but  stopped,  fog  signals  53 


206 


Officer  relieving,  duty  of 

PAGE 

04 

Oil  (Spot 

34 

Old  Hen  Rock 

30 

Old  Orchard  Shoal 

30 

Old  Orchard  Shoal  light 

30 

One  short  blast 

46 

Outer  Middle  Ground 

34 

Overtaken  vessel,  additional  light  for 

63 

Palestine  Shoal 

35 

Pamarapo  light 

32 

Perth  Amboy,  from  sea  to 

20 

Perth  Amboy  to  Elizabethport 

24 

Petroleum  as  cargo 

77 

Petroleum,  crude,  flash  point 

82 

Petroleum,  flash  point 

77,  80 

Pilgrim  Rock 

38 

Pilot  boat,  lights  for 

61 

Pilot  boats,  portable  side-lights 

61 

Pilot,  signal  for 

91 

Pitch  of  the  Hook 

35 

Point  Comfort  Beacon 

20 

Poles,  effect  of  like  and  unlike 

72 

Portable  side-lights 

60,  62 

Portable  side-lights,  painted 

61 

Pot  Rock 

42 

Princess  Bay  light 

31 

Prolonged  blast 

46 

Propellers,  “right”  and  “left”  handed 

45 

Publications  required 

91 

Questions  and  answers 

17 

Questions,  list  of 

9 

Rat  Island 

41 

Reciprocal  bearings 

71 

Red  buoys 

45 

Red  Hook  Flats 

37 

207 


Report,  monthly 

PAGE 

91 

Rhinelander  Reef 

42 

Richmond,  Staten  Island,  light 

29 

Rikers  Island  light 

33 

Robbins  Reef 

37 

Robbins  Reef  light 

30 

Robbins  Reef  to  Elizabethport 

25 

Rockaway  Shoals 

35 

Rock  between  Barratto  Point  and  Oak  Bluff 

42 

Rock  between  Gangway  and  Success  Rocks 

40 

Rocks  and  Shoals,  description  of 

34 

Rocks  between  Huckleberry  Island  and  Middle 

Shoal 

39 

Rocks,  group  between  Hart  Island  and  Chimney 

Sweeps 

41 

Romer  Shoal 

36 

Romer  Shoal  light 

28 

Rope,  wire,  strength  of  189,  190, 

191,  192 

Roimd  Shoal 

36 

Rowing  boat,  light  for 

61 

R.  R.  Stevens  Rock 

40 

Rule,  avoid  crossing  ahead  of  the  other 

52 

Rule  forbidding  use  of  cross  signals 

48 

Rule  regarding  speed  in  fog 

53 

Rule,  steam  vessel  and  sailing  vessel 

51 

Rules,  when  departure  from  is  permitted 

52 

Sailing  vessel,  lights  for 

57 

Sailing  vessel,  tack  on 

67 

Sailing  vessel  under  way,  fog  signals 

67 

Sailing  vessels  under  way,  sailing  rules 

67 

Saltersville  light 

32 

Sands  Point  light 

33 

Sands  Point  Reef 

39 

Sandy  Hook  Bay  Anchorage 

23 

Sandy  Hook  Fog  Bell  Station 

28 

Sandy  Hook  Main  light 

28 

Sandy  Hook  North  Beacon 

28 

208 


PAGE 

Sandy  Hook  Soutli  Beacon  28 

Scotland  Lightship  28 

Scows  being  towed,  lights  for  00 

Screens,  inboard,  length  of  54 

Screens,  inboard,  length  of  50 

Screens,  side-light,  length  of  107 

Sea-going  steamer,  after  range  light  55 

Searchlight,  penalty  for  flashing  90 

Shell  Reef  3S 

Short  blast  40 

Short  blasts,  not  less  than  four  47 

Short  blast,  one  40 

Short  blasts,  three  47 

Short  blasts,  two  47 

Shrewsbury  Rocks  34 

Side-lights  described  and  distance  visible  54 

Side-lights  described  and  distance  visible  56 

Side-light  screens,  length  of  107 

Side-lights,  portable  60 

Side-lights,  portable  62 

Side-lights,  portable  for  certain  pilot  boats  61 

Side-lights,  portable,  painted  61 

Signal,  approaching  head  and  head  48 

Signal,  fail  to  understand  47 

Signal  for  a pilot  91 

Signals  for  passing  48 

Signal,  moving  dock  or  berth  50 

Signal,  nearing  a short  bend  49 

Signals,  approaching  each  other  at  riglit  angles  or  obliquely  51 
Signals,  cross,  Rule  forbidding  use  48 

Signals,  distress  68 

Signals,  fog,  inland  steamer  under  way  52 

Signals,  fog,  inland  steamer  with  a tow  52 

Signals,  fog,  ocean  steamer  under  way  53 

Signals,  fog,  ocean  steamer  under  way,  but  stopped  53 


GROVER  ^C.  BERGDOLL 


PAGE 

Signals,  fog,  ocean  steamer  with  a tow  53 

Signals,  fog,  sailing  vessel  under  way  67 

Signals,  fog,  vessel  being  towed  52 

Signals,  fog,  vessels  at  anchor  53 

Signals  for  dredges  65 

Signals,  for  steamers,  derrick  boats,  etc.,  alongside  of  wreck  65 
Signals  for  vessels  laying  pipe,  etc.  66 

Signals,  not  under  command  64 

Signals  in  addition  to  lights  63 

Signals,  pilot  house  to  engine  room  93,  164,  165 

Signals,  running  in  the  same  direction  50 

Signals,  towing  submerged  objects  64 

Signals,  wliistle,  prohibited  47 

Signals,  whistle,  when  used  47 

South  Amboy,  from  sea  to  22 

South  and  East  Notations  40 

South  and  Swash  Channels  19 

South  Brother  Island  Ledge  light  34 

South  Jetty  light  No.  3 32 

Southwest  Spit  35 

Spindle  Rock  39 

Spot  off  Barratto  Point  42 

Stability,  test  of  95 

Staten  Island  Flats  36 

Staten  Island  light,  Richmond  29 

Station  bill  86 

Statute  miles  into  nautical  miles,  table  185 

Steamer  being  inspected,  duty  of  officer  95 

Steam  whistle,  location  of  86 

Stepping  Stones  41 

Stepping  Stones  light  33 

Story's  Flats  37 

Stoves,  protection  of  woodwork  87 

Success  Rock  40 

Sunken  Meadow,  from  Execution  Rocks  to  22 


210 


PAGE 

Sunken  Meadow,  from  upper  bay  to  21 

Sunken  Meadow  light  . 34 

Swash  Channel  19 

Swash  Channel,  example  43,  44 

System  of  buoyage  45 

Table,  compass  points  and  degrees  2 

Tar,  oil,  rosin,  etc.,  where  stowed  77 

Ten  Foot  Spot  39 

Third  Street  Reef  38 

Three  short  blasts  47 

Throgs  Neck  light  33 

Throgs  Neck  shoal  41 

Tidal  currents.  East  River  148 

Tidal  dillerences  148 

Tides,  lunitidal  intervals  147 

Towing  submerged  objects,  signals  for  C4 

Tows,  where  to  bunch  145 

Trawling  vessels,  lights  for  02 

True  bearing  70 

True  course  71 

Turpentine,  how  carried  80 

Twenty-sixth  Street  Reef  38 

Two  short  blasts  47 

Variation  70 

Variation  of  the  compass  102 

Vessels  fishing,  trawling  or  dredging,  lights  for  02 

Waackaack  Beacon  29 

Watchmen,  duties  of,  etc.  91 

West  Bank  30 

West  Bank  light  29 

Western  Jetty  lower  end  light  No.  1 31 

Western  Jetty  upper  end  light  No.  2 32 

West  Knolls  35 

Whistle  for  motor  boats  141 

Whistle  signals  prohibited  47 


f 


211 

' PAGE 

Whistle  signals,  when  used  47 

Whistles,  penalty  for  blowing  unnecessary  93 

White  buoys  46 

Whitestone  light,  shoal  off  41 

Whitestone  Point  light  33 

Wines,  liquors,  etc.,  where  stowed  77 

Wreck,  signals  for  steamers,  derrick  boats,  etc.,  alongside  of  65 
Yellow  buoys  46 

Yonkers,  from  Battery  to  20 


GROVER  C.  BERGDOLL 


